q PRINT q COPY q SCAN

ECOSYS M6026cdn
ECOSYS M6026cdn Type B
OPERATION GUIDE
q PRINT q COPY q SCAN q FAX

ECOSYS M6526cdn
ECOSYS M6526cdn Type B

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Introduction
Thank you for your purchase of ECOSYS M6026cdn/ECOSYS M6026cdn Type B/ECOSYS M6526cdn/
ECOSYS M6526cdn Type B.
This Operation Guide is intended to help you operate the machine correctly, perform routine maintenance and
take a simple troubleshooting action as necessary, so that you can always use the machine in good condition.
Please read this Operation Guide before you start using the machine.
We recommend the use of our own brand supplies. We will not be liable for any damage caused by the use of
third party supplies in this machine.
A label shown in the illustration assures that the supplies are our own brand.

Included Guides
The following guides are supplied with the machine. Refer to them as necessary.
Quick Installation Guide
Describes the procedures for installation of the machine, frequently-used operations, routine maintenance, and
troubleshooting action.
Safety Guide
Provides safety and cautionary information for the installation and use of the machine. Be sure to read this guide
before using the machine.
Safety Guide (ECOSYS M6026cdn/ECOSYS M6026cdn Type B/ECOSYS M6526cdn/ECOSYS M6526cdn Type B)
Describes the machine installation space, cautionary space, and other information. Be sure to read this guide
before using the machine.
DVD (Product Library)
Operation Guide (This Guide)
Describes how to load paper, basic copy, print and scan operations, and troubleshooting.

Fax Operation Guide

Command Center RX User Guide
Printer Driver Operation Guide
Network FAX Driver Operation Guide
KYOCERA Net Direct Print Operation Guide
KYOCERA Net Viewer User Guide
PRESCRIBE Commands Technical Reference
PRESCRIBE Commands Command Reference

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Safety Conventions in This Guide
The sections of this guide and parts of the machine marked with symbols are safety warnings meant to protect
the user, other individuals and surrounding objects, and ensure correct and safe usage of the machine. The
symbols and their meanings are indicated below.

WARNING: Indicates that serious injury or even death may result from insufficient attention to or
incorrect compliance with the related points.

CAUTION: Indicates that personal injury or mechanical damage may result from insufficient attention
to or incorrect compliance with the related points.

Symbols
The  symbol indicates that the related section includes safety warnings. Specific points of attention are
indicated inside the symbol.

.... [General warning]

.... [Warning of high temperature]

The symbol indicates that the related section includes information on prohibited actions. Specifics of the
prohibited action are indicated inside the symbol.

.... [Warning of prohibited action]

.... [Disassembly prohibited]

The  symbol indicates that the related section includes information on actions which must be performed.
Specifics of the required action are indicated inside the symbol.

.... [Alert of required action]

.... [Remove the power plug from the outlet]

[Always connect the machine to an outlet with a ground

....
connection]

Please contact your service representative to order a replacement if the safety warnings in this Operation Guide
are illegible or if the guide itself is missing (fee required).

NOTE: An original which resembles a bank note closely may not be copied properly in some rare cases
because this machine is equipped with a counterfeiting prevention function.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Contents

Contents
Quick Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v
Menu Map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxi
Laser Safety (Europe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiv
Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxv
Legal and Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvi

1 Part Names
Operation Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

2 Preparation before Use

Check bundled items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Connecting Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Power On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Energy Saver Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Switching the Language for Display [Language] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Setting Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Installing Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Command Center RX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Loading Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
Loading Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65

3 Basic Operation
Login/Logout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
One-Touch Keys and Program Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Message Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Printing - Printing from Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Sending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Preparation for sending a document to a PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Confirm Destination Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Specifying Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Scanning using TWAIN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
Canceling Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Checking Remaining Toner and Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47

4 Copying Functions
Original Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Paper Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Original Orientation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
EcoPrint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Combine Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Continuous Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Job Finish Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
File Name Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Print Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Color Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

ii

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Contents

Color Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

Sharpness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Background Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Saturation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25

5 Sending Functions
Original Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Sending Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Duplex Sending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Original Orientation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
File Separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Original Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Adjusting Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Scan Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Color / Grayscale / Black and White Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Continuous Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
File Name Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Subject and Body Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Sharpness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Background Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
WSD Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Job Finish Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
FTP Encrypted TX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Scanning Image using Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30

6 Document Box
Printing Documents Stored in USB Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Removing USB Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Printing from a Custom Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Printing from a Job Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16

7 Status / Job Cancel

Checking Job Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Checking Job History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Sending the Job Log History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Pause and Resumption of Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Canceling of Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Device/Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20

8 Default Setting (System Menu)

Common Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Copy Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-69
Sending Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-75
Document Box Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-83
Printer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-99
Printing Reports/Sending Notice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-117
Adjustment/Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-123
Date/Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-141
Editing Destination (Address Book/Adding One-Touch Keys) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-158
Restarting the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-173
Network Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-174

iii

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Contents

Network Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-185

Optional Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-196
NW InterfaceSend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-208
Interface Block Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-209
Security Level (Security Level setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-214
Optional Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-215

9 Maintenance
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Toner Container Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Replacing the Waste Toner Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

10 Troubleshooting
Solving Malfunctions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Responding to Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Clearing Paper Jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16

11 Management
User Login Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Job Accounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
Checking the Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-35

Appendix
Optional Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix-2
Character Entry Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix-9
Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix-13
Color balance adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix-23
Sharpness adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix-24
Color saturation adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix-24
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix-25
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix-29

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index-1

iv

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Quick Guide Be sure to read Legal and Safety Information
before using this machine.

Administrator tasks

To make copies To print

Simply press the Start key to make You can print via a network or print
copies. You can also fine tune the a PDF file directly from USB
It copies. It prints.
copy settings by changing the memory.
paper size, adjusting the density,
etc.

Copying with Printing Documents Print

What specific Stored in Removable via a
you want settings USB Memory network
to do

Connecting Cables

Network Setup
(LAN Cable Connection)

Install the printer

driver on your
computer *1
Setup

Loading Paper...2-47

Placing Originals on
the Platen...2-65

Printing Printing -
Copying Functions Documents Stored Printing from
Operation
...4-1 in USB Memory Applications
... 6-2 ...3-21

*1: For more information, refer to the Printer Driver User Guide.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Administrator tasks

To send documents
You can send scanned images via a network. Or, you can also store scanned images in
USB memory.
It sends.

Send Send to Saving

What as Folder Documents to
you want E-mail (SMB) USB Memory
to do

Connecting Cables

Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection) Plug the USB

memory

Create a shared folder on the destination

computer. ...3-31

Setup
Editing Destination (Address Book/Adding
One-Touch Keys)...8-158

Place the originals on the platen

Sending ...3-24 *1 Saving Documents

Operation to USB Memory
Sending Functions ...5-1
(Scan to USB) ...6-5

*1: If the destination is not stored in the address book, you can send by entering the address
directly.

vi

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Administrator tasks

To send a FAX (Only on products with the fax function installed)

As well as sending a FAX via the telephone lines, you can also send a FAX via a network.
It faxes. NOTE: For more information on setting up and sending a FAX, refer to the FAX Operation
Guide.

FAX directly
What Send a FAX from a
you want computer
to do

Connect the modular cord for the

telephone line to this machine.

Selection of Telephone Line

(Inch version only)

Network Setup
(LAN Cable Connection)

Install the Network FAX

Driver on your computer *1
Setup

Selection of Transmit Terminal Identification

(TTI)...2-3
on the FAX Operation Guide *2

Place the originals on the platen

FAX Operation About Network

(Basic) ...3-1 FAX ...7-1
Operation
on the FAX Operation on the FAX Operation
Guide Guide

*1: For more information, refer to the Network FAX Driver Operation Guide.
*2: If the destination is not stored in the address book, you can send the
FAX by entering the address directly.

vii

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Menu Map

Copy key Function Menu key Paper Selection (page 4-4)

Collate (page 3-19)

Duplex (page 3-15)

Zoom (page 3-12)

Combine (page 4-11)

Original Size (page 4-2)

Orig.Orientation (page 4-8)

Original Image (page 3-10)

Density (page 3-9)

EcoPrint (page 4-10)

Continuous Scan (page 4-14)

File Name Entry (page 4-17)

JobFinish Notice (page 4-15)

Print Override (page 4-18)

Color Selection (page 4-19)

Color Balance (page 4-20)

Sharpness (page 4-22)

Backgrnd Density (page 4-23)

Saturation (page 4-25)

Send key Function Menu key Color Selection (page 5-18)

Original Size (page 5-2)

Original Image (page 5-15)

Scan Resolution (page 5-17)

Sending Size (page 5-4)

Zoom (page 5-6)

Orig.Orientation (page 5-10)

Continuous Scan (page 5-19)

(Continued on next (Continued on next
File Format (page 5-12)
page) page)
File Name Entry (page 5-20)

viii

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Send key Function Menu key Subject Entry (page 5-21)

(Continued from (Continued from JobFinish Notice (page 5-27)

previous page) previous page)
FAX Resolution (FAX OPERATION
GUIDE)

FAX Delayed TX (FAX OPERATION

GUIDE)

FAX Direct TX (FAX OPERATION

GUIDE)

FAX RX Polling (FAX OPERATION

GUIDE)

Density (page 5-16)

Duplex (page 5-8)

FTP Encrypted TX (page 5-29)

File Separation (page 5-14)

Sharpness (page 5-22)

Backgrnd Density (page 5-23)

Document Box key Custom Box (page 6-8)

Sub Address Box (FAX OPERATION

GUIDE)

Polling Box (FAX OPERATION

GUIDE)

Job Box (page 6-16)

USB Memory (page 6-2)

ix

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Document Box key Function Menu key Collate (page 3-19)

USB printing Paper Selection (page 4-4)

Duplex (page 3-15)

EcoPrint (page 4-10)

File Name Entry (page 4-17)

JobFinish Notice (page 4-15)

Print Override (page 4-18)

Color Selection (page 4-19)

Encrypted PDF

JPEG/TIFF Print (page 6-3)

XPS FitTo Page (page 6-4)

Document Box key Function Menu key File Name Entry (page 4-17)

Other than USB printing JobFinish Notice (page 4-15)

Print Override (page 4-18)

Del. after Print

Document Box key Function Menu key Original Size (FAX OPERATION
GUIDE)
Scan to Polling Box
Original Image (FAX OPERATION
GUIDE)

Scan Resolution (FAX OPERATION

GUIDE)

Orig.Orientation (FAX OPERATION

GUIDE)

Continuous Scan (FAX OPERATION

GUIDE)

File Name Entry (FAX OPERATION

GUIDE)

JobFinish Notice (FAX OPERATION

GUIDE)

Density (FAX OPERATION

GUIDE)

Duplex (FAX OPERATION

GUIDE)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Document Box key Function Menu key Color Selection (page 5-18)

Scan to USB Memory Original Size (page 5-2)

Original Image (page 5-15)

Scan Resolution (page 5-17)

Storing Size

Zoom (page 5-6)

Orig.Orientation (page 5-10)

Continuous Scan (page 5-19)

File Format (page 5-12)

File Name Entry (page 5-20)

JobFinish Notice (page 5-27)

Density (page 5-16)

Duplex (page 5-8)

Sharpness (page 5-22)

Backgrnd Density (page 5-23)

Status/Job Cancel key Print Job Status (page 7-2)

Send Job Status (page 7-2)

Store Job Status (page 7-2)

Scheduled Job (page 7-8)

Print Job Log (page 7-8)

Send Job Log (page 7-8)

Store Job Log (page 7-8)

FAX Job Log (page 7-8)

Scanner (page 7-20)

Printer (page 7-20)

FAX (page 7-21)

Toner Status (page 3-47)

Paper Status (page 3-47)

USB Memory (page 7-21)

SSD (page 7-21)

USB Keyboard (page 7-22)

xi

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 System Menu/Counter Report Report Print Menu Map (page 8-117)
key
Status Page (page 8-117)

Font List (page 8-118)

Opt NW Status (page 8-118)

Admin Rpt Outgoing FAX Rpt (FAX

Set. OPERATION
GUIDE)

Incoming FAX Rpt (FAX

OPERATION
GUIDE)

Result Rpt Send Result E-mail/Folder (page 8-121)

Set.
FAX (page 8-121)

CancelBefore (page 8-121)

Send

Dest. Info. (page 8-121)

FAX RX Result (FAX

OPERATION
GUIDE)

JobFinish Do Not
Notice Attach

Attach
SendImage

Job Log Auto Sending (page 7-13)

History
Send History (page 7-13)

Destination (page 7-13)

Subject (page 7-13)

SSFC Log Subject

Personal Info.

Counter Printed by Function (page 11-35)

Pages
by Paper Full Color (page 11-35)
Size
Black & (page 11-35)
(Continued on next White
page)
Scanned Pages (page 11-35)

xii

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 System Menu/Counter System/ Network TCP/IP TCP/IP (page 8-174)
key Network Setting Settings
IPv4 Setting (page 8-175)
(Continued from
IPv6 Setting (page 8-175)
previous page)
Bonjour (page 8-177)

Protocol (page 8-181)

Detail

WSD-SCAN (page 8-178)

WSD-PRINT (page 8-179)

IPSec (page 8-194)

Secure SSL (page 8-185)

Protocol
IPP Security (page 8-186)

HTTP (page 8-187)

Security

LDAP (page 8-189)

Security

SMTP (page 8-190)

Security

POP3 (page 8-192)

Security 1

POP3 (page 8-192)

Security 2

POP3 (page 8-192)

Security 3

Host Name

LAN Interface (page 8-174)

Restart Network (page 8-184)

(Continued on next (Continued Optional Basic (page 8-196)

page) on next page) Network

NW InterfaceSend (page 8-208)

xiii

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 System Menu/Counter System/ I/F Block Set. USB Host (page 8-209)
key Network
USB Device (page 8-210)
(Continued from (Continued
USB Storage (page 8-211)
previous page) from previous
page) Option I/F 1 (page 8-213)
(ECOSYS M6026cdn and
ECOSYS M6026cdn Type B only)

Option I/F 2 (page 8-213)

(ECOSYS M6026cdn and
ECOSYS M6026cdn Type B only)

Option I/F (page 8-213)

(ECOSYS M6526cdn and
ECOSYS M6526cdn Type B only)

Security Level (page 8-214)

Restart (page 8-173)

Op Functions (page 8-215)

User/Job User Login User Login (page 11-3)

Account Set.
Local User List (page 11-3)

ID Card Key Login

Settings
Password
Login

Group Auth. (page 11-10)

NW User Property (page 11-11)

Job Job Accounting (page 11-13)

Account.Set.
AccountingAccess (page 11-16)

Account. Report (page 11-33)

Total Printed (page 11-29)

Accounting Pages

Scanned (page 11-29)

Pages

FAX TX (FAX
Pages OPERATION
GUIDE)

FAX TX Time (FAX

OPERATION
GUIDE)
(Continued on next
page) (Continued (Continued Counter (page 11-29)
on next page) on next page) Reset

Each Job Account (page 11-30)

xiv

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 System Menu/Counter User/Job Job Account. List (page 11-18)
key Account Account.Set.
Default Apply Limit (page 11-25)
(Continued (Continued Setting
(Continued from
from previous from previous Copy/Print (page 11-21)
previous page)
page) page) Count

Counter Limit (page 11-27)

Unknown ID Job (page 11-12)

Common Language (page 8-3)

Settings
Default Screen (page 8-5)

Sound Buzzer Key (page 8-6)

Confirmation

Job Finish (page 8-6)

Ready (page 8-6)

Warning (page 8-6)

Keyboard (page 8-6)

Confirm

FAX Speaker (FAX

OPERATION
GUIDE)

FAX Monitor (FAX

OPERATION
GUIDE)

Display Bright. (page 8-7)

Orig./Paper Custom Orig.Size (page 8-8)

Set.
Def. Orig. Size (page 8-10)

Custom PaperSize (page 8-11)

Custom Cassette 1 (page 8-13)

PaperSize Size

Cassette 1 (page 8-13)

Type

Cassette 2 Cassette 2 (page 8-13)

Set. Size

Cassette 2 (page 8-13)

Type

Cassette 3 Cassette 3 (page 8-13)

Set. Size
(Continued on next (Continued (Continued
page) on next page) on next page) Cassette 3 (page 8-13)
Type

xv

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 System Menu/Counter Common Orig./Paper MP Tray Set. MP Tray Size (page 8-16)
key Settings Set.
MP Tray (page 8-16)
(Continued from (Continued (Continued Type
previous page) from previous from previous
Media Type Set. (page 8-18)
page) page)
Media for Full Color (page 8-23)
Auto
Black & (page 8-23)
White

Def. PaperSource (page 8-22)

SpcialPaper Act. (page 8-24)

Preset Limit (page 8-26)

Measurement (page 8-27)

Error DuplexPaperError (page 8-28)

Handling
PaperMismatchErr (page 8-28)

Date Setting Date/Time (page 8-141)

Date Format (page 8-143)

Time Zone (page 8-144)

Summer Time (page 8-145)

Timer Setting Auto Panel Reset (page 8-146)

PanelReset Timer (page 8-147)

Low Power Timer (page 8-149)

Sleep Level Quick (page 8-150)

(models Recovery
except for
Europe) Energy Saver (page 8-150)

Sleep Timer (page 8-152)

Auto Err. Clear (page 8-153)

Err. Clear Timer (page 8-155)

(Continued on next (Continued
page) on next page) Unusable Time (page 8-156)

xvi

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 System Menu/Counter Common Function Color Selection (page 8-38)
key Settings Default
Scan Resolution (page 8-37)
(Continued from (Continued
FAX Resolution (FAX
previous page) from previous
OPERATION
page)
GUIDE)

Original Image (Copy) (page 8-34)

Original Image (Send) (page 8-36)

Zoom (page 8-41)

Collate (page 8-45)

Orig.Orientation (page 8-30)

Backgrnd (Copy) (page 8-31)

Backgrnd (Send) (page 8-32)

EcoPrint (page 8-46)

File Name Entry (page 8-42)

Subject/Body (page 8-43)

Con.scan-ExptFAX (page 8-33)

Con.scan-FAX (FAX
OPERATION
GUIDE)

File Format (page 8-40)

File Separation (page 8-49)

JPEG/TIFF Print (page 8-47)

XPS FitTo Page (page 8-48)

Detail Setting 2 in 1 Layout (page 8-50)

4 in 1 Layout (page 8-51)

Border Line (page 8-53)

Orig. Binding (page 8-54)

Finish. Binding (page 8-56)

Image (page 8-57)

Quality

Color TIFF (page 8-58)

Comp.

PDF/A (page 8-59)

(Continued on next (Continued High (page 8-61)
page) on next page) Comp.PDF

xvii

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 System Menu/Counter Common Login Operation (page 8-62)
key Settings
RAM Disk Setting (page 8-63)
(Continued from (Continued
Format SSD (page 8-64)
previous page) from previous
page) Format SD Card (page 8-65)

Optional Normal (page 8-66)

Memory
Printer Priority (page 8-66)

Copy Priority (page 8-66)

Disp. Status/ JobsDetailStatus (page 7-2)

Log
Jobs Log (page 7-8)

FAX Log (page 7-8)

TonerAlert Level (page 8-68)

Copy Paper Selection (page 8-69)

AutoPaperSelect. (page 8-70)

Auto % Priority (page 8-71)

DP Read Action (page 8-72)

Select Key Left (page 8-73)

Set.
Right (page 8-73)

Printer Emulation PCL6 (page 8-99)

Set.
KPDL (page 8-101)

KPDL(Auto) (page 8-101)

Color Setting (page 8-102)

EcoPrint (page 8-102)

Override A4/LTR (page 8-103)

Duplex (page 8-104)

Copies (page 8-105)

Orientation (page 8-107)

Gloss Mode (page 8-108)

Wide A4 (page 8-109)

FormFeed TimeOut (page 8-109)

LF Action (page 8-110)

(Continued on next (Continued CR Action (page 8-111)

page) on next page)
Job Name (page 8-112)

xviii

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 System Menu/Counter Printer User Name (page 8-113)
key (Continued Paper Feed Mode (page 8-114)
from previous
(Continued from
page) Auto Cass.Change (page 8-115)
previous page)
Send Select Key Left (page 8-75)
Set.
Right (page 8-75)

Destination Check beforeSend (page 8-77)

Check
Check New Dest. (page 8-77)

Default Screen (page 8-78)

Send and Forward (page 8-79)

Forward
Destination (page 8-80)

FAX (FAX
OPERATION
GUIDE)

Document Custom Box Detail/Edit (page 8-94)

Box
File Del. Time (page 8-96)

Sub Address Box (FAX

OPERATION
GUIDE)

Job Box (page 8-97)

Select Key Print Left (page 8-83)

Set.
Right (page 8-83)

Store Left (page 8-83)

Right (page 8-83)

Polling Box (FAX

OPERATION
GUIDE)
(Continued on next Edit Address Book (page 8-168)
page) Destination
Print List (page 8-168)

xix

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 System Menu/Counter Adjust/Maint. Copy Denst. Adj. (page 8-123)
key
Send/Box Density (page 8-124)
(Continued from
Backgrnd Copy (Auto) (page 8-125)
previous page)
Density
Send/Box (Auto) (page 8-125)

AutoColorCorrect (page 8-126)

ColorCalibration (page 8-126)

Color Regist. Normal Print Chart (page 8-128)

Adjust (page 8-128)

Magenta

Adjust Cyan (page 8-128)

Adjust Yellow (page 8-128)

Detail Print Chart (page 8-130)

Adjust (page 8-130)

Magenta

Adjust Cyan (page 8-130)

Adjust Yellow (page 8-130)

Correct. Bk Line (page 8-134)

Service Service Status

Setting
Network Status

Test Page

DeveloperSetting

DeveloperRefresh

LaserScanner Cln (page 8-135)

Drum Refresh (page 8-136)

Altitude Adj. (page 8-137)

MC (page 8-138)

FAX Country Code

FAX Call Set.

Remote Diag.Set.

Remote Diag. ID

Mem.Diagnostics (page 8-139)

xx

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Environment
The service environmental conditions are as follows:

• Temperature: 50 to 90.5 °F (10 to 32.5 °C)

• Humidity: 15 to 80 %

However, adverse environmental conditions may affect the image quality. Avoid the following locations when
selecting a site for the machine.

• Avoid locations near a window or with exposure to direct sunlight.

• Avoid locations with vibrations.
• Avoid locations with drastic temperature fluctuations.
• Avoid locations with direct exposure to hot or cold air.
• Avoid poorly ventilated locations.

If the floor is delicate against casters, when this machine is moved after installation, the floor material may be
damaged.

During copying, some ozone is released, but the amount does not cause any ill effect to one’s health. If,
however, the machine is used over a long period of time in a poorly ventilated room or when making an
extremely large number of copies, the smell may become unpleasant. To maintain the appropriate environment
for copy work, it is suggested that the room be properly ventilated.

xxi

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Cautions when handling consumables

CAUTION

Do not attempt to incinerate the toner container or the waste toner box. Dangerous sparks may cause
burns.

Keep the toner container and the waste toner box out of the reach of children.

If toner happens to spill from the toner container or the waste toner box, avoid inhalation and
ingestion, as well as contact with your eyes and skin.

• If you do happen to inhale toner, move to a place with fresh air and gargle thoroughly with a large amount
of water. If coughing develops, contact a physician.
• If you do happen to ingest toner, rinse your mouth with water and drink 1 or 2 cups of water to dilute the
contents of your stomach. If necessary, contact a physician.
• If you do happen to get toner in your eyes, flush them thoroughly with water. If there is any remaining
tenderness, contact a physician.
• If toner does happen to get on your skin, wash with soap and water.

Do not attempt to force open or destroy the toner container or the waste toner box.

xxii

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Other precautions
Return the exhausted toner container and waste toner box to your dealer or service representative. The
collected toner container and waste toner box will be recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant
regulations.

Store the machine while avoiding exposure to direct sunlight.

Store the machine in a place where the temperature stays below 40ºC while avoiding sharp changes of
temperature and humidity.

If the machine will not be used for an extended period of time, remove the paper from the cassette and the Multi
Purpose (MP) Tray, return it to its original package and reseal it.

If using the products with the fax function installed the main power switch is off, transmitting/receiving Fax is
disabled. Do not turn off the main power switch, but press the Energy Saver key on the operation panel to enter
Sleep mode.

xxiii

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Laser Safety (Europe)
Laser radiation could be hazardous to the human body. For this reason, laser radiation emitted inside this
machine is hermetically sealed within the protective housing and external cover. In the normal operation of the
product by user, no radiation can leak from the machine.

This machine is classified as Class 1 laser product under IEC 60825-1:2007.

Caution: Performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous
radiation exposure.

These labels are attached to the laser scanner unit inside the machine and are not in a user access area.

The label shown below is attached on the rear side of the machine.

xxiv

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning
• It may be prohibited to copy/scan copyrighted material without permission of the copyright owner.
• Copying/Scanning the following items is prohibited and may be penalized by low.
It may not be limited to these items. Do not knowingly copy/scan the items that are not to be copied/
scanned.
Paper money
Bank note
Securities
Stamp
Passport
Certificate
• Local laws and regulations may prohibit or restrict copying/scanning of other items not mentioned above.

xxv

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Legal and Safety Information

Please read this information before using your machine. This chapter provides information
on the following topics.

• Legal Information........................................................ xxvii

• Regarding Trade Names ........................................... xxviii
• Energy Saving Control Function................................. xxxii
• Automatic 2-Sided Copy Function .............................. xxxii
• Paper Recycling ......................................................... xxxii
• Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program .................. xxxii
• About this Operation Guide ....................................... xxxiii
• Conventions in This Guide ........................................ xxxiv

xxvi

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Legal Information
Copying or other reproduction of all or part of this guide without the prior written consent of Kyocera Document
Solutions Inc. is prohibited.

xxvii

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Regarding Trade Names
• PRESCRIBE and ECOSYS are trademarks of Kyocera Corporation.
• KPDL is a trademark of Kyocera Corporation.
• Microsoft, MS-DOS and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and/or
other countries.
• PCL is a trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
• Adobe Acrobat, Adobe Reader and PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.
• Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
• Novell and NetWare are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc.
• IBM and IBM PC/AT are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
• Power PC is a trademark of IBM in the U.S.A. and/or other countries.
• AppleTalk, Bonjour, Macintosh, and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
countries.
• TrueType is a registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.
• TypeBankG-B, TypeBankM-M and Typebank-OCR are trademarks of TypeBank®.
• All European language fonts installed in this machine are used under licensing agreement with Monotype
Imaging Inc.
• Helvetica, Palatino and Times are registered trademarks of Linotype-Hell AG.
• ITC Avant Garde Gothic, ITC Bookman, ITC ZapfChancery and ITC ZapfDingbats are registered
trademarks of International Type-face Corporation.
• UFST™ MicroType® fonts by Monotype Imaging Inc. are installed in this machine.
• This machine contains the software having modules developed by Independent JPEG Group.
• ThinPrint is a trademark of ThinPrint GmbH in Germany and other countries.

All other brands and product names are registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective companies.
The designations ™ and ® will not be used in this Operation Guide.

xxviii

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 GPL/LGPL
This product contains GPL (http://www.gnu.org/licenses/gpl.html) and/or LGPL (http://www.gnu.org/licenses/
lgpl.html) software as part of its firmware. You can get the source code, and you are permitted to copy,
redistribute and modify it under the terms of GPL/LGPL. For further information including availability of the
source code, visit http://www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.com/gpl/.

OpenSSL License

Copyright (c) 1998-2006 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:

1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following
acknowledgment:
“This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http:/
/www.openssl.org/)”
4 The names “OpenSSL Toolkit” and “OpenSSL Project” must not be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without prior written permission.
For written permission, please contact [email protected].
5 Products derived from this software may not be called “OpenSSL” nor may “OpenSSL” appear in their
names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project.
6 Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: “This product includes
software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)”

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE

IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE

DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF
USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY
OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

xxix

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Original SSLeay License

Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young ([email protected]) All rights reserved.

This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young ([email protected]). The implementation was
written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.

This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to.
The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code;
not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright
terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson ([email protected]).

Copyright remains Eric Young’s, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed.

If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library
used.

This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided
with the package.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:

1 Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following
acknowledgement:
“This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young ([email protected])”
The word ‘cryptographic’ can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic
related :-).
4 If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application
code) you must include an acknowledgement:
“This product includes software written by Tim Hudson ([email protected])”

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR
OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be
changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU
Public Licence.]

xxx

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Monotype Imaging License Agreement
1 Software shall mean the digitally encoded, machine readable, scalable outline data as encoded in a
special format as well as the UFST Software.
2 You agree to accept a non-exclusive license to use the Software to reproduce and display weights, styles
and versions of letters, numerals, characters and symbols (Typefaces) solely for your own customary
business or personal purposes at the address stated on the registration card you return to Monotype
Imaging. Under the terms of this License Agreement, you have the right to use the Fonts on up to three
printers. If you need to have access to the fonts on more than three printers, you need to acquire a multi-
user license agreement which can be obtained from Monotype Imaging. Monotype Imaging retains all
rights, title and interest to the Software and Typefaces and no rights are granted to you other than a
License to use the Software on the terms expressly set forth in this Agreement.
3 To protect proprietary rights of Monotype Imaging, you agree to maintain the Software and other
proprietary information concerning the Typefaces in strict confidence and to establish reasonable
procedures regulating access to and use of the Software and Typefaces.
4 You agree not to duplicate or copy the Software or Typefaces, except that you may make one backup
copy. You agree that any such copy shall contain the same proprietary notices as those appearing on the
original.
5 This License shall continue until the last use of the Software and Typefaces, unless sooner terminated.
This License may be terminated by Monotype Imaging if you fail to comply with the terms of this License
and such failure is not remedied within thirty (30) days after notice from Monotype Imaging. When this
License expires or is terminated, you shall either return to Monotype Imaging or destroy all copies of the
Software and Typefaces and documentation as requested.
6 You agree that you will not modify, alter, disassemble, decrypt, reverse engineer or decompile the
Software.
7 Monotype Imaging warrants that for ninety (90) days after delivery, the Software will perform in
accordance with Monotype Imaging-published specifications, and the diskette will be free from defects in
material and workmanship. Monotype Imaging does not warrant that the Software is free from all bugs,
errors and omissions.
The parties agree that all other warranties, expressed or implied, including warranties of fitness for a
particular purpose and merchantability, are excluded.
8 Your exclusive remedy and the sole liability of Monotype Imaging in connection with the Software and
Typefaces is repair or replacement of defective parts, upon their return to Monotype Imaging.
In no event will Monotype Imaging be liable for lost profits, lost data, or any other incidental or
consequential damages, or any damages caused by abuse or misapplication of the Software and
Typefaces.
9 Massachusetts U.S.A. law governs this Agreement.
10 You shall not sublicense, sell, lease, or otherwise transfer the Software and/or Typefaces without the prior
written consent of Monotype Imaging.
11 Use, duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in the Rights in
Technical Data and Computer Software clause at FAR 252-227-7013, subdivision (b)(3)(ii) or
subparagraph (c)(1)(ii), as appropriate. Further use, duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions
applicable to restricted rights software as set forth in FAR 52.227-19 (c)(2).
12 You acknowledge that you have read this Agreement, understand it, and agree to be bound by its terms
and conditions. Neither party shall be bound by any statement or representation not contained in this
Agreement. No change in this Agreement is effective unless written and signed by properly authorized
representatives of each party. By opening this diskette package, you agree to accept the terms and
conditions of this Agreement.

xxxi

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Energy Saving Control Function
The device comes equipped with a Low Power Mode where energy consumption is reduced after a certain
amount of time elapses since the device was last used, as well as a Sleep where printer and fax functions
remain in a waiting state but power consumption is still reduced to a minimum when there is no activity with the
device within a set amount of time.

Low Power Mode

The device automatically enters Low Power Mode when 1 minute has passed since the device was last used.
The amount of time of no activity that must pass before Low Power Mode is activated may be lengthened. For
more information refer to Low Power Mode on page 2-9.

Sleep
The device automatically enters Sleep when 15 minutes have passed since the device was last used.
Automatic authentication does not take place in sleep mode or energy saver mode. To continue the installation,
press the Energy Saver key to wake the machine from sleep mode or energy saver mode. For more information
see Sleep and Auto Sleep on page 2-9

Automatic 2-Sided Copy Function

This device includes 2-sided copying as a standard function. For example, by copying two 1-sided originals onto
a single sheet of paper as a 2-sided copy, it is possible to lower the amount of paper used. For more information
see Duplex Copying on page 3-15.

Paper Recycling
This device supports the recycled paper which reduces the load on the environment. Your sales or service
representative can provide information about recommended paper types.

Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program

We have determined as a company participating in ENERGY STAR that this product has
earned the ENERGY STAR.

xxxii

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 About this Operation Guide
This Operation Guide contains the following chapters.

Chapter 1 - Part Names

Identifies machine parts and operation panel keys.

Chapter 2 - Preparation before Use

Explains adding paper, placing originals, connecting the machine, and necessary configurations before first
use.

Chapter 3 - Basic Operation

Describes the procedures for basic copying, printing and scanning.

Chapter 4 - Copying Functions

Describes the functions you can use when copying.

Chapter 5 - Sending Functions

Describes the functions you can use when sending originals.

Chapter 6 - Document Box

Provides a basic guide to using document boxes.

Chapter 7 - Status / Job Cancel

Explains how to check the job status and job history and how to cancel jobs being printed or waiting to print.
Also explains how to check the remaining paper and device status and how to cancel a transmission

Chapter 8 - Default Setting (System Menu)

Describes the System Menu options for general machine operation.

Chapter 9 - Maintenance
Describes cleaning and toner or waste toner box replacement.

Chapter 10 - Troubleshooting
Explains how to handle error messages, paper jams and other problems.

Chapter 11 - Management
Explains user login administration and job accounting.

Appendix
Explains how to enter characters, and lists the machine specifications.
Introduces the convenient optional equipment available for this machine.
Provides information on media types and paper sizes. Also includes a glossary of terms.

xxxiii

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Conventions in This Guide
The following conventions are used depending on the nature of the description.

Convention Description Example

Bold Indicates the operation panel Press the Start key.

keys or a computer screen.

[Regular] Indicates a selection item on the Select [System].

Message Display.

Italic Indicates a message displayed Ready to copy is displayed.

on the Message Display.

Used to emphasize a key word, For details on Network FAX, refer to the
phrase or references to FAX Operation Guide.
additional information.

Note Indicates supplemental

information or operations for NOTE:
reference.

Important Indicates items that are required

or prohibited so as to avoid IMPORTANT:
problems.

Caution Indicates what must be

observed to prevent injury or
CAUTION:
machine breakdown and how to
deal with it.

Underline A link function allows you to Refer to Contents.

jump to a related page. Position
the pointer over the underlined
text until the pointer changes to
a hand with appointing finger
( ). Then click the text. (In the
Contents, Index and Menu Map,
the linked areas are not
underlined.)

xxxiv

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1 Part Names

This chapter identifies the machine parts and operation panel keys.

• Operation Panel............................................................ 1-2

• Machine ........................................................................ 1-4

1-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Part Names

Operation Panel
Displays the System Menu/Counter menu screen, Displays the Address Book screen, where you can add, edit and delete destinations.
where you can check the system settings and
counters. Calls the previous destination. Also used to enter a pause when entering a
FAX number.*
Displays the Document Box screen, where you
can operate the document box and USB Displays the Add Destination screen, where you can add
memory. destinations.
Displays the Status screen, where you can Switches between on-hook and off-hook when manually
check the status, print a status report, and sending a FAX.*
pause or cancel the job in process.

Displays the Copy

screen, where you can Message Display. Check what is
make settings required shown here while operating the
for copying. machine.

Selects the menu displayed

at the lower right in the
Message Display.

Displays the FAX screen, Used to register, call and delete Selects the menu
where you can send a destinations to the one-touch key displayed at the lower left
FAX.* numbers (1 to 22). in the Message Display.
Displays the Send screen, where Shifts to switch the one-touch
you can send an e-mail, folder key numbers (1 to 11 and 12 to Blinks while print data
(SMB/FTP) or FAX*. 22). is being received or
Indicator is lit while shifted (12 data is transmitted.
to 22).
Blinks while the
Selects auto color mode. machine is accessing
the memory.
Selects full color mode.

Selects black and white mode.

* Only on products with the fax function installed.

1-2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Part Names

Clears entered numbers and characters.

Resets settings and displays the basic screen.

Used to select a menu item, move the cursor when

entering characters, change a value, etc.
Puts the machine to sleep or wakes it up.
Selects the chosen item or finalizes the entered
value.
Lit when the machine's
Displays the function menu for copy, main power is on.
print, transmission and document box.

Ends operation
(logs out) on the
Numeric keys. Enter Administration screen.
numbers and symbols.
Used to register or recall programs.
Returns the Message Display to the
previous screen.

Cancels the printing job in progress.

Lights or blinks when an error occurs.

Starts copying and scanning operations and processing for

setting operations.

1-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Part Names

Machine

1 Document Processor 1
2 Operation Panel
3 Top Tray
2
3
4 Paper Stopper
5 Multi Purpose (MP) 4
Tray 5
6 Paper Width Guides
8
7 Support Tray Section
of the Multi Purpose
Tray
8 USB Memory Slot 9
6
9 Paper Cassette 10
7
10 Paper Gauge
11 Main Power Switch 11
12 Lower Feed Cover 12

17
13 Black Toner Container (K) 13
14 Magenta Toner Container (M) 14
15
15 Cyan Toner Container (C) 16
16 Yellow Toner Container (Y)
17 Top Cover
18 Waste Toner Cover
19 Waste Toner Box

18
19

1-4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Part Names

20 Fuser Cover
1
21 Paper Transfer Unit
22 Paper Ramp
20
23 Duplex Unit
21

22
23

24 32
25
26 33
27

28

29

30

31

24 LINE connector*
25 TEL connector*
26 USB Interface Connector
27 USB Memory Slot
28 Network Interface Connector / Indicators
29 Option Interface Slot 2
30 Right Cover
31 Power Cord Connector
32 Rear Cover
33 Rear Cover Lever
* Only on products with the fax function installed (Option Interface Slot 1)

1-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Part Names

34 37
35

36 38
39
40

42

43
41

34 Original Width Guides

35 Document Processor Cover
36 Document Processor Open/Close Handle*
37 Original Table
38 Original Stopper
39 Original Eject Table
40 Top Cover Lever*
41 Handles for moving
42 Platen
43 Slit Glass
* To prevent toppling, the top tray and document processor cannot be opened at the same time.

44

45
46

48
47

44 Cassette 1
45 Paper Width Guides
46 Paper Width Adjusting Tab
47 Paper Length Guide
48 Paper Size Dial

1-6

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 2 Preparation before Use

This chapter explains the preparations before using this equipment for the first time as well
as the procedures for loading papers and originals.

• Check bundled items .................................................... 2-2

• Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables ...... 2-3
• Connecting Cables ....................................................... 2-5
• Power On/Off................................................................ 2-7
• Energy Saver Function ................................................. 2-9
• Switching the Language for Display [Language] ........ 2-11
• Setting Date and Time ................................................ 2-12
• Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection) .................... 2-15
• Installing Software ...................................................... 2-23
• Command Center RX ................................................. 2-36
• Loading Paper ............................................................ 2-47
• Loading Originals........................................................ 2-65

2-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Preparation before Use

Check bundled items

Check that the following items have been bundled.

• Quick Installation Guide

• Safety Guide
• Safety Guide (ECOSYS M6026cdn/ECOSYS M6026cdn Type B/ECOSYS M6526cdn/ECOSYS M6526cdn Type B)
• DVD (Product Library)

Documents Contained in the Included DVD

The following documents are contained in the included DVD (Product Library). Refer to them as necessary.

Documents

Operation Guide (This Guide)

Fax Operation Guide

Command Center RX User Guide

Printer Driver User Guide

Network FAX Driver Operation Guide

KYOCERA Net Direct Print Operation Guide

KYOCERA Net Viewer User Guide

PRESCRIBE Commands Technical Reference

PRESCRIBE Commands Command Reference

2-2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Preparation before Use

Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables

Check the method to connect the equipment to a PC or network, and prepare the necessary cables.

Connection Example 2
Determine the method to connect the equipment to a PC or network by referring to the illustration below.

Connecting a scanner to your PC network with a network

cable (1000BASE-T, 100BASE-TX or 10BASE-T)

Command Center RX
Network Send E-mail
Administrator’s
PC Network settings, Scanner
default settings, User and Sends the image data
destination registration of scanned originals to
the desired recipient
as a file attached to an
E-mail message.
MFP
Printing

Network Send SMB

USB
Saves the scanned
image as a data file on
your PC.
Network

Network FAX Network Network Send FTP

Sends the scanned

image as a data file on
the FTP.

FAX Network TWAIN Scanning

FAX
USB

Network WIA Scanning

* Only on products with the fax function installed USB TWAIN and WIA are
standardized interface
for communication
between software
applications and image
acquisition devices.

2-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Preparation before Use

Preparing Necessary Cables

The following interfaces are available to connect the equipment to a PC. Prepare the necessary cables
according to the interface you use.

Available Standard Interfaces

Function Interface Necessary Cable

Printer/Scanner Network interface LAN (10Base-T,

/TWAIN Scanning/ 100Base-TX or 1000Base-T
WIA Scanning/ Shielded)
Network FAX*

Printer/ USB interface USB2.0 compatible cable

TWAIN Scanning/ (Hi-Speed USB compliant,
WIA Scanning Max. 5.0 m, Shielded)
* Network FAX and FAX functions available only on products with the fax
function installed. For details on Network FAX, refer to the FAX Operation
Guide.

2-4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Preparation before Use

Connecting Cables
Follow the steps below to connect cables to the machine.

1 If the machine power is on, press the Energy

2
Saver key on the operation panel and make sure
that the message displayed and memory light are
Off off. Then, press the main power switch to turn off
the power.

On

2 Connect the machine to the PC or your network

device. When using the network interface, remove
the cap.

3 Remove the Power Cord Connector Cover.

1 2

2-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Preparation before Use

4 Connect one end of the supplied power cable to

the machine and the other end to a power outlet.

IMPORTANT: Only use the power cable that comes

with the machine.

5 Replace the Power Cord Connector Cover.

6 Turn the main power switch on. The machine

begins to warm up.
Off

On

7 When connecting the network cable, configure the

network. For details, refer to Network Setup (LAN
Cable Connection) on page 2-15.

2-6

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Preparation before Use

Power On/Off

Power On

When the main power indicator is lit... 2

Press the Energy Saver key.

When the main power indicator is off...

Turn the main power switch on.

Off

IMPORTANT: When turning off the main power switch,

do not turn on the main power switch again
On immediately. Wait more than 5 seconds, and then turn
on the main power switch.

Power Off
Before turning off the main power switch, press the Energy Saver key on the operation panel to off. Make sure
that the memory indicator is off before turning off the main power switch.

Make sure that

the indicator is off.

On

Off

2-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Preparation before Use

In case of not using the machine for a extended period of time

CAUTION: If this machine will be left unused for an extended period (e.g. overnight), turn it off at the
main power switch. If the machine will not be used for an even longer period of time (e.g. vacation),
remove the power plug from the outlet as a safety precaution. If using the products equipped with the
fax function, note that turning the machine off at the main power switch disables fax transmission and
reception.

IMPORTANT: Remove paper from the cassettes and seal it in the paper storage bag to protect it from humidity.

2-8

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Preparation before Use

Energy Saver Function

If a certain period of time elapses after the machine is last used, the machine automatically enters Low Power
Mode to reduce power consumption. If a further period of time elapses without the machine being used, the
machine automatically enters sleep mode, which minimizes power consumption. 2
Low Power Mode
The message display backlight turn off to reduce the
power consumption. This status is referred to as Low
Power Mode.

If print data is received during Low Power Mode, the

machine automatically wakes up and starts printing.
Also when fax data arrives while the machine is in Low
Power Mode on products with the FAX function
installed, the machine automatically wakes up and
starts printing.

To use the machine, press any key on the operation panel.

The machine will be ready to use within 11 seconds. Note
that ambient environmental conditions, such as ventilation,
may cause the machine to respond more slowly.

For information on the Low Power Mode settings, refer

to Low Power Timer on page 8-149.

NOTE: When a preset time of Low Power Timer and Sleep

Timer is same, Sleep Mode overrides Low Power Mode.

Sleep and Auto Sleep

Sleep
To enter Sleep, press the Energy Saver key. Message
Display and all indicators on the operation panel will go
out to save a maximum amount of power except the
Energy Saver indicator. This status is referred to as
Sleep.

If print data is received during Sleep, the print job is

performed while the Message Display remains unlit.

If you are using the products equipped with the fax

function, received fax data is printed out while the
operation panel also remains unlit.

There are two sleep modes (models except for

Europe): Quick Recovery and Energy Saver. The
default setting is Energy Saver mode.

NOTE: When a preset time of Low Power Timer and Sleep

Timer is same, Sleep Mode overrides Low Power Mode.

2-9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Preparation before Use

Auto Sleep

Auto Sleep automatically switches the machine into

Sleep Mode if left idle for 1 minute.

Quick Recovery Mode (models except for Europe)

The recovery from the sleep mode is faster than when

using Energy Saver mode.

The machine recovers quickly when any key on the

operation panel is pressed. The machine also
automatically recovers and prints when a job is
detected.

If print data is received during Sleep, the print job is

performed while the message display remains unlit.

To use the machine, press any key on the operation

panel.

For more information about configuring settings, refer

to Sleep Level (models except for Europe) on page 8-
150.

Energy Saver Mode (models except for Europe)

This mode reduces power consumption even more

than quick recovery mode, and allows Sleep mode to
be set separately for each function.

To use the machine, press any key on the operation

panel. The machine will be ready to use within 17
seconds.

Note that ambient environmental conditions, such as

ventilation, may cause the machine to respond more
slowly.

For more information on Energy Saver settings, refer to

Sleep Level (models except for Europe) on page 8-150

2-10

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Preparation before Use

Switching the Language for Display [Language]

Select the language displayed on the Message Display.

Use the procedure below to select the language.

2
1 Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main
unit operation panel.

When you are performing user management and

Login User Name: L b have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
******************** Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Login Password: Password to log in.

NOTE: The default settings of the Login User Name

[ Login ] and Login Password are both "2600".
If user management is selected in [Network Setting],
press [Menu] (the Left Select key) to authenticate.
Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-9 for
details on entering characters.

2 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Common Settings].
5 User Property
6
*********************
Common Settings
7 Copy
[ Exit ]

3 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu

Common Settings: a b appears.
1
*********************
Language
2 Default Screen
3 Sound
[ Exit ]

4 Press the  or  key to select [Language].

5 Press the OK key. Language appears.

Language: a b
1
*********************
*English
2 Deutsch
3 Français

6 Press the  or  key to select the desired

language and then press the OK key.

Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to

the Common Settings menu.

2-11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Preparation before Use

Setting Date and Time

Follow the steps below to set the local date and time at the place of installation.

When you send an E-mail using the transmission function, the date and time as set here will be printed in the
header of the E-mail message. Set the date, time and time difference from GMT of the region where the
machine is used.

NOTE: Be sure to set the time difference before setting the date and time.

1 Turn on the main power switch.

Off

On

2 Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main

unit operation panel.

When you are performing user management and

Login User Name: L b have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
******************** Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Login Password: Password to log in.

[ Login ]

3 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Common Settings].
5 User Property
6
*********************
Common Settings
7 Copy
[ Exit ]

4 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu

Common Settings: a b appears.
1
*********************
Language
2 Default Screen
3 Sound
[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [Date Setting].

2-12

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Preparation before Use

6 A login screen will appear. Then, enter the Login

Login User Name: L b User Name and Login Password to log in.
********************
Login Password: 7 Press [Login] (the Right Select key). The Date
Setting menu appears.
2
[ Login ]

8 Press the  or  key to select [Time Zone].

Date Setting: a b
1
*********************
Date/Time
2 Date Format
3 Time Zone
[ Exit ]

9 Press the OK key. Time Zone appears.

Time Zone: a b
1
*********************
-12:00 Internati
2 -11:00 UTC-11
3 -10:00 Hawaii

10 Press the  or  key to select your region and

then press the OK key.

Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to

the Date Setting menu.

11 Press the  or  key to select [Summer Time].

Date Setting: a b
2 Date Format
3 Time Zone
4
*********************
Summer Time
[ Exit ]

12 Press the OK key. Summer Time appears.

Summer Time: a b
1
*********************
*Off
2 On

13 Press the  or  key to select [On] or [Off] and

then press the OK key.

Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to

the Date Setting menu.

2-13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Preparation before Use

14 Press the  or  key to select [Date/Time].

Date Setting: a b
1
*********************
Date/Time
2 Date Format
3 Time Zone
[ Exit ]

15 Press the OK key. Date/Time appears.

Date/Time: a b
Year Month Day
2010 01 01
(Time Zone:Tokyo )

16 Press the  or  key to move the cursor position,

press the  or  key to enter year, month and day,
and then press the OK key.

17 Press the  or  key to move the cursor position,

Date/Time: a b press the  or  key to enter hours, minutes and
Hour Min. Second seconds, and then press the OK key.
11: 45: 50
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
(Time Zone:Tokyo )
the Date Setting menu.

18 Press the  or  key to select [Date Format].

Date Setting: a b
1 Date/Time
2
*********************
Date Format
3 Time Zone
[ Exit ]

19 Press the OK key. Date Format appears.

Date Format: a b
1
*********************
*Month/Day/Year
2 Day/Month/Year
3 Year/Month/Day

20 Press the  or  key to select the desired display

format and then press the OK key.

Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to

the Date Setting menu.

2-14

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Preparation before Use

Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection)

The machine is equipped with network interface, which is compatible with network protocols such as TCP/IP
(IPv4), TCP/IP (IPv6), NetBEUI, and IPSec. It enables network printing on the Windows, Macintosh, UNIX, and
other platforms. 2
This section explains the TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup procedures. For other network settings, refer to Network
Setup on page 8-174.

NOTE: After all network related settings have been done, turn the machine OFF and ON again. This is
mandatory to make the settings effective!

• TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup (when an IP address is automatically assigned) ...2-15

• TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup (by Entering IP Addresses) ...2-17

TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup (when an IP address is automatically assigned)

If an IP address will be automatically assigned, configure the settings below.

NOTE: The [DHCP] and [Auto-IP] settings are enabled by default. Specify the settings below when Network
Setup on page 8-174 have been changed from their default state.

Use the procedure below to setup the TCP/IP (IPv4) setting.

1 Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main
unit operation panel.

When you are performing user management and

Login User Name: L b have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
******************** Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Login Password: Password to log in.

[ Login ] NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on

Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.

2 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [System/Network], and then press the
1
*********************
Report OK key.
2 Counter
3 System/Network
[ Exit ]

IMPORTANT: To make the settings, you must have

Administrator only. logged in using a Login User Name with administrator
privileges.
The default settings of the Login User Name and Login
Password are both "2600".

If you have logged in using a Login User Name without

administrator privileges, the screen will display
Administrator only. and return to the login screen.

2-15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Preparation before Use

3 In the System/Network menu, press the  or 

System/Network: a b key to select [Network Setting].
1
*********************
Network Setting
2 Optional Network
3 NW InterfaceSend
[ Exit ]

4 Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu

Network Setting: a b appears.
1
*********************
TCP/IP Settings
2 WSD-SCAN
3 WSD-PRINT
[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [TCP/IP Settings].

6 Press the OK key. The TCP/IP Settings menu

TCP/IP Settings: a b appears.
1
*********************
TCP/IP
2 IPv4 Setting
3 IPv6 Setting
[ Exit ]

7 Press the  or  key to select [TCP/IP].

8 Press the OK key. TCP/IP appears.

TCP/IP: a b
1 Off
2
*********************
*On

9 Press the  or  key to select [On] and then press

the OK key.

Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to

the TCP/IP Settings menu.

10 Press the  or  key to select [IPv4 Setting].

TCP/IP Settings: a b
1 TCP/IP
2
*********************
IPv4 Setting
3 IPv6 Setting
[ Exit ]

2-16

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Preparation before Use

11 Press the OK key. The IPv4 Setting menu appears.

IPv4 Setting: a b
1
*********************
DHCP
2 Auto-IP
3 IP Address 2
[ Exit ]

12 Press the  or  key to select [DHCP].

13 Press the OK key. DHCP appears.
DHCP: a b
1 Off
2
*********************
*On

14 Press the  or  key to select [On] and then press

the OK key.

Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to

the IPv4 Setting menu.

15 Press the  or  key to select [Auto-IP].

IPv4 Setting: a b
1
*********************
DHCP
2 Auto-IP
3 IP Address
[ Exit ]

16 Press the OK key. Auto-IP appears.

Auto-IP: a b
1 Off
2
*********************
*On

17 Press the  or  key to select [On] and then press

the OK key.

Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to

the IPv4 Setting menu.

TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup (by Entering IP Addresses)

Set up TCP/IP to connect to the Windows network. Set the IP addresses, subnet masks, and gateway
addresses. The default settings are "TCP/IP Protocol: On, DHCP: On, Auto-IP: On".

NOTE: Before setting an IP address, ask your network administrator if your network environment requires
input of an IP address. If input is necessary, ask your network administrator to obtain an IP address for you.

2-17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Preparation before Use

Use the procedure below to setup the TCP/IP (IPv4) setting.

1 Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main

unit operation panel.

When you are performing user management and

Login User Name: L b have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
******************** Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Login Password: Password to log in.

[ Login ] NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on

Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.

2 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [System/Network], and then press the
1
*********************
Report OK key.
2 Counter
3 System/Network
[ Exit ]

IMPORTANT: To make the settings, you must have

Administrator only. logged in using a Login User Name with administrator
privileges.
The default settings of the Login User Name and Login
Password are both "2600".

If you have logged in using a Login User Name without

administrator privileges, the screen will display
Administrator only. and return to the standby screen.

3 In the System menu, press the  or  key to

System/Network: a b select [Network Setting].
1
*********************
Network Setting
2 Optional Network
3 NW InterfaceSend
[ Exit ]

4 Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu

Network Setting: a b appears.
1
*********************
TCP/IP Settings
2 WSD-SCAN
3 WSD-PRINT
[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [TCP/IP Settings].

2-18

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Preparation before Use

6 Press the OK key. The TCP/IP Settings menu

TCP/IP Settings: a b appears.
1
*********************
TCP/IP
2 IPv4 Setting
3 IPv6 Setting 2
[ Exit ]

7 Press the  or  key to select [TCP/IP].

8 Press the OK key. TCP/IP appears.

TCP/IP: a b
1 Off
2
*********************
*On

9 Press the  or  key to select [On] and then press

the OK key.

Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to

the TCP/IP Settings menu.

10 Press the  or  key to select [IPv4 Setting].

TCP/IP Settings: a b
1 TCP/IP
2
*********************
IPv4 Setting
3 IPv6 Setting
[ Exit ]

11 Press the OK key. The IPv4 Setting menu appears.

IPv4 Setting: a b
1
*********************
DHCP
2 Auto-IP
3 IP Address
[ Exit ]

12 Press the  or  key to select [DHCP].

13 Press the OK key. DHCP appears.
DHCP: a b
1 Off
2
*********************
*On

2-19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Preparation before Use

14 Press the  or  key to select [Off] and then press

the OK key.

Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to

the IPv4 Setting menu.

15 Press the  or  key to select [Auto-IP].

IPv4 Setting: a b
1
*********************
DHCP
2 Auto-IP
3 IP Address
[ Exit ]

16 Press the OK key. Auto-IP appears.

Auto-IP: a b
1 Off
2
*********************
*On

17 Press the  or  key to select [Off] and then press

the OK key.

18 Press the  or  key to select [IP Address].

IPv4 Setting: a b
1
*********************
DHCP
2 Auto-IP
3 IP Address
[ Exit ]

19 Press the OK key. IP Address appears.

IP Address: a b

123.145.167.189

20 Use the arrow keys to enter the IP address.

Press the  or  key to move the cursor position
horizontally.

Press the  or  key or the numeric keys to enter

the IP Address. Each 3 digits can be set between
000 and 255.

2-20

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Preparation before Use

IMPORTANT: When the DHCP Setting (page 2-15) is

IP Address: b [On], the current IP address is displayed and cannot be
changed.
123.145.167.189
When setting an IP address, set the DHCP Setting
(page 2-15) to Off.
2
21 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the IPv4 Setting menu.

22 Press the  or  key to select [Subnet Mask].

IPv4 Setting: a b
1
*********************
DHCP
2 Auto-IP
3 IP Address
[ Exit ]

23 Press the OK key. Subnet Mask appears.

Subnet Mask: a b

123.145.167.189

24 Use the arrow keys to enter the Subnet Mask.

Press the  or  key to move the cursor position
horizontally.

Press the  or  key or the numeric keys to enter

the Subnet Mask. Each 3 digits can be set between
000 and 255.

IMPORTANT: When the DHCP Setting (page 2-15) is

[On], the current Subnet Mask is displayed and cannot
be changed.

When setting an Subnet Mask, set the DHCP Setting

(page 2-15) to Off.

25 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the IPv4 Setting menu.

26 Press the  or  key to select [Default Gateway].

IPv4 Setting: a b
1
*********************
DHCP
2 Auto-IP
3 IP Address
[ Exit ]

2-21

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Preparation before Use

27 Press the OK key. Default Gateway appears.

Default Gateway: a b

123.145.167.189

28 Use the arrow keys to enter the Default Gateway.

Press the  or  key to move the cursor position
horizontally.

Press the  or  key or the numeric keys to enter

the Default Gateway. Each 3 digits can be set
between 000 and 255.

IMPORTANT: When the DHCP Setting (page 2-15) is

[On], the current Default Gateway is displayed and
cannot be changed.

When setting an Default Gateway, set the DHCP

Setting (page 2-15) to Off.

29 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the IPv4 Setting menu.

2-22

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Preparation before Use

Installing Software
Install appropriate software on your PC from the included DVD (Product Library) if you want to use the printer
function of this machine or perform TWAIN / WIA transmission or Network FAX transmission from your PC.
2
Software on DVD (Windows)
You can use either [Express Install] or [Custom Install] can be selected for the installation method. [Express
Install] is the standard installation method. To install components that cannot be installed by [Express Install],
use [Custom Install]. For details, refer to Custom Install on page 2-26.

Installation method
●:Standard installation
○:Allows selection of
the components to be
Software Description
installed

Express Custom
Install Install

KX DRIVER This driver enables files on a computer to be printed ● ○

by the machine. Multiple page description languages
(PCL XL, KPDL, etc.) are supported by a single
driver. This printer driver allows you to take full
advantage of the features of the machine.
Use this driver to print PDF files.

KX XPS DRIVER This printer driver supports the XPS (XML Paper - ○
Specification) format developed by Microsoft
Corporation.

KPDL mini-driver/ This is a Microsoft MiniDriver that supports PCL and - ○

PCL mini-driver KPDL. There are some restrictions on the machine
features and option features that can be used with
this driver.

Kyocera TWAIN Driver This driver enables scanning on the machine using a ● ○
TWAINcompliant software application.

Kyocera WIA Driver WIA (Windows Imaging Acquisition) is a function of - ○

Windows that enables reciprocal communication
between an imaging device such as a scanner and
an image processing software application. An image
can be acquired using a WIA-compliant
software application, which is convenient when a
TWAINcompliant software application is not installed
in the computer.

FAX Driver This makes it possible to send a document created - ○

in a computer software application as a fax via the
machine.

2-23

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Preparation before Use

Installation method
●:Standard installation
○:Allows selection of
the components to be
Software Description
installed

Express Custom
Install Install

Status Monitor The Status Monitor shows a print system status ● ○

message at the bottom right of the printing screen.
You can also start Command Center RX to check
and change printer settings.

KYOCERA Net Direct This makes it possible to print a PDF file without - ○
Print starting Adobe Acrobat/Reader.

KYOCERA Net Viewer This is a utility that enables monitoring of the - ○

machine on the network.

FONTS These are display fonts that enable the machine's ● ○

built-in fonts to be used in a software application.

NOTE: Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.
When connected by USB cable, Plug and Play is disabled on this device when in Sleep mode. To continue the
installation, press the any key on the operation panel to wake the device from Low Power Mode or Sleep before
continuing.

FAX functions available only on products with the fax function installed.

WIA driver and KX (XPS) Driver cannot be installed on Windows XP.

Installing Printer Driver in Windows

Express Install

The following procedure is an example for installing the software in Windows 7 using [Express Install].

For details, refer to Custom Install in the Custom Install on page 2-26.

1 Insert the DVD.

NOTE:
• Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged
on with administrator privileges.
• If the "Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard"
dialog box displays, select [Cancel].
• If the autorun screen is displayed, click [Run setup.exe].
• If the user account management window appears, click
[Yes] ([Allow]).

2-24

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Preparation before Use

2 Display the screen.

Click [View License Agreement] and read the

License Agreement.

3 Click [Express Install].

NOTE: To install Status Monitor, it is necessary to

install Microsoft .NET Framework 4.0 beforehand.

4 You can also select [Use host name for port name]
and set to use the host name of the standard TCP/
IP port. (A USB connection cannot be used.)

NOTE: The machine cannot be detected unless it is on.

If the computer fails to detect the machine, verify that it
is connected to the computer via a network or USB
cable and that it is turned on and click (Reload).

5 Select the package.

The following software will be installed.

• Driver Package
KX Driver, Status Monitor, Fonts
• Scan Package
Kyocera TWAIN Driver

2-25

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Preparation before Use

6 Click Install.

NOTE: If the Windows security window appears, click

[Install this driver software anyway].

7 Finish the installation.

When "Your software is ready to use" appears,

you can use the software. To print a test page, click
the "Print a test page" checkbox and select the
machine.
Click [Finish] to exit the wizard.

NOTE: When you have selected [Device settings] in Windows XP, the dialog box for device setting will appear
after [Finish] is clicked. Configure the settings for options installed on the machine. Device settings can be
configured after the installation is completed. For details, refer to the Device Settings in the Printer Driver User
Guide on the DVD.

If a system restart message appears, restart the computer by following the screen prompts. This completes the
printer driver installation procedure.
The TWAIN driver can be installed if the machine and computer are connected via a network.
If you are installing the TWAIN driver, continue by configuring the Setting TWAIN Driver on 2-33.

Custom Install

The following procedure is an example for installing the software in Windows 7 using [Custom Install].

1 Insert the DVD.

NOTE:
• Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged
on with administrator privileges.
• If the "Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard"
dialog box displays, select [Cancel].
• If the autorun screen is displayed, click [Run setup.exe].
• If the user account management window appears, click
[Yes] ([Allow]).

2-26

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Preparation before Use

2 Display the screen.

Click [View License Agreement] and read the

License Agreement.

3 Click [Custom Install].

4 Select the device to be installed.

The following buttons can be used.

: This changes the display to icon and

text display.

: Use this to select multiple items.

: If the desired device does not appear,

press this button to directly select the
device.

5 Select the driver to be installed.

6 Select the utility to be installed.

2-27

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Preparation before Use

7 Click [Install].

NOTE:
• If the Windows security window appears, click
[Install this driver software anyway].
• To install Status Monitor, it is necessary to install
Microsoft .NET Framework 4.0 beforehand.

8 Finish the installation.

When "Your software is ready to use" appears,

you can use the software. To print a test page, click
the "Print a test page" checkbox and select the
machine.
Click [Finish] to exit the wizard.

NOTE: When you have selected [Device settings] in Windows XP, the dialog box for device setting will appear
after [Finish] is clicked. Configure the settings for options installed on the machine. Device settings can be
configured after the installation is completed. For details, refer to the Device Settings in the Printer Driver User
Guide on the DVD.

If a system restart message appears, restart the computer by following the screen prompts. This completes the
printer driver installation procedure.
The TWAIN driver can be installed if the machine and computer are connected via a network.
If you are installing the TWAIN driver, continue by configuring the Setting TWAIN Driver on page 2-33.

2-28

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Preparation before Use

Installing Printer Driver in Macintosh

The machine's printer functionality can be used by a Macintosh computer.

NOTE: 2
• Installation on MAC OS must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.
• When printing from a Macintosh computer, set the machine's emulation to [KPDL] or [KPDL(Auto)]. For details, refer to
Emuration Set on page 8-99.
• If connecting by Bonjour, enable Bonjour in the machine's network settings. For details, refer to Bonjour Settings on
page 8-177.
• In the Authenticate screen, enter the name and password used to log in to the operating system.

1 Insert the DVD.

This section explains how to install the printer

driver in Mac OS.

2 Double-click [Kyocera OS X vx.x] depending on

your Mac OS version.

3 Double-click Kyocera OS X 10.5.

2-29

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Preparation before Use

4 The printer driver installation program starts up.

5 Install the printer driver as directed by the

instructions in the installation software.

This completes the printer driver installation.

If a USB connection is used, the machine is

automatically recognized and connected.

If an IP connection is used, the settings below are

required.

6 Click Print & Fax.

7 Click the plus symbol (+) to add the installed printer

driver.

2-30

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Preparation before Use

8 Click the IP icon for an IP connection and then

enter the IP address and printer name.

The number entered in "Address" will

automatically appear in "Name". Change if
needed. 2
NOTE: When using a Bonjour connection, select
[Default] and click the item that appears in "Printer
Name". The driver with the same name as the
machine automatically appears in "Driver".

9 Select the options available for the printer and click

Continue.

10 The selected printer is added.

2-31

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Preparation before Use

Uninstalling the Software

Perform the following procedure to delete the Software from your computer.

NOTE: Uninstallation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.

1 Click Start button on the Windows and then select

All Programs, Kyocera, and Uninstall Kyocera
Product Library to display the Uninstall Wizard.

2 Place a check in the check box of the software to

be deleted.

Click Uninstall.

If a system restart message appears, restart the

computer by following the screen prompts. This
completes the software uninstallation procedure.

NOTE: The software can also be uninstalled using the

Product Library.
In the Product Library installation screen, click
[Uninstall], and follow the on-screen instructions to
uninstall the software.

2-32

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Preparation before Use

Setting TWAIN Driver

Register this machine to the TWAIN Driver.

1 Select Start button on the Windows, All Programs, Kyocera and then TWAIN Driver Setting. TWAIN
Driver screen appears. 2
In Windows 8, select Search in charms, Apps, and then TWAIN Driver Setting.

2 Click Add.

3 Enter the machine name in the Name field.

4 Click  next to the Model field and select this machine from the list.

5 Enter the machine's IP address or host name in the Scanner Address.

NOTE: When the machine's IP address is unknown, contact Administrator.

6 Click User Authentication Settings. If user login administration is invalid, go to Step 8.

2-33

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Preparation before Use

7 Select the checkbox beside Authentication, enter Login User Name (up to 64 characters) and Password
(up to 64 characters) and then click OK.

8 Click OK.

9 The machine is registered to the PC and the machine name and model name are displayed in the Scanner
List field.

NOTE: Click Delete to delete the added machine. Click Edit to change names and other settings.

Setting the WIA Driver (Windows Vista™, Windows® Server 2008 and Windows 7)
Register this machine to the WIA Driver.

NOTE: The following is not necessary to register when using the machine possesses an IP address or host
name that you have specified during installation of WIA Driver.

1 Click Start, Control Panel and then Scanners and Cameras. For Windows 7, in the search box, type
scanners and cameras, and then click Scanners and Cameras.
In Windows 8, click Search in charms, and then Settings, and enter "Scanner" in the search box. Click
View scanners and cameras in the search list then the Scanners and Cameras screen appears.

2-34

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Preparation before Use

2 Select the same name as this machine from WIA Drivers, and press Properties.

NOTE: If Windows Security and User Account Control are displayed, no trouble should be found with
operation after installing the driver and software we have provided. Continue installation.

3 When the machine is connected with the USB cable, click the Settings tab and select Image
Compression and the Compression Level. If user login administration is invalid, go to Step 5.

When the machine is connected with the network cable, go to Step 4.

4 Select the checkbox beside Authentication, enter Login User Name (up to 64 characters) and Password
(up to 64 characters) and then click OK.

NOTE: When the machine's IP address is unknown, contact Administrator.

5 Click Close.
The machine is registered to the PC.

2-35

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Preparation before Use

Command Center RX
If the machine is connected to the network, you can configure various settings using Command Center RX. This
section explains how to access Command Center RX, and how to change security settings and the host name.
For details on Command Center RX, refer to the Command Center RX User Guide.

NOTE: To fully access the features of the Command Center RX pages, enter the User Name and Password
and click [Login]. Entering the predefined administrator password allows the user to access all pages,
including Document Box, Address Book, and Settings on the navigation menu. The factory default setting for
the default user with administrator privileges is shown below.

Login User Name Admin

Login Password Admin

* Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).

Settings that the administrator and general users can configure in Command Center RX are as follows.

Adminis- General
Setting Description
trator User
Device Information The machine's structure can be checked,. ○ ○
Configuration, Counter, About Command Center RX
Job Status Displays all device information, including print and scan ○ ○
jobs, storing jobs, scheduled jobs, and job log history.
Printing Jobs Status, Printing Job Log, Sending Job
Status, Scheduled Jobs, Sending Job Log, Storing
Job Status, Storing Job Log
Document Box Add or delete document boxes, or delete documents ○ ○*3
within a document box.
Custom Box*1, Sub Address Box*2, Polling Box*2,
Job Box Settings
Address Book Create, edit, or delete addresses and address groups. ○ ○*3
Machine Address Book, External Address Book
Settings, One Touch Key
Device Settings Configure the advanced settings of the machine. ○ -
Paper/Feed/Output, Original Settings,
Energy Saver/Timer, Date/Time, System
Function Settings Configure the advanced function settings. ○ -
Common/Job Defaults, Copy, Printer, E-mail,
Scan to Folder, FAX*2, Send and Forward,
Forward Rules*2, Operation Panel
Network Settings Configure the network advanced settings. ○ -
General, TCP/IP, Protocol
Security Settings Configure the security advanced settings. ○ -
Device Security, Send Security, Network Security,
Certificates

2-36

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Preparation before Use

Adminis- General
Setting Description
trator User
Management Configure the advanced management settings. ○ -
Settings Job Accounting, Authentication, ID Card*4,
Notification/Report, History Settings, SNMP, Reset 2
*1 This is displayed when the optional SSD is installed.
*2 The fax function only shows ECOSYS M6526cdn/ECOSYS M6526cdn Type B.
*3 The logged in user may not be able to configure some settings, depending on the permissions of the user.
*4 This is displayed when the optional Card Authentication Kit is installed.

NOTE: Here, information on the FAX settings has been omitted. For more information on using the FAX, refer
to the FAX Operation Guide.

Accessing Command Center RX

1 Launch your Web browser.

2 In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.

Examples: https://192.168.48.21/ (for IP address)

https://MFP001 (if the host name is "MFP001")

The web page displays basic information about the machine and Command Center RX as well as their
current status.

NOTE: If the screen “There is a problem with this website's security certificate.” is displayed, configure the
certificate. For details on Certificates, refer to the Command Center RX User Guide.
You can also continue the operation without configuring the certificate.

3 Select a category from the navigation bar on the left of the screen. When you log in to the machine as an
administrator, you will see Device Settings, Function Settings, Network Settings, Security Settings,
and Management Settings.

2-37

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Preparation before Use

Changing Security Settings

This section explains how to change the security settings.

1 Access Command Center RX by referring to Accessing Command Center RX on page 2-37.

2 From the Security Settings menu, select the setting you want to configure. The configurable settings are
Device Security, Send Security, Network Security, and Certificates.

NOTE: The configurable settings within Device Security, Send Security, and Network Security can also be
configured from the machine's System Menu.
For details, see Default Setting (System Menu) on page 8-1. For details on settings related to certificates, refer
to the Command Center RX User Guide.

2-38

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Preparation before Use

Changing Device Information

Change the device information of the machine.

1 Access Command Center RX by referring to Accessing Command Center RX on page 2-37.

2
2 From the Device Settings menu, select System.

3 Enter the device information, and then click Submit.

IMPORTANT: After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON. To restart
the network interface card, click Reset in the Management Settings menu, and then click Restart Network in
“Restart”.

2-39

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Preparation before Use

E-mail settings
By configuring the SMTP settings, you can send E-mail notifications on completed jobs.

To use this function, this machine must be connected to a mail server using the SMTP protocol.

In addition, check the following.

• The network environment used to connect this machine to the mail server
A full-time connection via a LAN is recommended.
• SMTP settings
Use Command Center RX to register the IP address or host name of the SMTP server.
• If limits have been set on the size of E-mail messages, it may not be possible to send very large E-mails.

The procedure for specifying the SMTP settings is explained below.

1 Access Command Center RX by referring to Accessing Command Center RX on page 2-37.

2 From the Function Settings menu, click E-mail.

2-40

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Preparation before Use

3 Enter the appropriate values to each field.

Setting Description

SMTP Set to send e-mail from the machine.

2
SMTP Protocol Set SMTP protocol. Set the "SMTP (E-mail TX)" setting to [On] on the
[Protocol Settings] page.

SMTP Server Enter the host name or IP address of the SMTP server.
Name

SMTP Port Specify the port number to be used for SMTP. Use the SMTP default port
Number 25.

SMTP Server Set the amount of time to wait before time-out in seconds.
Timeout

Authentication Set whether SMTP authentication is used. To use authentication, enter the
Protocol user information for authentication.

SMTP Security Set SMTP security.

Turn on "SMTP Security" in "SMTP (E-mail TX)" on the [Protocol Settings]
page.

POP before Specify the time in seconds until the connection to the POP server times
SMTP Timeout outs. This can be set when [POP before SMTP] is selected in
"Authentication Protocol".

Connection Test Tests to confirm that the settings are correct.

Domain Set whether or not domains are restricted. Click the [Domain List] and enter
Restriction the domain names of addresses to be allowed or rejected. Restriction can
also be specified by e-mail address.

POP3 Set to receive e-mail at the machine.

POP3 Protocol Set POP3 protocol. Set the "POP3 (E-mail RX)" setting to [On] on the
[Protocol Settings] page.

Check Interval Specify the interval for checking for incoming e-mail in minutes.

Run once now Click [Receive] to connect to the POP3 server immediately and check for
incoming E-mails.

Domain Set whether or not domains are restricted. Click the [Domain List] and enter
Restriction the domain names of addresses to be allowed or rejected. Restriction can
also be specified by e-mail address.

POP3 User Configure the settings for POP3 user accounts and the POP3 server. You
Settings can configure up to three users.

2-41

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Preparation before Use

Setting Description

E-mail E-mail Size Enter the maximum size of E-mail that can be sent in kilobytes. When E-
Send Limit mail size is greater than this value, an error message appears and E-mail
Settings sending is cancelled. Use this setting if you have set E-mail Size Limit for
SMTP server. If not, enter a value of 0 (zero) to enable E-mail sending
regardless of the size limit.

Sender Address Enter the E-mail address of the person responsible for the machine, such
as the machine administrator, so that a reply or non-delivery report will go
to a person rather than to the machine. The sender address must be
entered correctly for SMTP authentication. The maximum length of the
sender address is 128 characters.

Signature Enter the signature. The signature is free form text that will appear at the
end of the E-mail body. It is often used for further identification of the
machine. The maximum length of the signature is 512 characters.

Function Change the function default settings in [Common/Job Default Settings]

Defaults page.

4 Click Submit.

2-42

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Preparation before Use

Registering Destinations
You can register destinations to the machine's Address Book, from Command Center RX.

1 Access Command Center RX by referring to Accessing Command Center RX on page 2-37.

2
2 From the Address Book menu, click Machine Address Book.

3 Click Add.

4 Enter the destination information.

Enter the information for the destination you want to register. The fields to populate are the same as when
registering via operation panel.

Registering Editing Destination (Address Book/Adding One-Touch Keys) on page 8-158

5 Click Submit.

2-43

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Preparation before Use

Registering a Custom Box

You can register a custom box from Command Center RX.

1 Access Command Center RX by referring to Accessing Command Center RX on page 2-37.

2 From the Document Box menu, click Custom Box.

3 Click Add.

4 Enter the box details.

Enter the information for the custom box you want to register. The fields to populate are the same as when
registering on the machine. For details, refer to Editing a Destination on page 8-168.

5 Click Submit.

2-44

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Preparation before Use

Printing a document stored in a Custom Box

A document stored in a Custom Box can be printed from Command Center RX.

1 Access Command Center RX by referring to Accessing Command Center RX on page 2-37.

2
2 From the Document Box menu, click Custom Box.

2-45

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Preparation before Use

3 Click the number or name of the Custom Box in which the document is stored.

4 Select the document you wish to print.

Select the checkbox of the document to be printed.

5 Click Print.

For settings that are configurable, refer to Command Center RX User Guide.

2-46

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Preparation before Use

Loading Paper
Paper can be loaded standardly in the cassette 1 and the multi purpose tray. A paper feeder is also available
as an option (refer to Optional Equipment on Appendix-2).
2
Before Loading Paper
When you open a new package of paper, fan the sheets
to separate them slightly prior to loading in the following
steps.

1 Bend the whole set of sheets to swell them in the

middle.

2 Hold the stack at both ends and stretch it while

keeping the entire stack swelled.

3 Raise the right and left hands alternately to create

a gap and feed air between the papers.

4 Finally, align the papers on a level, flat table.

If the paper is curled or folded, straighten it before

loading. Paper that is curled or folded may cause a
jam.

CAUTION: If you copy onto used paper (paper

already used for copying), do not use paper that is
stapled or clipped together. This may damage the
machine or cause poor image quality.

NOTE: If printouts are curled or not neatly stapled,

turn the stack in the cassette upside down.

Avoid exposing opened paper to high

temperatures and high humidity as dampness can
be a cause of problems. Seal any remaining paper
after loading in the multi purpose tray or cassettes
back in the paper storage bag.

If the machine will not be used for a prolonged

period, protect all paper from humidity by removing
it from the cassettes and sealing it in the paper
storage bag.

NOTE: If you use special paper such as letterhead,

paper with holes or paper with pre-prints like logo or
company name, refer to Paper on Appendix-13.

2-47

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Preparation before Use

Loading Paper in the Cassettes

The standard cassette 1 will hold plain paper, recycled paper or color paper.
The standard cassette holds up to 250 sheets of Legal or smaller plain paper (80 g/m2).

The following paper sizes are supported: A4, A5, A6, B5, Legal, Letter, Other (Folio, Oficio II, Executive,
Statement, ISO B5, 16K, 216x340mm and Envelope C5)

IMPORTANT:
• You should not use inkjet printer paper or any paper with a special surface coating. (Such papers may
cause paper jams or other faults.)
• When using media types other than plain paper (such as recycled or colored paper), always specify the
media type setting. (Refer to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassette 1 on page 2-57)
The cassettes can hold paper with weights up to 163 g/m2.
• Do not load thick paper that is heavier than 163 g/m2 in the cassettes. Use the multi purpose tray for paper
that is heavier than 163 g/m2.

1 Pull the cassette completely out of the machine.

IMPORTANT: When pulling the cassette out of the

machine, ensure it is supported and does not fall out.

2 Turn the Paper Size Dial until the paper size you
are using is visible. The paper size set here is
recognized by the machine.

IMPORTANT: To use a paper size that does not

appear on the paper size dial, set the paper size dial to
"Other". The paper size must also be set from the
operation panel. For details, see Specifying Paper Size
and Media on page 2-57.

3 Adjust the position of the paper width guides

located on the left and right sides of the cassette.

2-48

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Preparation before Use

NOTE: Paper sizes are marked on the cassette.

4 Adjust the paper length guide to the paper size

required.

5 Load the paper in the cassette. Ensure the side to

be printed is facing up and the paper is not folded,
curled, or damaged.

IMPORTANT: Do not load paper above the triangle

mark located on the width guide.
• Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not
curled or folded. Paper that is curled or folded may
cause paper jams.
• Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the
level indicator (see illustration below).
• When loading the paper, keep the side that was
closest the package seal facing up.
• The paper length and width guides must be
adjusted to the paper size. Loading the paper
without adjusting these guides may cause skewed
feeding and paper jams.
• Be sure that the paper length and width guides rest
securely against the paper. If there is a gap,
readjust the guides to fit the paper.

2-49

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Preparation before Use

6 Insert the paper cassette into the slot in the

machine. Push it straight in as far as it will go.

There is a paper gauge on the right side of the front

of the paper cassette to indicate the remaining
paper supply. When paper is exhausted, the
pointer will go down to the level of (empty).

NOTE: If the machine will not be used for a prolonged

period, protect all paper from humidity by removing it
from the cassettes and sealing it in the paper storage
bag.

IMPORTANT: When pulling out the cassette from the

machine, confirm there is no paper left in the machine.
Be sure that the paper is properly set in the cassette.

7 Select the media type (plain, recycled, etc.) loaded

in the cassette. (Refer to Specifying Paper Size
and Media Type for the Cassette 1 on page 2-57.)

2-50

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Preparation before Use

Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray

The multi purpose tray will hold up to 50 sheets of Legal or smaller plain paper (80 g/m2).

The multi purpose tray accepts paper sizes from A4 to A6 and Hagaki and from Legal to Statement-R,
216x340mm, and 16K. Be sure to use the multi purpose tray when you print on any special paper.
2

IMPORTANT: When using media types other than plain paper (such as recycled or colored paper), always
specify the media type setting. (Refer to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray on
page 2-62.) If you are using a paper weight of 106 g/m2 or more, set the media type to Thick.

The capacity of the multi purpose tray is as follows.

• A4 or smaller plain paper (80 g/m2), recycled paper or color paper: 50 sheets
• Hagaki: 15 sheets
• OHP film: 1 sheet
• Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope #10 (Commercial #10), Envelope #9 (Commercial #9), Envelope #6
(Commercial #6 3/4), Monarch, Youkei 4, Youkei 2: 5 sheets

NOTE: When you load custom size paper, enter the paper size by referring to Specifying Paper Size and
Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray on page 2-62.
When you use special paper such as transparencies or thick paper, select the media type by referring to
Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray on page 2-62.

1 Pull the Multi Purpose tray towards you until it

stops.

2 When using legal size paper, pull out the support

tray section of the multi purpose tray.

2-51

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Preparation before Use

3 Adjust the position of the paper width guides on the

Multi Purpose tray. Standard paper sizes are
marked on the Multi Purpose tray. For standard
paper sizes, slide the paper width guides to the
corresponding mark.

4 Align the paper with the paper guides and insert as

far as it will go.

IMPORTANT: Keep the side that was closest the

package seal facing up.
Curled paper must be uncurled before use.
Straighten the top edge if it is curled.
When loading paper into the multi purpose tray, check
that there is no paper left over in the tray from a
previous job before loading the paper. If there is just a
small amount of paper left over in the multi purpose tray
and you want to add more, first remove the left-over
paper from the tray and include it with the new paper
before loading the paper back into the tray.

2-52

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Preparation before Use

Loading Envelopes or Hagaki

5 envelopes may be loaded in the multi purpose tray.

Acceptable envelope and Hagaki sizes are as follows.

2
Acceptable Envelope Size

Hagaki 148×100 (mm)

Oufuku Hagaki 148×200 (mm)

Youkei 2 162×114 (mm)

Youkei 4 235×105 (mm)

Monarch 3 7/8"×7 1/2"

Envelope #10 (Commercial #10) 4 1/8"×9 1/2"

Envelope DL 110×220 (mm)

Envelope C5 162×229 (mm)

Executive 7 1/4"×10 1/2"

Envelope #9 (Commercial #9) 3 7/8"×8 7/8"

Envelope #6 (Commercial #6 3/4) 3 5/8"×6 1/2"

ISO B5 176×250 (mm)

1 Pull the Multi Purpose tray towards you until it

stops.

2 When using legal size paper, pull out the support

tray section of the multi purpose tray.

2-53

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Preparation before Use

3 Adjust the position of the paper width guides on the

Multi Purpose tray.

4 Align the paper with the paper width guides and

insert as far as it will go.

5 For landscape form envelopes, close the flap.

Insert the envelope all the way along the width
guides, keeping the printing side face-up and the
edge with the flap left.

For portrait form envelopes, open the flap. Insert

the envelope all the way along the width guides,
keeping the printing side face-up and the edge with
the flap facing the front side.

2-54

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Preparation before Use

When you load envelopes or cardstock in the multi purpose tray

Load envelope with the print side facing up.
2

Close the flap.

Cardstock
Open the flap.
(Hagaki)
Return postcard Portrait Landscape
(Oufuku Hagaki) form form
envelopes envelopes

NOTE: Use unfolded return postcard (Oufuku Hagaki).

IMPORTANT: How to load envelopes (orientation and facing) will differ depending on the type of envelope. Be
sure to load it in correctly, otherwise printing may be done in the wrong direction or on the wrong face.

IMPORTANT: If the Cardstock is warped, press on the

warped area before putting it in the multi purpose tray.

NOTE: When you load envelopes in the multi purpose tray, select the envelope type by referring to Specifying
Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray on page 2-62.

2-55

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Preparation before Use

Paper stopper
To use the sheet ejection stopper, open as shown below. (Example: Legal)

2-56

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Preparation before Use

Specifying Paper Size and Media

The default paper size setting for cassette 1, for multi purpose tray and for the optional paper feeder (cassettes
2 and 3) is [Letter], and the default media type setting is [Plain].
To set the paper used in the cassette 1 when the paper is a frequently used paper, set the paper size using the
paper size dial as described in Loading Paper in the Cassettes on page 2-48, and then set the paper type as 2
described in Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassette 1 on page 2-57. If the paper does not appear
on the paper size dial, set the paper size dial to "Other" as described in Loading Paper in the Cassettes on page
2-48, and then set the paper size and paper type as described in Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the
Cassette 1 on page 2-57
To fix the type of paper to be used in multi purpose tray, specify the paper size setting. (Refer to Specifying
Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray on page 2-62.)
Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassette 1
To fix the type of paper to be used in cassette 1 or the optional paper feeder (cassettes 2 and 3), specify the
paper size. Also, you use a media type other than plain paper, specify the media type setting.
The available paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below.

Cassette 1

Selection Item Selectable Size/Type

Paper Size Inch size: Letter, Legal, Statement and Oficio II

Metric size: A4, A5, A6, B5, Folio, 216x340mm,
16K, ISO B5, Executive, Envelope C5 and Custom*
Media Type Plain, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color, Rough,
Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick (163 g/m2 or less),
High Quality and Custom 1~8,

Paper feeder

Selection Item Selectable Size/Type

Paper Size Inch size: Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive,

and Oficio II
Metric size: A4, A5, B5, Folio, 216x340mm, 16K,
ISO B5, Envelope #10 (Commercial #10),
Envelope #9 (Commercial #9), Envelope #6
(Commercial #6 3/4), Envelope Monarch,
Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Oufuku Hagaki,
Youkei 4, Youkei 2, Custom*
Media Type Plain, Labels**, Recycled, Preprinted***, Bond, Rough,
Cardstock**, Color, Prepunched***, Letterhead***,
Envelope**, Coated**, Thick (163 g/m2 or less),
Thick** (163 g/m2 and more), High Quality and Custom 1~8

* For instructions on how to specify the custom paper size, refer to Original/Paper Settings on page 8-8.
** Only on products with the paper feeder (multi purpose) installed.
*** To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to Special Paper Action on page 8-24.

NOTE: To change to a media type other than Plain, refer to Paper Weight on page 8-18.
If using the products equipped with the fax function, the available media types for printing received faxes are
as shown below.
Plain, Labels, Recycled, Bond, Color, Rough, Envelope, Cardstock, Coated, Thick, High Quality and Custom

2-57

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Preparation before Use

When the paper size appears on the paper size dial

1 Turn the paper size dial to set the paper size.

2 Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main

unit operation panel.

When you are performing user management and

Login User Name: L b have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
******************** Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Login Password: Password to log in.

[ Login ] NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on

Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.

3 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Common Settings].
5 User Property
6
*********************
Common Settings
7 Copy
[ Exit ]

4 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu

Common Settings: a b appears.
1
*********************
Language
2 Default Screen
3 Sound
[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [Orig./Paper Set.].

6 Press the OK key. The Orig./Paper Set. menu

Orig./Paper Set.: a b appears.
1
*********************
Custom Orig.Size
2 Def. Orig. Size
3 Custom PaperSize
[ Exit ]

2-58

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Preparation before Use

7 Press the  or  key to select from [Cassette 1

Set.] to [Cassette 3 Set.].

NOTE: [Cassette 2 Set.] and [Cassette 3 Set.] are

shown when the optional cassettes are installed. 2
Follow the steps below when you select the main
unit cassette (Cassette 1). Operate in a similar
fashion when you select an optional cassette
(Cassette 2 or 3).

8 Press the OK key. The Cassette 1 Set. menu

Cassette 1 Set.: a b appears.
1
*********************
Cassette 1 Type

[ Exit ]

9 Select [Cassette 1 Type].

10 Press the OK key. Cassette 1 Type appears.

Cassette 1 Type: a b
1
*********************
*Plain
2 Rough
3 Recycled

11 Press the  or  key to select the desired paper

type and then press the OK key.

Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to

the Cassette 1 Set. menu.

2-59

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Preparation before Use

When the paper size does not appear on the paper size dial
1 Turn the paper size dial to set "Other".

2 Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main

unit operation panel.

When you are performing user management and

Login User Name: L b have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
******************** Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Login Password: Password to log in.

[ Login ] NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on

Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.

3 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Common Settings].
5 User Property
6
*********************
Common Settings
7 Copy
[ Exit ]

4 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu

Common Settings: a b appears.
1
*********************
Language
2 Default Screen
3 Sound
[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [Orig./Paper Set.].

6 Press the OK key. The Orig./Paper Set. menu

Orig./Paper Set.: a b appears.
1
*********************
Custom Orig.Size
2 Def. Orig. Size
3 Custom PaperSize
[ Exit ]

2-60

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Preparation before Use

7 Press the  or  key to select from [Cassette 1

Set.] to [Cassette 3 Set.].

NOTE: [Cassette 2] and [Cassette 3] are shown when

the optional cassettes are installed. 2
Follow the steps below when you select the main
unit cassette (Cassette 1). Operate in a similar
fashion when you select an optional cassette
(Cassette 2 or 3).

8 Press the OK key. The Cassette 1 Set. menu

Cassette 1 Set.: a b appears.
1
*********************
Cassette 1 Size
2 Cassette 1 Type

[ Exit ]

9 Press the  or  key to select [Cassette 1 Size].

NOTE: When the Paper Size Dial on the cassette is

set to a standard paper size, this setting does not
appear.

10 Press the OK key. Cassette 1 Size appears.

Cassette 1 Size: a b
1
*********************
*Lettera
2 Legala
3 Statementa

11 Press the  or  key to select the desired paper

size and then press the OK key.

Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to

the Cassette 1 Set. menu.

12 Press the  or  key to select [Cassette 1 Type].

Cassette 1 Set.: a b
1 Cassette 1 Size
2
*********************
Cassette 1 Type

[ Exit ]

2-61

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Preparation before Use

13 Press the OK key. Cassette 1 Type appears.

Cassette 1 Type: a b
1
*********************
*Plain
2 Rough
3 Recycled

14 Press the  or  key to select the desired paper

type and then press the OK key.

Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to

the Cassette 1 Set. menu.

Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray
To fix the type of paper to be used in the multi purpose tray, specify the paper size. When using other than a
plain paper, specify the media type.
The available paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below.

Item Description

Paper Standard Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive, Oficio II,

Size Sizes A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, Folio, 216x340 mm, 16K,
ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9,
Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL,
Envelope C5, Hagaki, Oufuku Hagaki, Youkei 4,
Youkei 2, Custom*
Media Type Plain (105 g/m2 or less), Transparency, Rough,
Vellum (63 g/m2 or less), Labels, Recycled,
Preprinted**, Bond, Cardstock, Color,
Prepunched**, Letterhead**, Envelope, Coated,
Thick (106 g/m2 and more), High Quality,
Custom 1-8**
* Refer to Adding a Custom Size and Media Type for Paper to Print on
page 8-11 for selecting Custom Paper Size.
** Refer to Paper Weight on page 8-18 for selecting Custom 1- 8 from
Media Type.
To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to
Special Paper Action on page 8-24.

NOTE: To change to a media type other than Plain, refer to Paper Weight on page 8-18
If using the products equipped with the fax function and the multi purpose tray is used to print a received FAX,
the available media types are as shown below.
Plain, Labels, Recycled, Bond, Vellum, Color, Rough, Envelope, Cardstock, Coated, Thick, High Quality and
Custom

2-62

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Preparation before Use

1 Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main

unit operation panel.

When you are performing user management and 2

Login User Name: L b have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
******************** Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Login Password: Password to log in.

[ Login ] NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on

Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.

2 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Common Settings].
5 User Property
6
*********************
Common Settings
7 Copy
[ Exit ]

3 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu

Common Settings: a b appears.
1
*********************
Language
2 Default Screen
3 Sound
[ Exit ]

4 Press the  or  key to select [Orig./Paper Set.].

5 Press the OK key. The Orig./Paper Set. menu

Orig./Paper Set.: a b appears.
1
*********************
Custom Orig.Size
2 Def. Orig. Size
3 Custom PaperSize
[ Exit ]

6 Press the  or  key to select [MP Tray Set.].

7 Press the OK key. The MP Tray Set. menu

MP Tray Set.: a b appears.
1
*********************
MP Tray Size
2 MP Tray Type

[ Exit ]

8 Press the  or  key to select [MP Tray Size].

2-63

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Preparation before Use

9 Press the OK key. MP Tray Size appears.

MP Tray Size: a b
1
*********************
*Lettera
2 Legala
3 Statementa

10 Press the  or  key to select the desired paper

MP Tray Size: a b size and then press the OK key.
>
*********************
*ISO B5a
? Envelope #10 Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the MP Tray Set. menu.
@ Envelope #9

11 Press the  or  key to select [MP Tray Type].

MP Tray Set.: a b
1 MP Tray Size
2
*********************
MP Tray Type

[ Exit ]

12 Press the OK key. MP Tray Type appears.

MP Tray Type: a b
1
*********************
*Plain
2 Transparency
3 Rough

13 Press the  or  key to select the desired paper

type and then press the OK key.

Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to

the MP Tray Set. menu.

2-64

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Preparation before Use

Loading Originals
Follow the steps below to load originals for copying, sending or storing.

Placing Originals on the Platen 2

You may place books or magazines on the platen in addition to ordinary sheet originals.

1 Open the document processor.

NOTE: Before opening the document processor, be

sure that there are no originals left on the original table
or on the original eject table. Originals left on the
original table or on the original eject table may fall off
when the document processor is opened.
Keep the document processor open if the original is 25
mm or thicker.

2 Place the original. Put the scanning side facedown

and align it flush against the original size indicator
plates with the back left corner as the reference
point.

3 Close the document processor.

IMPORTANT: Do not push the document processor

forcefully when you close it. Excessive pressure may
crack the platen glass.

Do not close the document processor when the original

is 25 mm or thicker. The connector of the document
processor will be removed form the machine.

NOTE: Shadows may be produced around the edges

and in the middle of open-faced originals.

CAUTION: Do not leave the document processor

open as there is a danger of personal injury.

2-65

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Preparation before Use

Loading Originals in the Document Processor

The document processor automatically scans each sheet of multiple originals. Both sides of two-sided originals
are scanned.

Part Names of the Document Processor

(1) (1) Document processor cover
(2) (2) Original width guides
(3)
(3) Original table
(4)
(4) Original eject table
(5)
(5) Original stopper
(6) Document processor open/close handle
(6)

Originals Supported by the Document Processor

The document processor supports the following types of originals.

Weight 50 to 120 g/m2 (duplex: 50 to 110 g/m2)

Size Maximum A4 to Minimum A5

Maximum Legal to Minimum Statement

Capacity Plain paper, Colored paper, Recycled paper,

High quality paper: 50 sheets
Thick paper (110 g/m2): 36 sheets
Thick paper (120 g/m2): 33 sheets
Art paper: 1 sheet

Originals Not Supported by the Document Processor

Do not use the document processor for the following types of originals.

• Soft originals such as vinyl sheets

• Transparencies such as OHP film
• Carbon paper
• Originals with very slippery surfaces
• Originals with adhesive tape or glue
• Wet originals
• Originals with correction fluid which is not dried
• Irregularly shaped (non-rectangular) originals
• Originals with cut-out sections
• Crumpled paper
• Originals with folds (Straighten the folds before loading. Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam).
• Originals bound with clips or staples (Remove the clips or staples and straighten curls, wrinkles or creases
before loading. Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam).

2-66

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Preparation before Use

How to Load Originals

IMPORTANT: Before loading originals, be sure that there are no originals left on the original eject table.
Originals left on the original eject table may cause the new originals to jam.
2
1 Adjust the original width guides to fit the originals.

2 Place the originals. Put the side to be scanned (or

the first side of two-sided originals) face-up. Slide
the leading edge into the document processor as
far as it will go.

IMPORTANT: Confirm that the original width guides

exactly fit the originals. If there is a gap, readjust the
original width guides. The gap may cause the originals
to jam.

Ensure that loaded originals do not exceed the

level indicator. Exceeding the maximum level may
cause the originals to jam (see the figure).

Originals with punched holes or perforated lines

should be placed in such a way that the holes or
perforations will be scanned last (not first).

NOTE: When the original has been inserted to the

correct position, an automatic document feeder image
will appear in the message display.

2-67

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Preparation before Use

2-68

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3 Basic Operation

This chapter explains the following operations.

• Login/Logout................................................................. 3-2
• One-Touch Keys and Program Keys ............................ 3-3
• Message Display .......................................................... 3-6
• Copying ........................................................................ 3-7
• Printing - Printing from Applications ........................... 3-21
• Sending ...................................................................... 3-24
• Preparation for sending a document to a PC ............. 3-31
• Confirm Destination Screen ....................................... 3-40
• Specifying Destination ................................................ 3-41
• Scanning using TWAIN .............................................. 3-45
• Canceling Jobs ........................................................... 3-46
• Checking Remaining Toner and Paper....................... 3-47

3-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Basic Operation

Login/Logout
If user login administration is enabled, it is necessary to enter the Login User Name and Login Password to use
the machine.

NOTE: You will be unable to log in if you forget your Login User Name or Login Password. In this event, log in
with administrator privileges and change your Login User Name or Login Password.
By default, one of each default user with machine administrator rights and administrator privileges is already
stored. The following are the default user's properties.
User Name: DeviceAdmin
Login User Name: 2600
Login Password: 2600
Access Level: Administrator
It is recommended to periodically change the user name, Login User Name and Login Password regularly for
your security.

Login

NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.

1 If the screen shown appears during operations,

Login User Name: L b enter the Login User Name.
*******************
Login Password:

[ Login ]

2 Press the  key. The input cursor moves to Login

Password.

3 Enter the Login Password.

Press the  key to move the input cursor to Login

User Name.

4 Check the Login User Name and Login Password

are correct, and press [Login] (the Right Select
key).

Logout

To logout from the machine, press the Logout to return

to the Login User Name/password entry screen.

3-2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Basic Operation

One-Touch Keys and Program Keys

The one-touch keys and program keys on the operation panel are described below.

One-Touch Key

Register destinations to one-touch keys, and you can enter the desired destination by pressing the applicable
one-touch key. For registering a destination to a one-touch key, refer to Adding a Destination on One-touch
Key on page 8-170.
3
Entering Destination with One-touch Key
1 In Address Entry, press the one-touch key where
Address Entry: B b the desired destination is registered.
*
Recalling from One-touch Keys 1 to 11
ABC Press the one-touch key where the destination is
[ Text ] registered.

Recalling from One-touch Keys 12 to 22

Press the Shift Lock key to turn on the indicator

next to the keys, and then press the one-touch
key where the destination is registered.

2 Complete. appears, and the stored address is

Ready to send. retrieved.
Dest.: 1
p :sally@kyoceradocuN
1-sided 300x300dpi
[ Duplex ] [ScanRes.]

Program Keys

Settings of various functions frequently used for copying and sending can be collectively registered as a
program. Then, you can change the current settings of various functions to the registered settings by just
pressing the applicable program key.

NOTE: The following functions are already registered in Program 1 key. This function allows you to copy the
front and back sides of ID card or other document that is smaller than Statement or A5 size onto a single page.
Although the functions are deleted by overwriting Program 1 key, you can register the same settings using the
Function Menu key.
Zoom Options: Auto Zoom
Combine: 2 in 1
Continuous Scan: On
Original Size: Statement/A5
Paper Selection: Cassette 1

3-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Basic Operation

ID Card Copy is printed on the Program 1 key.

When the functions are deleted by overwriting
Program 1 key, seal the label supplied with the
machine and write the function name in it.

The procedure for using ID Card copying is explained below.

1 Press the Copy key when the Copy key/indicator

is off.

NOTE: If the Message Display is turned off, press the

Energy Saver key and wait for the machine to warm up.

2 Place the original on the platen.

Put the scanning side facedown in the center of

Statement or A5 size scanning area.

NOTE: For loading instructions, refer to Loading

Originals on page 2-65.

3 Press the Program 1.

Recalled.
The ID Card Copy function is recalled.
z Program 1

4 Press the Start key. Scanning begins.

5 Turn over the original on the platen and press the

Start key.

6 After scanning all originals, press [End Scan] (the

Right Select key) to start copying.

Registering Settings
After making settings, press and hold the one of the
Registered. Program 1 to 4 keys where you want to register the
settings for 3 seconds. The current settings are
z Program 1 registered to the selected program key.

3-4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Basic Operation

Changing and Deleting Settings

1 Press and hold the one of the Program 1 to 4 keys
Menu: a b where the settings you want to change/delete are
1
*********************
Overwrite registered for 3 seconds. Menu appears.
2 Delete

3
2 To replace the registered settings with the current
Overwrite. settings, press the  or  key to select [Overwrite]
Are you sure? and then press the OK key. A confirmation screen
z Program 1 appears. Press [Yes] (the Left Select key) to
change the settings.
[ Yes ] [ No ]

To delete the registered settings, press the  or 

Delete. key to select [Delete] and then press the OK key.
Are you sure? A confirmation screen appears. Press [Yes] (the
z Program 1 Left Select key) to delete the registered settings.

[ Yes ] [ No ]

Recalling Settings
Press the one of the Program 1 to 4 keys where the settings you want to recall are registered. The current
settings of various functions are replaced with the registered settings.

3-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Basic Operation

Message Display
The following examples explain the messages and icons used on the message display.

1 Ready to copy. 1 Ready to send.

2 Copies: 1 6 Dest.: 1 8
3 A4q sA A4a 7 p :sally@kyoceradocuN 9
4 100% 1-sided 4
5 [ Zoom ] [ ] [ Duplex ] [ ] 5

Copier Screen Send Screen

Reference
Meaning
number

1 Indicates the current status of the machine. Also displays the title of the current
menu whenever the operation panel is being used.

2 Displays an icon that indicates the currently selected source of paper feed. The
meaning of each icon is as indicated below.

A The standard paper cassette is currently selected. When this icon is

displayed as G , there is no paper is the cassette.

B The paper cassette for the optional paper feeder is currently selected.
C When this icon is displayed as H or I , there is no paper is the cassette.

F The Multi Purpose Tray is currently selected. When this icon is displayed
as L , there is no paper is the Multi Purpose Tray.

3 Displays the size of the original(s).

4 Displays the current setting when there is a corresponding menu that can be
selected using the Left or Right Select keys.

5 Displays the title of the corresponding menu that can be selected using the Left
or Right Select keys.

6 Displays the number of copies.

7 Displays the paper size to be copied.

8 Displays the number of destinations.

9 Displays the destination.

3-6

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Basic Operation

Copying
Follow the steps as below for basic copying.

Part that is operated

1 Press the Copy key when the Copy key/indicator

is off.

NOTE: If the Message Display is turned off, press the

Energy Saver key and wait for the machine to warm
up.

2 Place the originals on the platen or in the

document processor.

NOTE: For loading instructions, refer to Loading

Originals on page 2-65.

3 The paper source for copying is the location

Ready to copy. displayed on the panel.
Copies: 1
Letterq sA Lettera
100%
[ Zoom ] [ Paper ]

Paper source

When you need to change the paper source, use

Paper Selection: a b the Paper Selection menu. If [Auto] is selected, the
1
*********************
* Auto most suitable paper source is automatically
2 A A4a Plain selected.
3 B A5a Plain
For specifying the paper source, refer to Paper
Selection on page 4-4.

3-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Basic Operation

4 Press the Auto Color key, Full Color key or

Black& White key to select the color mode.

NOTE: The setting of each key (color mode) is as

follows.
Auto Color key:
Automatically detects whether the original is color or
black & white and scans accordingly.
Full Color key:
Scans all documents in full color.
Black& White key:
Scans all documents in black & white.

5 Use the numeric keys to enter the copy quantity.

Specify the desired number up to 999.

6 Press the Start key to start copying.

7 Remove the finished copies from the top tray.

3-8

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Basic Operation

Adjusting Density
Use this procedure to adjust the density when copying.

Part that is operated

The procedure for adjusting the density of copies is explained below.

1 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu

Function Menu: a b appears.
1 Paper Selection g
*********************
2 Collate T
3 Duplex T
[ Exit ]

2 Press the  or  key to select [Density].

3 Press the OK key. Density appears.

Density: a b
4 v Lighter -1
5 w Normal 0
*********************
6 y Darker +1

4 Press the  or  key to select your desired

density.

5 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the basic screen.

6 Press the Start key. Copying begins.

3-9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Basic Operation

Selecting Image Quality

Select image quality suited to the type of original.

Part that is operated

The table below shows the quality options.

Image Quality Option Description

Text+Photo For originals with both text and

photographs.

Photo For photos taken with a camera.

Text For originals primarily consisting of text.

Map For maps, etc.

Printed Document For documents printed from this machine.

The procedure for selecting the quality of copies is explained below.

1 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu

Function Menu: a b appears.
1 g
*********************
Paper Selection
2 Collate T
3 Duplex T
[ Exit ]

2 Press the  or  key to select [Original Image].

3 Press the OK key. Original Image appears.

Original Image: a b
1
*********************
*Text+Photo
2 Photo
3 Text

4 Press the  or  key to select the image quality

suited to the type of original.

3-10

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Basic Operation

5 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the basic screen.

6 Press the Start key. Copying begins.

3-11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Basic Operation

Zoom Copying
Adjust the magnification to reduce or enlarge the original image. The following zoom options are available.

Part that is operated

Auto Zoom
Legal: 129 % Automatically reduces or enlarges the original image
suitably to the selected paper size.
Letter-R

A4: 141 %
Statement-R: 64 %
A5

A6: 70 %

Zoom Entry
Manually reduces or enlarges the original image in 1%
increments between 25% and 400%.
25 %

400 %

Standard Zoom

Reduces or enlarges at preset magnifications.

3-12

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Basic Operation

The following magnifications are available.

Model Zoom Level (OriginalCopy)

Inch Standard 100%, 400% (Max.), 200%, 129% (Statement >> Letter),
Models 78% (Legal >> Letter), 64% (Letter >> Statement), 50%,
25% (Min.)

Other 141% (A5 >> A4), 115% (B5 >> A4), 90% (Folio >> A4), 3
86% (A4 >> B5), 70% (A4 >> A5)

Metric Standard 100%, 400% (Max.), 200%, 141% (A5 >> A4),
Models 115% (B5 >> A4), 90% (Folio >> A4), 86% (A4 >> B5),
70% (A4 >> A5), 50%, 25% (Min.)

Other 129% (Statement >> Letter), 78% (Legal >> Letter),

64% (Letter >> Statement)

Metric Standard 100%, 400% (Max.), 200%, 141% (A5 >> A4),
Models 115% (B5 >> A4), 86% (A4 >> B5), 70% (A4 >> A5), 50%,
(Asia 25% (Min.)
Pacific)
Other 129% (Statement >> Letter), 90% (Folio >> A4),
78% (Legal >> Letter), 64% (Letter >> Statement)

The procedure for using zoom copying is explained below.

1 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu

Function Menu: a b appears.
1 g
*********************
Paper Selection
2 Collate T
3 Duplex T
[ Exit ]

2 Press the  or  key to select [Zoom].

3 Press the OK key. Zoom appears.

Zoom: a b
1
*********************
*100%
2 Auto
3 Standard Zoom

4 Press the  or  key to select the desired

magnification.

To copy in the same size as the original, select

[100%].

To select automatic zoom, select [Auto].

3-13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Basic Operation

To use fixed magnifications, select [Standard

Standard Zoom: a b Zoom] and press the OK key. Standard Zoom
1
*********************
400% appears. Press the  or  key to select the
2 200% desired magnification. If you select [Other] and
3 141% A5 >> A4 press the OK key, you can select from additional
magnifications.

To enter a magnification, select [Zoom Entry] and

Zoom Entry: D b press the OK key. Zoom Entry appears. Use the
(25 - 400) numeric keys to enter the any magnification.
*****200%

5 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the basic screen.

6 Press the Start key. Copying begins.

3-14

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Basic Operation

Duplex Copying
Produce two-sided copies. The following duplex options are available.

You can also create single-sided copies from two-sided originals or originals with facing pages such as books.
The following modes are available.

Part that is operated 3

One-sided to Two-sided
Produces two-sided copies from one-sided originals. In
5
case of an odd number of originals, the back side of the
4 5 last copy will be blank.
3 3
4

2 1
2

Original Copy

The following binding options are available.

ghi A B
ghi
def ghi
abc
abc
abc
A Original Left/Right to Binding Left/Right: Images on
def

the second sides are not rotated.

def
B Original Left/Right to Binding Top: Images on the
Original Copy second sides are rotated 180°. Copies can be
bound on the top edge, facing the same orientation
when turning the pages.

Two-sided to One-sided
Copies each side of a two-sided original onto two
1 1 2
individual sheets. The document processor is required.
2

The following binding options are available.

Original Copy

3-15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Basic Operation

• Binding Left/Right: Images on the second sides

are not rotated.
• Binding Top: Images on the second sides are
rotated 180°.

Two-sided to Two-sided
Produces two-sided copies from two-sided originals.
The document processor is required.

Original Copy

NOTE: The paper sizes supported in Two-sided to Two-sided are Legal, Letter, Statement, 16K, ISO B5,
Oficio II, Executive, A4, B5, A5, Folio and Envelope C5.

The procedure for using two-sided/duplex copying is explained below.

1 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu

Function Menu: a b appears.
1 Paper Selection g
*********************
2 Collate T
3 Duplex T
[ Exit ]

2 Press the  or  key to select [Duplex].

3 Press the OK key. Duplex appears.

Duplex: a b
1
*********************
*1-sided>>1-sided
2 1-sided>>2-sided
3 2-sided>>1-sided

4 Press the  or  key to select the desired duplex

copying mode.

If you select [1-sided>>2-sided], press [Detail] (the

Finish. Binding: a b Right Select key) and you can select the binding
1
*********************
*o Left/Right edge of the finished copies and the original setting
2 p Top orientation.

3-16

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Basic Operation

After pressing the OK key, select the binding edge

Orig.Orientation: a b of the finished copies and the original setting
1
*********************
*c Top Edge Top orientation.
2 d Top Edge left

If you select [2-sided>>1-sided], press [Detail] (the

3
Orig. Binding: a b Right Select key) and you can select the binding
1
*********************
*o Left/Right edge of the original and the original setting
2 p Top orientation.

After pressing the OK key, select the binding edge

Orig.Orientation: a b of the original and finished copies, and the original
1
*********************
*c Top Edge Top setting orientation.
2 d Top Edge left

If you select [2-sided>>2-sided], press [Detail] (the

Orig. Binding: a b Right Select key) and you can select the binding
1
*********************
*o Left/Right edge of the original and the original setting
2 p Top orientation.

After pressing the OK key, select the binding edge

Finish. Binding: a b of the finished copies and the original setting
1
*********************
*c Top Edge Top orientation.
2 d Top Edge left

After pressing the OK key, select the binding edge

Orig.Orientation: a b of the original and finished copies, and the original
1
*********************
*c Top Edge Top setting orientation.
2 d Top Edge left

5 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the basic screen.

3-17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Basic Operation

6 Press the Start key. Copying begins.

Scanning...

Job No.: 9999

Page(s): 1
[ Cancel ]

When [1-sided>>2-sided] is selected, press [End

Set original Scan] (the Right Select key) when original
and press Start key. scanning finishes.
Job No.: 9999
Page(s): 3
[ Cancel ] [End Scan]

3-18

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Basic Operation

Collate Copying
The machine can collate at the same time as it copies.

Part that is operated

You can use the Collate copy function for tasks such as those shown below.

3
Scan multiple originals and deliver complete sets of
2 copies as required according to page number.
3 1
3
2 2
1
1 3
2
1

Original Copy

The procedure for using collate copying is explained

below.

1 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu

Function Menu: a b appears.
1 g
*********************
Paper Selection
2 Collate T
3 Duplex T
[ Exit ]

2 Press the  or  key to select [Collate].

3 Press the OK key. Collate appears.

Collate: a b
1 Off
2
*********************
*On

4 Press the  or  key to select [Off] or [On].

3-19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Basic Operation

5 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the basic screen.

6 Press the Start key Copying begins.

3-20

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Basic Operation

Printing - Printing from Applications

Follow the steps below to print documents from applications.

NOTE: To print the document from applications, install the printer driver on your computer from the supplied
DVD (Product Library).

3
1 Create a document using an application.

2 Click File and select Print in the application. The

Print dialog box appears.

3 Click the  button next to the Name field and

select this machine from the list.

4 Enter the desired print quantity in the Number of

copies box. Enter any number up to 999.

When there is more than one document, select

Collate to print out one by one in the sequence of
the page numbers.

5 Click Properties button. The Properties dialog

box appears.

3-21

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Basic Operation

6 Select the Basic tab and click the Print Size 

button to select the paper size to use for printing
from the list.

To print on the special paper such as thick paper or

transparency, click the Media Type menu and
select the media type.

7 Click Source and select the paper source.

NOTE: If you choose Auto Select, papers are

supplied automatically from the paper source loaded
with paper of optimum size and type. To print on
special paper such as envelope or thick paper, place it
on the multi purpose tray and select MP Tray.

8 Select paper orientation, either Portrait or

Landscape, to match the orientation of the
document.

Selecting Rotate 180° will print the document

rotated 180°.

9 Click OK button to return to the Print dialog box.

10 Click OK button to start printing.

3-22

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Basic Operation

Printer Driver Help

The printer driver includes Help. To learn about print
settings, open the printer driver print settings screen
and display Help as explained below.

• Click the [?] button in the upper right corner of the

screen and then click the item you want to know
about. 3
• Click the item you want to know about and press
the [F1] key on your keyboard.

Printing by AirPrint
AirPrint is a printing function that is included standard in iOS 4.2 and later products, and Mac OS X 10.7 and
later products.

You can connect to the machine and print without installing a printer driver.

To allow the machine to be found when printing by AirPrint, you can set machine location information in
Command Center RX.

For details, refer to the Command Center RX User Guide.

3-23

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Basic Operation

Sending
This machine can send a scanned image as an attachment to an E-mail message or to a PC linked to the
network. In order to do this, it is necessary to register the sender and destination (recipient) address on the
network.

A network environment which enables the machine to connect to a mail server is required. It is recommended
that a Local Area Network (LAN) be used to assist with transmission speed and security issues.

To use the Scanning Function perform the following steps:

• Program the settings, including the E-mail setting on the machine.

• Use Command Center RX (the internal HTML web page) to register the IP address, the host name of the
SMTP server, and the recipient.
• Register the destination in the Address Book or One-touch keys.
• When the PC Folder (SMB/FTP) is selected, it is necessary to share the destination folder. For setting-up
the PC Folder, contact your administrator.

Follow the steps below for basic sending. The following four options are available.

• Send as E-mail: Sends a scanned original image as an E-mail attachment...page 3-25

• Send to Folder (SMB): Stores a scanned original image in a shared folder of any PC...page 3-27
• Send to Folder (FTP): Stores a scanned original image in a folder of an FTP server...page 3-27
• Image Data Scanning with TWAIN / WIA: Scan the document using a TWAIN or WIA compatible
application program...page 5-30

NOTE: Different sending options can be specified in combination. Refer to Sending to Different Types of
Destinations (Multi Sending) on page 3-44.

3-24

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Basic Operation

Send as E-mail
Sends a scanned original image as an E-mail attachment.

Part that is operated

NOTE:
• You must have a network environment in which this machine can connect to a mail server. It is
recommended that the machine be used in an environment in which it can connect to the mail server at any
time over a LAN.
• Access the Command Center RX beforehand and specify the settings required for sending e-mail. For
details, see Command Center RX on page 2-36.
• Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.

1 Press the Send key.

Displays the screen for sending.

2 Press the  or  key to select [E-mail].

Send to: a b
1 p E-mail
*********************
2 G Folder(SMB)
3 H Folder(FTP)

3 Press the OK key. Address Entry appears.

Address Entry: B b
*

ABC
[ Text ]

3-25

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Basic Operation

4 Enter the destination e-mail address.

NOTE: Destination can be specified using the

Address Book or the One-touch keys. Refer to
Specifying Destination on page 3-41.

5 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

Ready to send. screen returns to the basic screen.
Dest.: 1
p :sally@kyoceradocuN
NOTE: If the screen for confirming the entry of a new
1-sided 300x300dpi destination (page 8-77) is set to [On], a screen to
[ Duplex ] [ScanRes.] confirm the entered e-mail address appears. Enter the
same e-mail address again and press the OK key.

6 If there are additional destinations, press the

Confirm/Add Destination key. Repeat steps 2 to
5 to enter additional destinations. Up to 100
destinations can be specified.

Press [Exit] (the Right Select key) to return to the

basic screen.

Press the Confirm/Add Destination key to

Dest. Confirm.: a b confirm or delete the registered destinations.
p
*********************
Morgan@kyoceradocuN Press the  or  key to select a destination and
p aaaaaaaaa@kyoceradN press the OK key. Then, you can edit or delete the
p bbbbbbbbb@kyoceradN destination.
[ Add ] [ Exit ] Press [Exit] (the Right Select key) to return to the
basic screen.

7 Press the Start key. Transmission starts.

NOTE: If the screen for confirming the destination

before transmission (page 8-77) is set to [On], the
Confirm Destination screen appears when the Start
key is pressed. For more information, refer to Confirm
Destination Screen on page 3-40.

3-26

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Basic Operation

Send to Folder (SMB)/Send to Folder (FTP)

Stores a scanned original image file in the specified shared folder of any PC.

Stores a scanned original image in a folder of an FTP server.

Part that is operated

3

NOTE:
• Refer to Help of your operating system for details on how to share a folder.
• Be sure that SMB Protocol or FTP in the Command Center RX is On. For details, refer to the Command
Center RX User Guide.
• Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.

1 Press the Send key.

Displays the screen for sending.

2 Press the  or  key to select [Folder(SMB)] or

Send to: a b [Folder(FTP)].
1 p E-mail
2 G Folder(SMB)
*********************
3 H Folder(FTP)

3-27

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Basic Operation

3 Press the OK key. Host Name(SMB) or Host

Host Name(SMB): A b Name(FTP) appears.
Osaka SD*

ABC
[ Text ]
or
Host Name(FTP): A b 4 Enter the host name.
Osaka SD*
NOTE: Destination can be specified using the
ABC Address Book or the One-touch keys. Refer to
[ Text ] Specifying Destination on page 3-41.

5 Press the OK key. Path appears.

6 Enter the path name. Consider, that the share

Path: A b name but not the folder name on the destination
SD3\report* PC has to be typed in.

ABC
[ Text ]

7 Press the OK key. Login User Name appears.

8 Enter the Login User Name. You have to enter the

Login User Name: C b account name of the destination PC.
Maury* S

ABC
[ Text ]

9 Press the OK key. Login Password appears.

Login Password: A b
OOOOOOOOOOO*

ABC
[ Text ]

10 Enter the Login Password. You have to enter the

password of the account on the destination PC.

11 Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears.

Check the connection.
Are you sure?

[ Yes ] [ No ]

3-28

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Basic Operation

NOTE: If the screen for confirming the entry of a new

destination (page 8-77) is set to [On], screens to
confirm the entered host name and path name appear.
Enter the same host name and path name again and
press the OK key on their respective screens.

Data to be entered are as follows.

3
NOTE: You will be unable to send the data if you forget your Login User Name or Login Password. Contact
your administrator and check your Login User Name or Login Password.

For send to folder (SMB)

Max.
Item Data to be entered
characters

Host Name Host name or IP address of the PC to Up to 64

(SMB)* receive the data. characters

Path Share name Up to 128

For example: scannerdata characters
If saving in a folder in the shared folder:
"share name\folder name in shared folder"

Login User Name User name to access the PC Up to 64

For example, abcdnet\james.smith characters

Login Password Password to access the PC Up to 64

characters
* To specify a port number different from the default (445), enter using the format
“host name: port number” (e.g., SMBhostname: 140).

For send to folder (FTP)

Max.
Item Data to be entered
characters

Host Name (FTP)* Host name or IP address of FTP server Up to 64

characters

Path Path for the file to be stored Up to 128

For example, "User\ScanData". characters
If no path is entered, the file is stored in
the home directory.

Login User Name FTP server log-in user name Up to 64

characters

Login Password FTP server log-in password Up to 64

characters
* To specify a port number different from the default (21), enter using the format “host
name: port number” (e.g., FTPhostname: 140).

3-29

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Basic Operation

12 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). This makes a

Dest. Confirm.: a b connection with the entered destination.
p Morgan@kyoceradocuN
*********************
0667640000
0667741234
[ Add ] [ Exit ]

If the connection is successful, Connected. is

displayed on the screen. Press [OK] (the Right
Select key). Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the basic screen.

If the connection failed, Cannot connect. is

displayed. Press [OK] (the Right Select key). The
screen shown in step 3 reappears. Check and re-
enter the destination.

13 If there are additional destinations, press the Add

Destination key. Repeat steps 2 to 12 to enter
additional destinations. Up to 100 destinations can
be specified.

14 Press the Confirm/Add Destination key to

Dest. Confirm.: a b confirm the registered destinations.
*********************
OSAKA SD
Press the  or  key to select a destination and
press the OK key. Then, you can edit or delete the
destination.
[ Add ] [ Exit ]
Press [Exit] (the Right Select key) to return to the
basic screen.

15 Press the Start key. Transmission starts.

NOTE: If the screen for confirming the destination

before transmission (page 8-77) is set to [On], the
Confirm Destination screen appears when the Start
key is pressed. For more information, refer to Confirm
Destination Screen on page 3-40.

3-30

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Basic Operation

Preparation for sending a document to a PC

Check the information that needs to be set on the machine and create a folder to receive the document on your
computer. Screens of Windows 7 are used in the following explanation. The details of the screens will vary in
other versions of Windows.

NOTE: Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.

3
Checking what to enter for [Host Name]

Check the name of the destination computer.

1 From the Start menu, select Computer and then

System Properties.

Check the computer name in the window that

appears.

In Windows XP, right-click My Computer and select

Properties. The System Properties dialog box
appears. Click the Computer Name tab in the
window that appears and check the computer
name.

In Windows 8, select the desktop in the Start

screen, right-click Computer from Libraries, and
then select Properties.

If there is a workgroup

All characters appearing in "Full computer name"

should be entered in Host Name. (Example:
PC4050)

If there is a domain

The characters to the left of the first dot (.) in "Full

computer name" should be entered in Host Name.
(Example: pc4050)

2 After checking the computer name, click the

(Close) button to close the System Properties
screen.

In Windows XP, after checking the computer name,

click the Cancel button to close the System
Properties screen.

3-31

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Basic Operation

Checking what to enter for [Login User Name]

Check the domain name and user name for logging onto Windows.

1 From the Start menu, select All Programs (or

Programs), Accessories and then Command
Prompt.

In Windows 8, display Apps on Search in charms

on the Start screen, and select Command
Prompt.

The Command Prompt window appears.

2 At the Command Prompt, enter "net config

workstation" and then click Enter.

Screen example: user name "james.smith" and

domain name "ABCDNET"

Creating a Shared Folder

Create a shared folder to receive the document in the destination computer.

NOTE: If there is a workgroup in System Properties, configure the settings below to limit folder access to a
specific user or group.

1 From the Start menu, select Control Panel, Appearance and Personalization, and then Folder Options.

Windows XP, click My Computer and select Folder Options in Tools.

In Windows 8, select Settings in charms on Desktop, and select Control Panel, Appearance and
Personalization, and then Folder Options.

3-32

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Basic Operation

2 Click the View tab and remove the checkmark from Use Sharing Wizard (Recommended) in Advanced
settings.

In Windows XP, click the View tab and remove the checkmark from Use Simple File Sharing
(Recommended) in Advanced settings.

3 Click the OK button to close the Folder Options screen.

1 Create a folder on the local disk (C).

NOTE: For example, create a folder with the name

"scannerdata" on the local disk (C).

2 Right-click the scannerdata folder and click Share

and Advanced sharing. Click the Advanced
Sharing button.

The scannerdata Properties dialog box appears.

In Windows XP, right-click the scannerdata folder

and select Sharing and Security... (or Sharing).

3 Select the Share this folder checkbox and click

the Permissions button.

The Permissions for scannerdata dialog box

appears.

In Windows XP, select Share this folder and click

the Permissions button.

3-33

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Basic Operation

4 Click the Add button.

5 Enter the user name in the text box and click the
OK button.

6 Select the entered user, select the Change and

Read permissions, and click the OK button.

In Windows XP, go to step 8.

NOTE: "Everyone" gives sharing permission to everyone on the network. To strengthen security, it is
recommended that you select Everyone and remove the Read permission checkmark.

7 Click the OK button in the Advanced Sharing

screen to close the screen.

3-34

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Basic Operation

8 Click the Security tab and then click the Edit

button.

In Windows XP, click the Security tab and then

click the Add button.

9 Proceed in the same way as in step 5 to add a user

to Group or user names.

10 Select the added user, select the Modify and Read

& execute permissions, and then click the OK
button.

3-35

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Basic Operation

Configuring Windows Firewall (for Windows 7)

Permit sharing of files and printers and set the port used for SMB transmission.

NOTE: Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.

Checking file and printer sharing

1 From the Start menu, select Control Panel,
System and Security, and Allow a program
through Windows Firewall.

NOTE: If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click the Continue button.

2 Click Change settings, select the File and

Printer Sharing checkbox, and click OK.

Adding a port
1 From the Start menu, select Control Panel,
System and Security, and Check firewall
status.

3-36

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Basic Operation

2 Click Advanced settings.

3
3 Click Inbound Rules.

4 Click New Rule.

5 Select Port and click Next.

3-37

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Basic Operation

6 Select TCP, select Specific local ports, enter

"445", and click Next.

7 Select Allow the connection and click Next.

8 Make sure all checkboxes are selected and click

Next.

3-38

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Basic Operation

9 Enter "Scan to SMB" in "Name" and click Finish.

NOTE: In Windows XP or Windows Vista, follow the procedure below to set the port.

1 In Windows XP, from Start button on the Windows, select Control Panel, and then Windows Firewall.

In Windows Vista, from Start button on the Windows, select Control Panel, Security, and then Turn
Windows Firewall on or off.

If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click the Continue button.

2 Click the Exceptions tab and then the Add port... button.

3 Specify Add a Port settings.

Enter any name in "Name" (example: Scan to SMB). This will be the name of the new port. Enter "445" in "Port
Number". Select TCP for "Protocol".

4 Click the OK button to close the Add a Port dialog box.

In Windows 8, follow the procedure below to set the port.

1 In charms on Desktop, click Settings, Control Panel, System and Security, and then Windows Firewall.

If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click the Continue button.

2 Configure the settings, refer to Configuring Windows Firewall (for Windows 7) on 3-36.

3-39

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Basic Operation

Confirm Destination Screen

If the screen for confirming the destination before transmission (page 8-77) is set to [On], Check through the all
destination and press [Next]. appears when the Start key is pressed.

Part that is operated

Use the procedure below to operate the Confirm Destination screen.

1 Press the  or  key to check all destinations.

Destination List: a b
p
*********************
Morgan@kyoceradocuN The OK key can be pressed to check details or
0667640000 delete the selected address.
0667741234 To add a destination, press [Cancel] (the Left
[ Cancel ] [ Next ] Select key) to return to the previous screen.

p Morgan@kyoceradNa b
1 Detail
2 Delete

2 After the checking is finished, press [Next] (the

Press Start key. Right Select key). Press Start key. is displayed on
the screen.

[ Cancel ]

If there are destinations that are hidden and not yet

Check the destination checked, the screen displays Check the
list through the end. destination list through the end. and returns to the
Destination List screen. Check all destinations.

3-40

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Basic Operation

3 Place the original on the platen or in the document

processor, and press the Start key. Transmission
starts.

Specifying Destination
When specifying destination, choose from the Address Book or use the One-touch keys.
3
Part that is operated

Choosing from the Address Book

Select a destination registered in the Address Book.

1 In the basic screen for sending, press the Address

Select Addr Book: a b Book key. The Select Addr Book menu appears.
t
*********************
Address Book
t Ext Address Book
NOTE: If external address book is not registered, [Ext
Address Book] is not displayed.
[ Exit ]

2 Press the  or  key to select [Address Book] and

Address Book: a b then press the OK key. Address Book appears.
k
*********************
Design
l Fiala To use an address book on the LDAP server, select
[Ext Address Book].
l Maury
[ Menu ]

3 Press the  or  key to select the desired user or

group, and then press the OK key.

If you select a user, the list of destinations

l Fiala: a b registered to the user appears.
*********************
0667643277
p [email protected] If you select a group, proceed to step 5.
SMB-PC
[ Menu ]

3-41

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Basic Operation

4 Press the  or  key to select the desired

destination and then press the OK key.

5 Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to

the basic screen.

Destination Search
Destinations registered in the Address Book can be searched.

The procedures for using the different search modes are explained below.

Search in Address Book

1 In Address Book, press [Menu] (the Right Select
Address Book: a b key). Menu appears.
k
*********************
Design
l Fiala
l Maury
[ Menu ]

2 Press the  or  key to select [Search(Name)]

Menu: a b and then press the OK key. A search screen
1
*********************
Select appears.
2 Detail
3 Search(Name)

3 Enter the characters you want to search.

Search(Name): A b
ma*
S
ABC
[ Text ]

4 Press the OK key. The address book appears with

Address Book: a b the user that starts with the entered character
l
*********************
Maury string at the top.
l Morgan
l Sally
[ Menu ]

3-42

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Basic Operation

Search in Extended Address Book

1 In Ext Address Book, press [Menu] (the Right
Ext Address Book: a b Select key). Menu appears.
l
*********************
Fiala
l Maury
l Morgan

3
[ Menu ]

2 Press the  or  key to select [Search] and then

Menu: a b press the OK key. A search screen appears.
1 Select
2 Detail
3 Search
*********************

3 Enter the characters you want to search.

Search(Name): A b
ma* If you press [Menu] (the Right Select key) and
S then the OK key, Search by appears where you
can specify the search key and match condition.
ABC
Select the desired item for each and then press the
[ Menu ] [ Text ] OK key.

4 Press the OK key. The address book appears with

Ext Address Book: a b the user that starts with the entered character
l
*********************
Maury string at the top.
l Morgan
l Sally NOTE: If you first open the external address book, the
[ Menu ] search screen appears first. Then, operate from step 3.

Choosing by One-Touch Key

Select the destination using the One-touch keys.

In the basic screen for sending or the destination entry

screen, press the one-touch key where the destination
is registered.

NOTE: Refer to Adding a Destination on One-touch Key on page 8-170 for more information on adding one-
touch keys.

3-43

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Basic Operation

Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending)

You can specify destinations that combine e-mail addresses, folders (SMB or FTP) and fax numbers (Only on
products with the fax function installed). This is referred to as Multi Sending. This is useful for sending to
different types of destination (e-mail addresses, folders, etc.) in a single operation.

No. of broadcast items E-mail : Up to 100

Folders (SMP, FTP) : Total of 5 SMB and FTP
FAX : Up to 100

Procedures are the same as used in specifying the destinations of respective types. Continue to enter E-mail
address or folder path so that they appear in the destination list. Press the Start key to launch transmission to
all destinations at one time.

3-44

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Basic Operation

Scanning using TWAIN

This section explains how to scan an original using TWAIN.

The procedure for scanning using the TWAIN driver is explained as an example. The WIA driver is used in the
same way.

1 Activate the TWAIN compatible application.

3
2 Select the machine using the application and
display the TWAIN dialog box.

NOTE: For selecting the machine, see the Operation

Guide or Help for each application software.

Network 3 Select scanning settings in the TWAIN dialog box

that opens.

For settings that appear in the TWAIN dialog box,

see Help for each application software.

USB

4 Place the originals on the platen or in the

document processor.

5 Click the Scan button

The document data is scanned.

3-45

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Basic Operation

Canceling Jobs
Follow the steps below to cancel any print or send job being executed.

Canceling Jobs
You can also cancel jobs by pressing the Stop key.

1 During a printing or sending job, press the Stop

Job Cancel List: a b key. The Job Cancel List menu appears.
1
*********************
Print Job List
2 Send Job List
NOTE: Pressing the Stop key pauses a printing job
3 Store Job List but does not pause a sending job.
[ Exit ]

2 Press the  or  key to select the type of job you

Print Job List: a b want to stop, and then press the OK key. An output
s
**********************
0008 Copy queue of the selected job type is displayed.
0009 W maury's data s
0010 W MicrosoftworN s
[ Resume ] [ Menu ]

3 Press the  or  key to select the job you want to

Menu: a b stop, and then press [Menu] (the Right Select
1
*********************
Detail key). Menu appears.
2 Cancel Job

4 Press the  or  key to select [Cancel Job] and

Job will be canceled. then press the OK key. A confirmation screen
Are you sure? appears.
z 0008 Copy

[ Yes ] [ No ]

5 Press [Yes] (the Right Select key). The screen

displays Canceling.... and returns to the output
queue of the selected job type after the job is
canceled.

To cancel other jobs, repeat steps 3 to 5.

3-46

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Basic Operation

Checking Remaining Toner and Paper

You can check the remaining amount of toner and that of paper in each feeder cassette.

Checking Remaining Toner

1 Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status
Status: a b menu appears.
1
*********************
Print Job Status 3
2 Send Job Status
3 Store Job Status
[ Pause ]

2 Press the  or  key to select [Toner Status].

3 Press the OK key. Toner Status appears.

Toner Status: b
The remaining amount of toner is displayed in one
C VVV w E M VVV w E of 10 levels.
Y VVVVE K VV w EE

Checking Remaining Paper

1 Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status
Status: a b menu appears.
1
*********************
Print Job Status
2 Send Job Status
3 Store Job Status
[ Pause ]

2 Press the  or  key to select [Paper Status].

3 Press the OK key. Paper Status appears.

Paper Status: C b
Cassette 1: 1/ 4 Press the  or  key to switch the display of
Lettera Empty remaining paper amount among the main unit
cassette, optional cassette (if installed) and Multi
Plain
Purpose tray.

3-47

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Basic Operation

3-48

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 4 Copying Functions
This chapter explains the functions available for copying.

• Original Size ................................................................. 4-2

• Paper Selection ............................................................ 4-4
• Original Orientation....................................................... 4-8
• EcoPrint ...................................................................... 4-10
• Combine Mode ........................................................... 4-11
• Continuous Scan ........................................................ 4-14
• Job Finish Notice ........................................................ 4-15
• File Name Entry.......................................................... 4-17
• Print Override ............................................................. 4-18
• Color Selection ........................................................... 4-19
• Color Balance ............................................................. 4-20
• Sharpness .................................................................. 4-22
• Background Density ................................................... 4-23
• Saturation ................................................................... 4-25

4-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Copying Functions

Original Size
Specify the size of originals being scanned. Be sure to select the original size before starting the copying
process.

Part that is operated

The following options are available.

Item How to Select Sizes

Standard Select from Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive,

Sizes standard sizes, Oficio II, A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, Folio,
envelope, 216×340 mm, 16K, ISO B5,
postcard or the Envelope #10, Envelope #9,
custom sized Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch,
originals*. Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Hagaki,
Oufuku Hagaki, Youkei 4, Youkei 2
and Custom

* For instructions on how to specify the custom original size,

refer to Custom Original Size Setup on page 8-8.

Use the procedure below to select the original size.

1 Press the Copy key.

2 Place the originals on the platen or in the

document processor.

3 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu

Function Menu: a b appears.
1 Paper Selection g
*********************
2 Collate T
3 Duplex T
[ Exit ]

4 Press the  or  key to select [Original Size].

4-2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Copying Functions

5 Press the OK key. Original Size appears.

Original Size: a b
1
*********************
*Letterq
2 Legalq
3 Statementq

6 Press the  or  key to select the desired original

Original Size: a b size and then press the OK key.
>
*********************
*ISO B5q
? Envelope #10 Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to 4
the basic screen for copying.
@ Envelope #9

7 Press the Start key to start copying.

4-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Copying Functions

Paper Selection
Select the paper source that contains the required paper size.

Part that is operated

NOTE: Specify in advance the size and type of the paper loaded in the cassette (refer to Original/Paper
Settings on page 8-8).

Selecting the Cassette

Use the procedure below to select the paper supply cassette.

1 Press the Copy key.

2 Place the originals on the platen or in the

document processor.

3 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu

Function Menu: a b appears.
1 Paper Selection g
*********************
2 Collate T
3 Duplex T
[ Exit ]

4 Press the  or  key to select [Paper Selection].

5 Press the OK key. Paper Selection appears.

Paper Selection: a b
1
*********************
* Auto
2 A Lettera Plain
3 B Customa Plain

6 Press the  or  key to select the desired paper

size.

If [Auto] is selected, the paper matching the size of

the original is selected automatically.

4-4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Copying Functions

7 Press the OK key.

Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to

the basic screen for copying.

8 Press the Start key to start copying.

Selecting the Multi Purpose Tray

Change the paper size and media type.

The available paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below. 4
How to
Category Item Sizes
Select

Paper Standard Select from Letter, Legal, Statement,

Size Sizes the standard Executive, Oficio II, A4, A5,
size, A6, B5, B6, Folio,
envelope, 216×340 mm, 16K, ISO B5,
postcard or Envelope #10, Envelope #9,
the custom Envelope #6, Envelope
sized paper Monarch, Envelope DL,
Envelope C5, Hagaki,
Oufuku Hagaki, Youkei 4,
Youkei 2 and Custom*

Size Enter the Inch models

Entry size not Horizontal: 5.83 to 14.02" (in
included in 0.01" increments), Vertical: 2.76
the standard to 8.50" (in 0.01" increments)
sizes 1 and
2**. Metric models
Vertical: 70 to 216 mm (in 1 mm
increments), Horizontal: 148 to
356 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Media Plain, Transparency, Vellum, Labels, Recycled, Rough,

Type Preprinted***, Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched***,
Letterhead***, Envelope, Thick, High Quality,
Custom 1 to 8***
* For instructions on how to specify the custom paper size (Custom),
refer to Adding a Custom Size and Media Type for Paper to Print on
page 8-11.
** The input units can be changed in the System menu.
Refer to Switching Unit of Measurement on page 8-27.
*** For instructions on how to specify the custom paper types 1 to 8,
refer to Paper Weight on page 8-18.
To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to
Special Paper Action on page 8-24.

NOTE: You can conveniently select in advance the size and type of paper that will be used often and set them
as default (refer to Paper Size and Media Type Setup for Multi Purpose Tray on page 8-16).

4-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Copying Functions

Use the procedure below to select the paper size and media type.

1 Press the Copy key.

2 Place the originals on the platen or in the

document processor.

3 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu

Function Menu: a b appears.
1 Paper Selection g
*********************
2 Collate T
3 Duplex T
[ Exit ]

4 Press the  or  key to select [Paper Selection].

5 Press the OK key. Paper Selection appears.

Paper Selection: a b
1
*********************
* Auto
2 A A4a Plain
3 B A5a Plain

6 Press the  or  key to select [MP Tray Set.].

7 Press the OK key. MP Tray Set. appears.

MP Tray Set.: a b
1
*********************
*Standard Size
2 Size Entry

8 Press the  or  key to select [Standard Size] or

[Size Entry] and press the OK key, select the
desired paper size, and then press the OK key.

If you select [Size Entry], using the numeric keys to

Size Entry(Y): D b enter the Y (vertical) size and press the OK key,
(5.83 - 14.02) and then enter the X (horizontal) size and press the
x ******
11.49 " OK key.

9 Press the  or  key to select the desired paper

Media Type: a b type and then press the OK key.
1
*********************
*Plain
2 Transparency Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the basic screen for copying.
3 Rough

4-6

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Copying Functions

10 Place paper in the multi purpose tray.

11 Press the Start key to start copying.
If Add paper in Multi Purpose tray. is displayed
during the copying process, add paper in the multi
purpose tray, and then press the OK key. Copying
then resumes.

4-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Copying Functions

Original Orientation
Select the original orientation to use the following functions.

• Duplex
• Combine mode

When placing originals on the platen

[Top Edge Top] [Top Edge Left]

When placing originals on the document processor

[Top Edge Top] [Top Edge Left]

NOTE: To change the default setting for the original orientation, refer to Orig.Orientation on page 8-30.

4-8

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Copying Functions

Use the procedure below to select the orientation when placing the originals on the platen.

1 Press the Copy key.

2 Place the originals on the platen or in the

document processor.

3 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu

Function Menu: a b appears.
1 Paper Selection g
*********************
2 Collate T
3 Duplex T 4
[ Exit ]

4 Press the  or  key to select [Orig.Orientation].

5 Press the OK key. Orig.Orientation appears.

Orig.Orientation: a b
1 c Top Edge Top
2 *d Top Edge Left
*********************

6 Press the  or  key to select [Top Edge Top] or

[Top Edge Left].

7 Press the OK key.

Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to

the basic screen for copying.

8 Press the Start key to start copying.

4-9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Copying Functions

EcoPrint
Use EcoPrint to save toner when printing. Use this function for test copies or any other occasion where high
quality print is unnecessary.

The procedure for making copies using EcoPrint is explained below.

1 Press the Copy key.

2 Place the originals on the platen or in the

document processor.

3 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu

Function Menu: a b appears.
1 Paper Selection g
*********************
2 Collate T
3 Duplex T
[ Exit ]

4 Press the  or  key to select [EcoPrint].

5 Press the OK key. EcoPrint appears.

EcoPrint: a b
1
*********************
*Off
2 On

6 Press the  or  key to select [On] and then press

the OK key.

Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to

the basic screen for copying.

7 Press the Start key to start copying.

4-10

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Copying Functions

Combine Mode
This mode allows you to copy 2 or 4 originals combined onto a single page. 2-in-1 mode or 4-in-1 mode. The
page boundary of each original can be indicated.

Part that is operated

NOTE: Combine mode is available for the copy paper sizes of Folio, A4, B5, Legal, Oficio II, Letter, Statement
and 16K.

2-in-1 Mode
For copying two originals onto a single sheet. This mode can be used with Duplex mode to copy four originals
onto one sheet.

The following 2-in-1 options and output orientations are available.

Original Copy Orientation of Original

Platen Document processor

NOTE: When placing the original on the platen, be sure to copy the originals in page order.

4-11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Copying Functions

4-in-1 Mode
For copying four originals onto a single sheet. This mode can be used with Duplex mode to copy eight originals
onto one sheet.

The following 4-in-1 options and output orientations are available.

Original Copy Orientation of Original

Platen Document processor

NOTE: When placing the original on the platen, be sure to copy the originals in page order.

Types of Page Boundary Lines

The following types of the boundary lines are available.

None Solid Dotted Positioning

Mark

The procedure for using Combine mode copying is explained below.

1 Press the Copy key.

4-12

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Copying Functions

2 Place the originals on the platen or in the

document processor.

3 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu

Function Menu: a b appears.
1 Paper Selection g
*********************
2 Collate T
3 Duplex T
[ Exit ]

4 Press the  or  key to select [Combine]. 4

5 Press the OK key. Combine appears.
Combine: a b
1 *Off
2
*********************
2 in 1
3 4 in 1
[ Detail ]

6 Press the  or  key to select [2 in1] or [4 in 1].

7 Press [Detail] (the Right Select key).

8 Press the  or  key to select the desired layout

2 in 1 Layout: a b and then press the OK key.
1 *g L to R f T to B
*********************
2 e R to L

9 Press the  or  key to select the desired border

Border Line: a b line type and then press the OK key.
1
*********************
* None
2 l Solid Line
3 m Dotted Line

10 Press the  or  key to select the orientation of

Orig.Orientation: a b the original and then press the OK key.
1 c Top Edge Top
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
2 *d Top Edge Left
********************* the basic screen for copying.

11 Press the Start key. Scanning begins.

If the original is placed on the platen, replace the
original and press the Start key.
After scanning all originals, press [End Scan] (the
Right Select key) to start copying.

4-13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Copying Functions

Continuous Scan
When a large number of originals cannot be placed in the document processor at one time, the originals can be
scanned in separate batches and then copied as one job. With this function, originals are scanned until you
press [End Scan] (the Right Select key).

The procedure for making copies using Continuous Scan is explained below.

1 Press the Copy key.

2 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu

Function Menu: a b appears.
1 Paper Selection g
*********************
2 Collate T
3 Duplex T
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Continuous Scan].

4 Press the OK key. Continuous Scan appears.

Continuous Scan: a b
1
*********************
*Off
2 On

5 Press the  or  key to select [On] and then press

the OK key.

Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to

the basic screen for copying.

6 Place the originals in the document processor or

on the platen and press the Start key.

7 Place the next original and press the Start key.

Repeat these steps to scan the remaining
originals.

After scanning all originals, press [End Scan] (the

Right Select key) to start copying.

4-14

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Copying Functions

Job Finish Notice

Sends a notice by E-mail when a copy job is complete. User can be notified of the completion of a copy job while
working at a remote desk, saving the time spent waiting beside the machine for copying to finish.

NOTE: PC should be configured in advance so that E-mail can be used.

Example of Job Finish Notice

4
To: [email protected]
Subject: 1234 Job end report mail

Job No.: 000002

Result: OK
End Time: Wed 28 Apr 2010 14:56:08
File Name: doc28042010145608
Job Type: Copy
------------------------------------------------
1234
[00:c0:ee:d0:01:14]
------------------------------------------------

Use the procedure below to enable job finish notification when making copies.

1 Press the Copy key.

2 Place the originals on the platen or in the

document processor.

3 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu

Function Menu: a b appears.
1 g
*********************
Paper Selection
2 Collate T
3 Duplex T
[ Exit ]

4 Press the  or  key to select [JobFinish Notice].

4-15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Copying Functions

5 Press the OK key. JobFinish Notice appears.

JobFinish Notice: a b
1
*********************
*Off
2 On

6 Press the  or  key to select [On] and then press

the OK key.

7 Press the  or  key to select [Address Book] or

Destination: a b [Address Entry], and then press the OK key.
1
*********************
*Address Book
2 Address Entry

8 If you select [Address Book], select [Address

Address Book: a b Book] on the next screen and press the OK key,
p
*********************
Fiala and then select the notice destination.
p Maury
Press [Menu] (the Right Select key), select
p Morgan [Detail] on the next screen and press the OK key to
[ Menu ] view the details of the selected notice destination.

If you select [Address Entry], enter the address of

Address Entry: B b the notice destination.
******@abcdefg.jp
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on
ABC Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
[ Text ]

9 Press the OK key.

Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to

the basic screen for copying.

10 Press the Start key to start copying. Upon

completion of the job, an E-mail notice is sent to
the selected destination.

4-16

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Copying Functions

File Name Entry

Names a copy job. Add other information such as date and time or job number as necessary. You can check a
job history or job status using the job name, date and time, or job number specified here.

Use the procedure below to assign a name to your copy job.

1 Press the Copy key.

2 Place the originals on the platen or in the

document processor.
4
3 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu
Function Menu: a b appears.
1 Paper Selection g
*********************
2 Collate T
3 Duplex T
[ Exit ]

4 Press the  or  key to select [File Name Entry].

5 Press the OK key. File Name Entry appears.

File Name Entry: A b
File_2010*
S
ABC
[ Text ]

6 Enter the file name, press the OK key. Additional

Info. appears.

NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on

Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.

7 Enter the date, job number, etc. on the screen, and

then press the OK key.

NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on

Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.

Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to

the basic screen for copying.

8 Press the Start key to start copying.

4-17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Copying Functions

Print Override
This function allows you to suspend the current print job when you need to make copies immediately. When the
interrupt copy job is completed, the machine resumes the suspended print job.

1 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu

Function Menu: a b appears.
1 Paper Selection g
*********************
2 Collate T
3 Duplex T
[ Exit ]

2 Press the  or  key to select [Print Override].

3 Press the OK key. Print Override appears.

Print Override: a b
1
*********************
*Off
2 On

4 Press the  or  key to select [On].

5 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed, the

machine is put into the interruption copy mode, and
the basic screen appears.

6 Perform the interrupt copy job in the same fashion

as a normal copy job. When the interrupt copy job
is completed, the machine resumes the
suspended print job.

4-18

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Copying Functions

Color Selection
Select the color mode for copying. To select the color mode, you can also select from the Auto Color key, Full
Color key or Black & White key.

1 Press the Copy key.

2 Place the originals on the platen or in the

document processor.

3 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu

Function Menu: a b appears. 4
1 Paper Selection g
*********************
2 Collate T
3 Duplex T
[ Exit ]

4 Press the  or  key to select [Color Selection].

5 Press the OK key. Color Selection appears.

Color Selection: a b
1
*********************
*Auto Color
2 Full Color
3 Black & White

6 Press the  or  key to select the desired color

mode and then press the OK key.

Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to

the basic screen for copying.

7 Press the Start key to start copying.

4-19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Copying Functions

Color Balance
Adjust the strength of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black to make fine hue adjustments.

NOTE: This feature is used with full color copying.

This feature can not be used together with Adjusting Density on page 3-9.
Refer to the sample image in Color balance adjustment on Appendix-23.

Follow the steps below to adjust color balance.

1 Press the Copy key.

2 Place the originals on the platen or in the

document processor.

3 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu

Function Menu: a b appears.
1 Paper Selection g
*********************
2 Collate T
3 Duplex T
[ Exit ]

4 Press the  or  key to select [Color Balance].

5 Press the OK key. Color Balance appears.

Color Balance: a b
1
*********************
*Off
2 On

6 Press the  or  key to select [On].

7 Press the OK key. A selection menu for the color to

Color Balance: a b be adjusted appears.
1
*********************
Cyan
2 Magenta
3 Yellow

8 Press the  or  key to select the color to be

adjusted.

9 Press the OK key. The color adjustment menu

Cyan: a b appears.
1
*********************
*-5
2 -4
3 -3

4-20

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Copying Functions

10 Press the  or  key to select the color intensity.

A larger negative value makes the color fainter,
and a larger positive value makes the color more
intense.

11 Press the OK key.

Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the basic screen for copying.

12 Press the Start key to start copying.

4

4-21

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Copying Functions

Sharpness
Adjust the sharpness of image outlines. When copying penciled originals with rough or broken lines, clear
copies can be taken by adjusting sharpness toward [Sharpen]. When copying images made up of patterned
dots such as magazine photos, in which moire* patterns appear, edge softening and weakening of the moire
effect can be obtained by setting the sharpness toward [Unsharpen].

* Patterns that are created by irregular distribution of halftone dots.

Refer to the sample image in Appendix-24.

Follow the steps below to adjust sharpness.

1 Press the Copy key.

2 Place the originals on the platen or in the

document processor.

3 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu

Function Menu: a b appears.
1 Paper Selection g
*********************
2 Collate T
3 Duplex T
[ Exit ]

4 Press the  or  key to select [Sharpness].

5 Press the OK key. Sharpness appears.

Sharpness: a b
1
*********************
*-3(Unsharpen)
2 -2
3 -1

6 Press the  or  key to adjust the sharpness. A

larger negative value decreases the sharpness,
and a larger positive value increases the
sharpness.

7 Press the OK key.

Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to

the basic screen for copying.

8 Press the Start key to start copying.

4-22

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Copying Functions

Background Density
Removes dark background from originals, such as newspapers.

If the ground color is obtrusive, select [Auto]. If [Auto] does not remove the ground color, select [Manual] and
adjust the density of the ground color.

NOTE: This feature is used with full color and auto color copying. Background Density Adjust is disabled
during auto color copying when the a black & white original has been detected.

Original Copy

The setting items are as follows.

Item Description

Off Does not adjust the ground color.

Auto Automatically adjusts the background density

based on the original.

Manual Manually adjust the density in 5 levels. When

[Manual] is selected, press [1 (Lighter)] to
[5 (Darker)] to adjust the background density.

Follow the steps below to use background density adjust.

1 Press the Copy key.

2 Place the originals on the platen or in the

document processor.

3 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu

Function Menu: a b appears.
1 Paper Selection g
*********************
2 Collate T
3 Duplex T
[ Exit ]

4 Press the  or  key to select [Backgrnd Density].

4-23

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Copying Functions

5 Press the OK key. Backgrnd Density appears.

Backgrnd Density: a b
1
*********************
*Off
2 Auto
3 Manual

6 Press the  or  key to select [Off], [Auto] or

[Manual].

7 Press the OK key.

Manual: a b
3 3 When [Manual] is selected, Manual appears.
4 4 Press the  or  key to select [1 (Lighter)] to
[5 (Darker)] and then press the OK key.
5 *5 (Darker)
*********************
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the basic screen.

8 Press the Start key to start copying.

4-24

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Copying Functions

Saturation
Adjust the color saturation of the image.

The procedure for adjusting the color saturation is explained below.

1 Press the Copy key.

2 Place the originals on the platen or in the

document processor.

a b
3 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu 4
Function Menu: appears.
1 g
*********************
Paper Selection
2 Collate T
3 Duplex T
[ Exit ]

4 Press the  or  key to select [Saturation].

5 Press the OK key. Saturation appears.

Saturation: a b
1
*********************
*-3(Grayish)
2 -2
3 -1

6 Press the  or  key to adjust the color

saturation. A larger negative value reduces the
saturation, resulting in paler color in the copy. A
larger positive value increases the saturation,
resulting in more vivid color.

7 Press the OK key.

Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to

the basic screen for copying.

8 Press the Start key to start copying.

4-25

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Copying Functions

4-26

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 5 Sending Functions

This chapter explains the functions available for sending originals.

• Original Size ................................................................. 5-2

• Sending Size ................................................................ 5-4
• Zoom ............................................................................ 5-6
• Duplex Sending ............................................................ 5-8
• Original Orientation..................................................... 5-10
• File Format ................................................................. 5-12
• File Separation ........................................................... 5-14
• Original Image ............................................................ 5-15
• Adjusting Density........................................................ 5-16
• Scan Resolution ......................................................... 5-17
• Color / Grayscale / Black and White Selection ........... 5-18
• Continuous Scan ........................................................ 5-19
• File Name Entry.......................................................... 5-20
• Subject and Body Entry .............................................. 5-21
• Sharpness .................................................................. 5-22
• Background Density ................................................... 5-23
• WSD Scan .................................................................. 5-25
• Job Finish Notice ........................................................ 5-27
• FTP Encrypted TX ...................................................... 5-29
• Scanning Image using Application ............................. 5-30

5-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Sending Functions

Original Size
Select the size of originals that will serve as the basis for scanning. Be sure to select the original size before
starting the sending process.

Part that is operated

Choose the original size from the following groups of original size.

Item Detail Size

Standard Select from Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive,

Sizes standard sizes, Oficio II, A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, Folio,
Hagaki and 216×340 mm, 16K, ISO B5,
Custom Original Envelope #10, Envelope #9,
Size *. Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch,
Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Hagaki,
Oufuku Hagaki, Youkei 4, Youkei 2
and Custom
* Regarding the setting method of Custom Original Size, refer to
Custom Original Size Setup on page 8-8.

Use the procedure below to select the original size when sending scanned images.

1 Press the Send key.

2 Place the originals on the platen or in the

document processor.

3 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu

Function Menu: a b appears.
1 Color Selection g
*********************
2 Original Size T
3 Original Image T
[ Exit ]

4 Press the  or  key to select [Original Size].

5-2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Sending Functions

5 Press the OK key. Original Size appears.

Original Size: a b
1
*********************
*Letterq
2 Legalq
3 Statementq

6 Press the  or  key to select the desired original

Original Size: a b size and then press the OK key.
>
*********************
*ISO B5q
? Envelope #10 Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the basic screen for sending.
@ Envelope #9
5
7 Specify the destination, and press the Start key to
start sending.

5-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Sending Functions

Sending Size
Select the sending size (the size of image to be sent).

Part that is operated

The table below lists the sizes.

Item Detail Size

Standard Select from Same Same as OrigSize, Legal, Letter,

Sizes as Original Size, Statement, Executive, Offcio II, A4, A5,
Standard Size, A6, B5, B6, Folio, 216×340 mm, 16K,
envelope, postcard ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9,
or the custom sized Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch,
originals*. Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Hagaki,
Oufuku Hagaki, Youkei 4 and Youkei 2
* For instructions on how to specify the custom original size, refer to
Custom Original Size Setup on page 8-8.

Relationship between Original Size, Sending Size, and Zoom

Original Size (page 5-2), Sending Size, and Zoom (page 5-6) are related to each other. Refer to the following
table.

Original Size and the size you

the same different
wish to send as are

Original Size Specify as Specify as

necessary necessary
Sending Size Select [Same as Select the
OrigSize] required size
Zoom Select [100%] Select [Auto]
(or [Auto])

NOTE: When you select Sending Size that is different from Original Size, and select the Zoom [100%], you
can send the image as the actual size (No Zoom).

5-4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Sending Functions

Use the procedure below to select the size for transmission when sending scanned images.

1 Press the Send key.

2 Place the originals on the platen or in the

document processor.

3 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu

Function Menu: a b appears.
1 g
*********************
Color Selection
2 Original Size T
3 Original Image T
[ Exit ]

4 Press the  or  key to select [Sending Size].

5
5 Press the OK key. Sending Size appears.
Sending Size: a b
1
*********************
*Same as OrigSize
2 Letter
3 Legal

6 Press the  or  key to select the desired sending

Sending Size: a b size.
?
*********************
*ISO B5
@ Envelope #10
[ Envelope #9

7 Press the OK key.

Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to

the basic screen for sending.

8 Specify the destination, and press the Start key to

start sending.

5-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Sending Functions

Zoom
Scans the original by automatically zooming it depending on the sending size.

Part that is operated

The table below lists the available options.

Item Detail

100% No Zoom (to be scanned at actual size)

Auto Zoomed automatically according to the specified

sending size.

NOTE: When zooming in or out, see Sending Size on page 5-4 when selecting the sending size.

When Custom Size or Size Entry is selected as the original size, the originals are sent at normal size and
zooming cannot be used.

Depending on the combination of original size and sending size, the image is placed at the edge of the paper.

Use the procedure below to enlarge or reduce the original to match the transmission size.

1 Press the Send key.

2 Place the originals on the platen or in the

document processor.

3 Select the transmission size.

4 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu

Function Menu: a b appears.
1 Color Selection g
*********************
2 Original Size T
3 Original Image T
[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [Zoom].

5-6

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Sending Functions

6 Press the OK key. Zoom appears.

Zoom: a b
1
*********************
*100%
2 Auto

7 Press the  or  key to select [100%] or [Auto]

and then press the OK key.

Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to

the basic screen for sending.

8 Specify the destination, and press the Start key to 5

start sending.

5-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Sending Functions

Duplex Sending
Select the type and binding of original depending on the original.

Part that is operated

The table below lists the binding directions for each original type.

Original Type Binding

1-sided Sheet Original 1-sided —

2-sided Sheet Original 2-sided Binding Left/Right,

Binding Top

Use the procedure below to select the original type and binding direction when sending scanned originals.

1 Press the Send key.

2 Place the originals on the platen or in the

document processor.

3 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu

Function Menu: a b appears.
1 Color Selection g
*********************
2 Original Size T
3 Original Image T
[ Exit ]

4 Press the  or  key to select [Duplex].

5 Press the OK key. Duplex appears.

Duplex: a b
1
*********************
*1-sided
2 2-sided

5-8

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Sending Functions

6 Press the  or  key to select [1-sided] or [2-

sided].

If you select [2-sided], press [Detail] (the Right

Select key), select the binding edge and press the
OK key, and then select the original setting
orientation on the next screen.

7 Press the OK key.

Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to

the basic screen for sending.

8 Specify the destination, and press the Start key to

start sending.
5

5-9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Sending Functions

Original Orientation
To send the document in the orientation that can be read properly, specify the upper orientation of original. To
use the functions below, select the orientation in which the original is set on the platen.

• 1-sided / 2-sided Selection

When placing the original on the platen

[Top Edge Top] [Top Edge Left]

When placing the original on the document processor

[Top Edge Top] [Top Edge Left]

Use the procedure below to select the orientation when placing the originals on the platen for sending.

1 Press the Send key.

2 Place the originals on the platen or in the

document processor.

3 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu

Function Menu: a b appears.
1 Color Selection g
*********************
2 Original Size T
3 Original Image T
[ Exit ]

4 Press the  or  key to select [Orig.Orientation].

5-10

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Sending Functions

5 Press the OK key. Orig.Orientation appears.

Orig.Orientation: a b
1 c Top Edge Top
2 *d Top Edge Left
*********************

6 Press the  or  key to select [Top Edge Top] or

[Top Edge Left].

7 Press the OK key.

Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to

the basic screen for sending. 5
8 Specify the destination, and press the Start key to
start sending.

5-11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Sending Functions

File Format
Select the file format of the image to send.

Part that is operated

The table below lists the file formats and their details.

Adjustable range of image

File Format Color mode
quality

PDF Auto(Color/Gray), Auto(Color/ 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to

B&W), Full Color, Grayscale 5 High Quality (Low Comp.)

Black and White -

PDF/A-1a Auto(Color/Gray), Auto(Color/ 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to

B&W), Full Color, Grayscale 5 High Quality (Low Comp.)

Black and White -

PDF/A-1b Auto(Color/Gray), Auto(Color/ 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to

B&W), Full Color, Grayscale 5 High Quality (Low Comp.)

Black and White -

TIFF Auto(Color/Gray), Auto(Color/ 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to

B&W), Full Color, Grayscale 5 High Quality (Low Comp.)

Black and White -

XPS Auto(Color/Gray), Full Color, 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to

Grayscale 5 High Quality (Low Comp.)

JPEG Auto(Color/Gray), Full Color, 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to

Grayscale 5 High Quality (Low Comp.)

High Comp. Auto(Color/Gray), Auto(Color/ Comp. Priority, Standard,

PDF B&W), Full Color, Grayscale Quality Priority

Black and White -

NOTE: You cannot select [JPEG] if [Black and White] is selected for the color mode.

5-12

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Sending Functions

Use the procedure below to select the file format for transmission.

1 Press the Send key.

2 Place the originals on the platen or in the

document processor.

3 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu

Function Menu: a b appears.
1 Color Selection g
*********************
2 Original Size T
3 Original Image T
[ Exit ]
5
4 Press the  or  key to select [File Format].

5 Press the OK key. File Format appears.

File Format: a b
1
*********************
*PDF
2 TIFF
3 XPS
[ Detail ]

6 Press the  or  key to select the file format from

[PDF], [TIFF], [XPS], [JPEG] or [High Comp. PDF].

[Details] (the Right Select key) can be pressed to

select the PDF/A file format. If full color or
grayscale is selected for the scanning color mode,
press [Details] (the Right Select key) to select the
image quality.

7 Press the OK key.

Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to

the basic screen for sending.

8 Specify the destination, and press the Start key to

start sending.

5-13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Sending Functions

File Separation
Create several files by dividing scanned original data page by page, and send the files.

Use the procedure below to split scanned original data into separate files when sending scanned originals.

1 Press the Send key.

2 Place the originals on the platen or in the

document processor.

3 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu

Function Menu: a b appears.
1 g
*********************
Color Selection
2 Original Size T
3 Original Image T
[ Exit ]

4 Press the  or  key to select [File Separation].

5 Press the OK key. File Separation appears.

File Separation: a b
1
*********************
*Off
2 Each Page

6 Press the  or  key to select [Each Page].

7 Press the OK key.

Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to

the basic screen for sending.

8 Specify the destination, and press the Start key to

start sending. The scanned originals are sent in
files of one page each.

NOTE: Three-digit serial number such as

abc_001.pdf, abc_002.pdf... is attached to the end of
the file name.

5-14

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Sending Functions

Original Image
Select image quality suitable to the type of original.

The table below shows the quality options.

Item Detail

Text+Photo Text and photos together.

Photo For photos taken with a camera.

Text Only text, no photos.

OCR For documents to be read by OCR. 5

Use the procedure below to select the quality when sending scanned originals.

1 Press the Send key.

2 Place the originals on the platen or in the

document processor.

3 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu

Function Menu: a b appears.
1 g
*********************
Color Selection
2 Original Size T
3 Original Image T
[ Exit ]

4 Press the  or  key to select [Original Image].

5 Press the OK key. Original Image appears.

Original Image: a b
1
*********************
*Text+Photo
2 Photo
3 Text

6 Press the  or  key to select the desired image

quality.

7 Press the OK key.

Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to

the basic screen for sending.

8 Specify the destination, and press the Start key to

start sending.

5-15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Sending Functions

Adjusting Density
Use the procedure below to adjust the density when scanning the originals.

Part that is operated

The procedure for adjusting the density is explained below.

1 Press the Send key.

2 Place the originals on the platen or in the

document processor.

3 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu

Function Menu: a b appears.
1 Color Selection g
*********************
2 Original Size T
3 Original Image T
[ Exit ]

4 Press the  or  key to select [Density].

5 Press the OK key. Density appears.

Density: a b
4 w Lighter -1
5 y Normal 0
*********************
6 z Darker +1

6 Press the  or  key to select your desired

density.

7 Press the OK key.

Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to

the basic screen for sending.

8 Specify the destination, and press the Start key to

start sending.

5-16

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Sending Functions

Scan Resolution
Select the fineness of scanning resolution. The finer the scanning becomes (the larger the number becomes),
the better the image quality becomes. However, better resolution also results in larger file size (file capacity)
and longer scanning and sending times. The selectable resolution is 200x100dpi Normal, 200x200dpi Fine,
200x400dpi Super Fine, 300x300dpi, 400x400dpi Ultra Fine, or 600x600dpi.

Part that is operated

The procedure for adjusting the scanning resolution when sending a scanned image is explained below.

1 Press the Send key.

2 Place the originals on the platen or in the

document processor.

3 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu

Function Menu: a b appears.
1 g
*********************
Color Selection
2 Original Size T
3 Original Image T
[ Exit ]

4 Press the  or  key to select [Scan Resolution].

5 Press the OK key. Scan Resolution appears.

Scan Resolution: a b
3 200x400dpi S.Fin
4
*********************
*300x300dpi
5 400x400dpi U.Fin

6 Press the  or  key to select the desired scan

resolution.

7 Press the OK key.

Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the basic screen for sending.

8 Specify the destination, and press the Start key to

start sending.

5-17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Sending Functions

Color / Grayscale / Black and White Selection

This feature allows you to select the select the color mode used for scanning when sending images. You can
select from Auto(Color/Gray), Auto(Color/B&W), Full Color, Grayscale or Black & White.

Use the procedure below to select the color mode when sending scanned images.

1 Press the Send key.

2 Place the originals on the platen or in the

document processor.

3 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu

Function Menu: a b appears.
1 Color Selection g
*********************
2 Original Size T
3 Original Image T
[ Exit ]

4 Press the  or  key to select [Color Selection].

5 Press the OK key. Color Selection appears.

Color Selection: a b
1
*********************
*Auto(Color/Gray)
2 Auto(Color/B&W)
3 Full Color

6 Press the  or  key to select the desired color

mode.

7 Press the OK key.

Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to

the basic screen for sending.

8 Specify the destination, and press the Start key to

start sending.

5-18

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Sending Functions

Continuous Scan
When the multi-page originals cannot be placed in the document processor at one time, the originals can be
scanned in separate batches and then sent as one job. With this function, originals can be scanned one after
another until you press [End Scan] (the Right Select key).

The procedure for using continuous scanning when sending scanned images is explained below.

1 Press the Send key.

2 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu

Function Menu: a b appears.
1 Color Selection g
*********************
2 Original Size T
3 Original Image T 5
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Continuous Scan].

4 Press the OK key. Continuous Scan appears.

Continuous Scan: a b
1
*********************
*Off
2 On

5 Press the  or  key to select [On] and then press

the OK key.

Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to

the basic screen for sending.

6 Specify the destination.

7 Place the original, and press the Start key.

8 Place the next original, and press the Start key.

Scan the remaining originals by the same
procedure.

When you have scanned all the originals, press

[End Scan] (the Right Select key) to start sending.

5-19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Sending Functions

File Name Entry

This setting allows you to assign a document name to scanned images. You can specify a default for the
document name.

Use the procedure below to assign names to scanned documents that you are sending.

1 Press the Send key.

2 Place the originals on the platen or in the

document processor.

3 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu

Function Menu: a b appears.
1 Color Selection g
*********************
2 Original Size T
3 Original Image T
[ Exit ]

4 Press the  or  key to select [File Name Entry].

5 Press the OK key. File Name Entry appears.

File Name Entry: A b
File_2010*
S
ABC
[ Text ]

6 Enter the file name, press the OK key. Additional

Info. appears.

NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on

Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.

7 Enter the date, job number, etc. on the screen, and

then press the OK key.

NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on

Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.

Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to

the basic screen for sending.

8 Specify the destination, and press the Start key to

start sending.

5-20

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Sending Functions

Subject and Body Entry

When sending E-mail, enter the subject and body of the E-mail.

Use the procedure below to enter the subject and body for an E-mail message and then send the E-mail.

NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.

1 Press the Send key.

2 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu

Function Menu: a b appears.
1 Color Selection g
*********************
2 Original Size T
5
3 Original Image T
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Subject/Body].

4 Press the OK key. Subject Entry appears.

Subject Entry: B b
*

ABC
[ Text ]

5 Enter the subject and press the OK key.

NOTE: Up to 60 characters can be entered for the

subject.

6 Enter the body and press the OK key.

Body Entry: B b
*
NOTE: Up to 500 characters can be entered for the
body.
ABC
[ Text ]
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the basic screen for sending.

7 Specify the destination, and press the Start key to

start sending.

5-21

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Sending Functions

Sharpness
Adjust the sharpness of image outlines. When scanning penciled originals with rough or broken lines, clear
scanning data can be taken by adjusting sharpness toward [Sharpen]. When scanning images made up of
patterned dots such as magazine photos, in which moire* patterns appear, edge softening and weakening of
the moire effect can be obtained by setting the sharpness toward [Unsharpen].

* Patterns that are created by irregular distribution of halftone dots.

Refer to the sample image in Appendix-24.

Follow the steps below to adjust sharpness.

1 Press the Send key.

2 Place the originals on the platen or in the

document processor.

3 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu

Function Menu: a b appears.
1 Color Selection g
*********************
2 Original Size T
3 Original Image T
[ Exit ]

4 Press the  or  key to select [Sharpness].

5 Press the OK key. Sharpness appears.

Sharpness: a b
1
*********************
*-3(Unsharpen)
2 -2
3 -1

6 Press the  or  key to adjust the sharpness. A

larger negative value decreases the sharpness,
and a larger positive value increases the
sharpness.

7 Press the OK key.

Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to

the basic screen for sending.

8 Specify the destination, and press the Start key to

start sending.

5-22

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Sending Functions

Background Density
Removes dark background from originals, such as newspapers.

If the ground color is obtrusive, select [Auto]. If [Auto] does not remove the ground color, select [Manual] and
adjust the density of the ground color.

NOTE: This feature is used with full color and auto color copying. Background Density Adjust is disabled
during auto color sending when the a black & white original has been detected.

Original Scanning Image

The setting items are as follows.

Item Description

Off Does not adjust the ground color.

Auto Automatically adjusts the background density
based on the original.
Manual Manually adjust the density in 5 levels. When
[Manual] is selected, press [1 (Lighter)] to
[5 (Darker)] to adjust the background density.

Follow the steps below to use background density adjust.

1 Press the Send key.

2 Place the originals on the platen or in the

document processor.

3 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu

Function Menu: a b appears.
1 Color Selection g
*********************
2 Original Size T
3 Original Image T
[ Exit ]

4 Press the  or  key to select [Backgrnd Density].

5-23

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Sending Functions

5 Press the OK key. Backgrnd Density appears.

Backgrnd Density: a b
1
*********************
*Off
2 Auto
3 Manual

6 Press the  or  key to select [Off], [Auto] or

[Manual].

7 Press the OK key.

Manual: a b
3 3 When [Manual] is selected, Manual appears.
4 4 Press the  or  key to select [1 (Lighter)] to
[5 (Darker)] and then press the OK key.
5 *5 (Darker)
*********************
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the basic screen for copying.

8 Specify the destination, and press the Start key to

start sending.

5-24

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Sending Functions

WSD Scan
WSD Scan saves images of originals scanned on this machine as files on a WSD-compatible computer.

NOTE: For information on operating the computer, refer to the operating system help for your computer.
To use WSD Scan, WSD Scan Setup (page 8-178) must be set to [On] in the network settings.

Installing the driver

1 Select Start button of the Windows display, and
then Network.

2 Select the machine displayed Multifunctional

Devices, and then right-click Install. 5
Installing of the driver starts.

3 After installing the driver, click Close.

Procedure using this machine

1 Press the Send key.

2 Place the originals on the platen or in the

document processor.

Displays the screen for sending.

NOTE: Depending on the settings, the address book

screen may appear. In this event, press [Cancel] to
display the screen for sending.

3 Press the  or  key to select [WSD Scan].

Send to: a b
2 G Folder(SMB)
3 H Folder(FTP)
4 P WSD Scan
*********************

4 Press the OK key. WSD Scan appears.

WSD Scan: a b
1 From Computer
2
*********************
From Oper. Panel

[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [From Oper. Panel].

5-25

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Sending Functions

6 Select the destination computer from the computer

Select Computer: a b list.
P
*********************
Computer01
P Computer02 Press [Detail] (the Right Select key) to see the
information of the selected computer.
P Computer03
[ Cancel ] [ Detail ]

7 Press the OK key to confirm the destination, and

Press Start Key. then press the Start key. Transmission starts.

P :Computer01
NOTE: To change the destination computer, press the
Back key and then press [Yes] (the Left Select key).
This brings you back to step 6.

NOTE: To use WSD Scan from your computer, press

[From Computer] in step 5 and then scan the original
from the computer.

5-26

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Sending Functions

Job Finish Notice

This feature sends an e-mail providing notification that transmission has been completed.

Use the procedure below to specify the Job Finish Notice settings.

1 Press the Send key.

2 Place the originals on the platen or in the

document processor.

3 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu

Function Menu: a b appears.
1 g
*********************
Color Selection
2 Original Size T 5
3 Original Image T
[ Exit ]

4 Press the  or  key to select [JobFinish Notice].

5 Press the OK key. JobFinish Notice appears.

JobFinish Notice: a b
1
*********************
*Off
2 On

6 Press the  or  key to select [On] and then press

the OK key.

7 Press the  or  key to select [Address Book] or

Destination: a b [Address Entry], and then press the OK key.
1
*********************
*Address Book
2 Address Entry

8 If you select [Address Book], select [Address

Address Book: a b Book] on the next screen and press the OK key,
p
*********************
Fiala and then select the notice destination.
p Maury
Press [Menu] (the Right Select key), select
p Morgan
[Detail] on the next screen and press the OK key to
[ Menu ] view the details of the selected notice destination.

5-27

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Sending Functions

If you select [Address Entry], enter the address of

Address Entry: A b the notice destination.
******@abcdefg.jp*
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on
ABC Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
[ Text ]

9 Press the OK key.

Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to

the basic screen for sending.

10 Specify the destination, and press the Start key to

start sending.

When the sending is completed, the finish notice is

sent to the specified E-mail address.

5-28

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Sending Functions

FTP Encrypted TX
This allows you to encrypt documents when you send them. If you select [On] in this option, you can then select
the encryption method in the basic send screen.

Use the procedure below to scan and send originals as encrypted files.

1 Press the Send key.

2 Place the originals in the document processor or

on the platen.

3 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu

Function Menu: a b appears.
1 Color Selection g
********************* 5
2 Original Size T
3 Original Image T
[ Exit ]

4 Press the  or  key to select [FTP Encrypted

TX].

5 Press the OK key. FTP Encrypted TX appears.

FTP Encrypted TX: a b
1
*********************
*Off
2 On

6 Press the  or  key to select [On] and then press

the OK key.

Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to

the basic screen for sending.

NOTE: Click Security Settings -> Network Security in the Command Center RX. Be sure that SSL of
Secure Protocol Settings is On and more than two effective encryptions are selected in Clientside Settings.
For details, refer to the Command Center RX User Guide.

5-29

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Sending Functions

Scanning Image using Application

Be sure that you connect your PC with the machine using the USB cable or Network cable and install the
Kyocera TWAIN or WIA Driver. The scan can be carried out from any TWAIN or WIA compatible application
program. For details of installation for TWAIN or WIA driver, refer to Setting TWAIN Driver on page 2-33 or
Setting the WIA Driver (Windows Vista™, Windows® Server 2008 and Windows 7) on page 2-34.

The following procedure is an example for scan operation using the TWAIN Driver. Operate the WIA Drivers in
the same manner.

1 Connect the machine to a PC via a network.

NOTE: For WIA, in addition to connection via a

network, the machine can also be connected to a PC
by USB cable.

2 Place the originals in the document processor or

on the platen.

3 Use the TWAIN-compatible application to scan

from your computer.

NOTE: When the Login User Name and Login

Password entry screen appears, enter them and click
the OK button.

4 Choose the appropriate settings and click Scan.

The scanned data will be sent to your computer.

5-30

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 6 Document Box

This chapter explains the typical procedure for utilizing Document Box.

• Printing Documents Stored in USB Memory................. 6-2

• Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB) ..... 6-5
• Removing USB Memory ............................................... 6-7
• Printing from a Custom Box.......................................... 6-8
• Printing from a Job Box .............................................. 6-16

6-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Document Box

Printing Documents Stored in USB Memory

Plugging USB memory directly into the machine enables you to quickly and easily print the files stored in the
USB memory without having to use a computer.

Limitations
• The following file types can be printed:
• PDF file (Version 1.7)
• TIFF file (TIFF V6/TTN2 format)
• JPEG file
• XPS file
• PDF files you wish to print should have an extension (.pdf).
• Files to be printed should be saved no further down than the top 3 folder levels.
• Plug the USB memory directly into the USB memory slot. We do not guarantee that USB memory printing is
error free if a USB hub is used.

Printing
Print documents stored in the removable USB memory.

1 Plug the USB memory into the USB memory slot.

2 Press the Document Box key. The Document Box

Document Box: a b menu appears.
1
*********************
Custom Box
2 Sub Address Box
3 Polling Box

3 Press the  or  key to select [USB Memory].

4 Press the OK key. USB Memory appears.

USB Memory: a b
N
*********************
Store File
i Folder-1
j File-1 T
[ Menu ] [ Select ]

6-2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Document Box

5 Press the  or  key to select the file you want to

print.

Select a folder and press the OK key to view the

files in the folder. Documents in the top 3 folder
levels including the root directory can be viewed.

6 Press [Select] (the Right Select key). The

USB Memory: a b selected file name is indicated by a checkmark
N Store File next to it.
i Folder-1
j g
*********************
File-1
[ Menu ] [ Select ]

When you want to print additional files, repeat

steps 5 to 6 to select them.

7 Press the OK key. A menu appears.

6
USB Memory: a b
1
*********************
Print
2 Delete

8 Press the  or  key to select [Print].

9 Press the OK key. The basic screen appears.

Ready to print. Change the number of copies, 1-sided/2-sided
Copies: 1 printing, etc., as necessary. For changing print
sA A4a settings, refer to Copying on page 3-7 and
1-sided Copying Functions on page 4-1.
[ Duplex ] [ Paper ]

10 Press the Start key. Printing of the selected file

begins.

JPEG/TIFF Print
Sets the print mode for JPEG/TIFF files. The default setting is [Paper Size].

1 Follow steps 1 to 8 of Printing on page 6-2.

2 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu

Function Menu: a b appears.
1 g
*********************
Collate
2 Paper Selection T
3 Duplex T
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [JPEG/TIFF Print].

6-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Document Box

4 Press the OK key. JPEG/TIFF Print appears.

JPEG/TIFF Print: a b
1 g
*********************
*Paper Size
2 Image Resolution T
3 Print Resolution T

5 Press the  or  key to select the desire print

mode.

The print modes are as follows:

Paper Size (scaled to fit the paper size)
Image Resolution (matched to the image
resolution)
Print Resolution (matched to the print resolution)

6 Press the OK key.

Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to

the basic screen.

XPS FitTo Page

If you select [On] in this setting, XPS data is scaled to fit the paper size during printing. If you select [Off], the
data is printed at its original size.

1 Follow steps 1 to 8 of Printing on page 6-2.

2 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu

Function Menu: a b appears.
1 g
*********************
Collate
2 Paper Selection T
3 Duplex T
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [XPS FitTo Page].

4 Press the OK key. XPS FitTo Page appears.

XPS FitTo Page: a b
1
*********************
*Off
2 On

5 Press the  or  key to select [Off] or [On].

6 Press the OK key.

Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to

the basic screen.

6-4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Document Box

Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB)

This function allows you to store scanned image files in USB memory connected to the machine. You can store
files in PDF, TIFF, JPEG or XPS format.

NOTE: The maximum number of the storable files is 1,000.

Storing Documents
The procedure for storing documents in removable USB memory is explained below.

1 Plug the USB memory into the USB memory slot .

2 Press the Document Box key. The Document Box

Document Box: a b menu appears.
1
*********************
Custom Box
2 Sub Address Box
3 Polling Box

3 Press the  or  key to select [USB Memory].

4 Press the OK key. USB Memory appears.

USB Memory: a b
N
*********************
Store File
i Folder-1
j File-1 T
[ Menu ] [ Select ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [Store File].

NOTE: To save the data in the folder of USB memory,

press the  or  key to select the folder, and then
press [Select] (the Right Select key). The machine will
display documents in the top 3 folder levels, including
the root folder.

6-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Document Box

6 Press the OK key. The basic screen appears.

Ready to scan. Change the original type, file format, etc., as
necessary. For changing scan settings, refer to
A4q Sending Functions on page 5-1.
1-sided 300x300dpi
[2-sided ] [ScanRes.]

7 Press the Start key. The original is scanned and

the data is stored in the USB memory.

IMPORTANT: When removing the USB memory,

ensure that you use the correct removal procedure, as
described in Removing USB Memory on page 6-7.

6-6

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Document Box

Removing USB Memory

Remove the USB memory.

IMPORTANT: Be sure to follow the proper procedure to avoid damaging the data or USB memory.

1 Press the Document Box key. The Document Box

Document Box: a b menu appears.
1
*********************
Custom Box
2 Sub Address Box
3 Polling Box

2 Press the  or  key to select [USB Memory].

3 Press the OK key. USB Memory appears. 6

USB Memory: a b
N
*********************
Store File
i Folder-1
j File-1 T
[ Menu ] [ Select ]

4 Press [Menu] (the Left Select key). A menu

Menu: a b appears.
1 Memory Detail
2 Remove Memory
NOTE: This is the image on the screen when a folder
is selected. [Open] is not displayed when a file is
selected.

5 Press the  or  key to select [Remove Memory].

6 Press the OK key. A confirmation message

USB memory can be appears.
safely removed.

[ OK ]

7 Press [OK] (the Right Select key) or remove the

USB memory. The screen returns to the Document
Box menu.

6-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Document Box

Printing from a Custom Box

Custom Box is a component box which you can create within the Document Box and store data for later
retrieval.

IMPORTANT: To use a Custom Box, an optional SSD must be installed in the machine. The SSD must be
formatted from the machine. For more information, refer to Format SSD on page 8-64.

NOTE: To create a Custom Box, refer to Custom Box creation on page 8-86.
The setting of Custom Boxes is also possible from Command Center RX. For more information, refer to the
Command Center RX User Guide.

Custom Box display

1 Press the Document Box key. The Document Box
Document Box: a b menu appears.
1
*********************
Custom Box
2 Sub Address Box
3 Polling Box

2 Press the  or  key to select [Custom Box].

3 Press the OK key. The Custom Box menu

Custom Box: a b appears.
*********************
0001x Dandoko
0002x DANDOKO box
0003x DBox
[ Menu ]

Sorting the Custom Box list

When user login administration is enabled, it is possible to sort the list display into either Box Number order or
Box Owner order.
1 In the Custom Box list screen, press [Menu] (the
Menu: a b Left Select key). The Menu screen appears.
1
*********************
Open
2 Detail
3 Sort(No.)

2 Press the  or  key to select [Sort(No.)] or

[Sort(Name)].

3 Press the OK key. The Menu screen reappears.

6-8

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Document Box

Searching Custom Boxes

It is possible to search for a Custom Box using either the Box number or Box name.
1 In the Custom Box list screen, press [Menu] (the
Menu: a b Left Select key). The Menu screen appears.
1
*********************
Open
2 Detail
3 Sort(No.)

2 Press the  or  key to select [Search(No.)] or

[Search(Name)].

3 Press the OK key. The Search(No.) screen or the

Search(No.): a b Search(Name) screen appears.
(0001 - 1000)
********
0001 6

Searching is possible using the methods below:

• Searching with Box numbers...6-9

• Searching with Box names...6-10

Searching with Box numbers

1 In the Custom Box list screen, press [Menu] (the
Menu: a b Left Select key). The Menu screen appears.
1
*********************
Open
2 Detail
3 Sort(No.)

2 Press the  or  key to select [Search(No.)].

3 Press the OK key. The Search(No.) screen

Search(No.): a b appears.
(0001 - 1000)
********
0001

4 Enter the Box number to be found and press OK

key. A search is done for the Box number entered.

6-9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Document Box

Searching with Box names

1 In the Custom Box list screen, press [Menu] (the
Menu: a b Left Select key). The Menu screen appears.
1
*********************
Open
2 Detail
3 Sort(No.)

2 Press the  or  key to select [Search(Name)].

3 Press the OK key. The Search(Name) screen

Search(Name): a b appears.
Box*
S
ABC
[ Text ]

4 Enter the Box name to be found and press OK key.

A search is done for the Box name entered.

File operations (Printing, deleting and moving files)

It is possible to print files stored in a Custom Box, to delete them or to move them to a different Custom Box.

The following operations are possible:

• Box number/Box name (Select a File)...6-11

• Select/Deselect All Files...6-11
• Print a File...6-12
• Print a File (Changes to the print settings)...6-12
• Delete a File...6-14
• Moving files...6-14
• Check File Details...6-15
1 In the Custom Box list screen, press  or  key to
Custom Box: a b select a Custom Box.
*********************
0001x Dandoko
0002x DANDOKO box
0003x DBox
[ Menu ]

2 Press the OK key. The machine displays a list of

x 0001 Dandoko: a b files stored in the Custom Box.
j T
*********************
AAAA
j BBBB T
NOTE: If the screen for entering a password is
j CCCC T displayed then enter the password using the numeric
[ Menu ] [ Select ] keys and then press the OK key.

6-10

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Document Box

Box number/Box name (Select a File)

To print/delete a file in the Custom Box, first select the file to be printed or deleted.

1 Press  or  key to select the file to be printed/

deleted.

2 When [Select] (the Right Select key) is pressed,

x 0001 Dandoko: a b the file is selected.
j g
*********************
AAAA
j BBBB T A checkmark will be placed on the right of the
selected file.
j CCCC T
[ Menu ] [ Select ] Select the checkmarked file and press [Select] (the
Right Select key) again to cancel the selection.

NOTE: To select all files, follow the steps of Select/

Deselect All Files on page 6-11. 6
Select/Deselect All Files

All files in the Custom Box are selected.

1 Press [Menu] (the Left Select key). The Menu

x 0001 Dandoko: a b screen appears.
j T
*********************
AAAA
j BBBB T
j CCCC T
[ Menu ] [ Select ]

2 In the Custom Box list screen, press the  or 

Menu: a b key to select [Select All] and then press the OK
1
*********************
Select All key.
2 Clear All
3 Search(Name)

When there is a file not checked in the Custom

x 0001 Dandoko: a b Box, all files will be checkmarked.
j g
*********************
AAAA
j BBBB g Select the checkmarked file and press [Select] (the
Right Select key) again to cancel the selection.
j CCCC g
[ Menu ] [ Select ]
NOTE: When [Clear All] is selected, the checkmarks
are all removed.

6-11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Document Box

Print a File

Print the file(s) selected in the Custom Box.

1 In the file list screen, select the item and press the
x 0001 Dandoko: a b OK key. The Print/Delete menu screen appears.
1
*********************
Print
2 Print(ChangeSet)
3 Delete

2 Press the  or  key to select [Print].

3 Press the OK key. The Copies menu screen

Ready to print. appears.
Copies: 1
If you want to change the number of remaining
copies to be printed, use the numeric keys or press
the  or  key to set the number of copies to be
printed.

NOTE: If Job Accounting is enabled, enter the

account ID in the login screen that appears. The
Copies menu screen appears after login.

4 Press the Start key. The message Accepted.

Accepted. appears and printing begins. When [On] is
selected in the Del. afterPrint (Setting for file
Job No. : 9999 deletion after printing) on page 8-94, the selected
file will be deleted from the Custom Box after it is
printed.

Print a File (Changes to the print settings)

To change the print settings for a file selected in a Custom Box and print it.

1 In the file list screen, select the item and press the
x 0001 Dandoko: a b OK key. The Print/Delete menu screen appears.
1
*********************
Print
2 Print(ChangeSet)
3 Delete

2 Press the  or  key to select [Print(ChangeSet)].

6-12

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Document Box

3 Press the OK key. The Copies menu screen

Ready to print. appears.
Copies: 1
sA A4a If you want to change the number of remaining copies
to be printed, use the numeric keys or press the  or
1-sided  key to set the number of copies to be printed.
[ Duplex ] [ Paper ]
Change the number of copies, 1-sided/2-sided
printing, etc., as necessary. For changing print
settings, refer to Copying on page 3-7 and
Copying Functions on page 4-1.

NOTE: If Job Accounting is enabled, enter the

account ID in the login screen that appears. The
Copies menu screen appears after login.

4 Press the Start key. The message Accepted. 6

Accepted. appears and printing begins. When [On] is selected
in the Del. afterPrint (Setting for file deletion after
Job No. : 9999 printing) on page 8-94, the selected file will be
deleted from the Custom Box after it is printed.

Del. after Print (Delete data after printing setting)

Use this setting to specify whether or not the file data is deleted after printing.

1 Follow steps 1 to 3 of Print a File (Changes to the

print settings) on page 6-12.

2 Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu

Function Menu: a b appears.
1 g
*********************
Collate
2 Paper Selection T
3 Duplex T
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Del. After Print].

4 Press the OK key. Del. After Print appears.

Del. after Print: a b
1 g
*********************
*Off
2 On

5 Press the  or  key to select [Off] or [On].

6 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Function Menu screen.

6-13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Document Box

Delete a File

Delete the file(s) selected in the Custom Box.

1 In the file list screen, select the item and press the
x 0001 Dandoko: a b OK key. The Print/Delete menu screen appears.
1
*********************
Print
2 Print(ChangeSet)
3 Delete

2 Press the  or  key to select [Delete].

3 Press the OK key. A confirmation message

Delete. appears.
Are you sure?

[ Yes ] [ No ]

4 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The message

Completed. appears and the selected file(s) are
deleted.

Pressing [No] (the Right Select key) returns to the

file list menu screen without deleting the file.

Moving files

A file can be moved to a different Custom Box.

1 In the file list screen, select the item and press the
x 0001 Dandoko: a b OK key. The Print/Delete menu screen appears.
1
*********************
Print
2 Print(ChangeSet)
3 Delete

2 Press the  or  key to select [Move].

3 Press the OK key. The Custom Box list appears.

Custom Box: a b
*********************
0001x Dandoko
0002x DANDOKO box
0003x DBox

4 Press the  or  key to select the destination Box.

6-14

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Document Box

5 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the file list.

NOTE: If the screen for entering a password is

displayed then enter the password using the numeric
keys and then press the OK key.

Check File Details

Details for the file that is selected with the cursor will appear.

1 In the file list screen, press [Menu] (the Left Select

key).

2 Press the  or  key to select [Detail].

Menu: a b
1
*********************
Select All 6
2 Clear All
3 Search(Name)

3 Press the OK key. Details for the file that is

Detail: C b selected with the cursor appears.
File Name 1/5
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTN The details for the file cover 5 pages in all. Press
the  key to view to the next page or the  key to
return to the previous page.
[ Detail ]

In the File Name screen, if the file name is

Detail: D b abbreviated because it cannot be displayed on one
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTU line, press [Detail] (the Right Select key) to
VWXYZ.txt change the display to three lines.

6-15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Document Box

Printing from a Job Box

When RAM Disk Mode is enabled, you can use a Job Box to print.
Job Box is a function that stores print data on the set RAM disk in the machine, enabling the data to be printed
as needed from the operation panel of the machine.
If an ID (4-digit number) is set when printing is executed from the computer, the data can be kept more
confidential. When an ID is set, the ID must be entered in order to print the stored data from the machine.
For the RAM disk settings, see RAM Disk Mode on page 8-63.

Private Print
Private Print is used to allow printing only after the same 4-digit ID that was entered in the printer driver at the
time of printing is entered at the operation panel. The data is erased after printing.

For information on Private Print, see Help in the printer driver.

The procedure for printing stored data is explained below.

1 Press the Document Box key. The Document Box

Document Box: a b menu appears.
1
*********************
Custom Box
2 Sub Address Box
3 Polling Box

2 Press the  or  key to select [Job Box].

3 Press the OK key. The Job Box menu appears.

Job Box: a b
1
*********************
Private Print
2 Quick Copy

4 Press the  or  key to select [Private Print].

5 Press the OK key. The user selection menu

Private Print: a b appears.
l
*********************
Fiala
l Maury

6 Press the  or  key to select the user.

6-16

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Document Box

7 Press the OK key. The print file selection menu

l Fiala: a b appears.
o
*********************
Data01
o Data02
o Data03
[ Menu ] [ Select ]

8 Press the  or  key to select the file to be

printed, and then press [Select] (the Right Select
key). The selected file will be marked.

If you need to add another file, repeat this

procedure to select the file.

NOTE: To select all files, press Menu (the Left Select

Menu: a b key) and select [Select All]. To deselect all files, select
1
*********************
Select All [Clear All]. To show file details, select [Detail]. 6
2 Clear All
3 Detail

9 Press the OK key. The file print and delete

Fiala: a b selection menu appears.
1
*********************
Print
2 Delete

10 Press the  or  key to select [Print] and press

the OK key.

NOTE: To delete the selected file without printing it,

select [Delete] and press the OK key. The file deletion
confirmation screen appears. Press [Yes] (the Left
Select key). Completed. appears and the file is
deleted.

11 The ID entry screen appears. Enter the ID and

Fiala: b press the OK key.

*********************
1216S

6-17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Document Box

12 The number of copies screen appears. Set the

Copies: a b number of copies and press the OK key.
(1 - 999,---)
********
--- copies

13 The file print confirmation screen appears. Press

[Yes] (the Left Select key). Accepted appears and
printing begins.

Quick Copy mode

This mode is used to print an additional copy of a document that has already been printed. If a document is
printed with Quick Copy selected in the printer driver, the document will be simultaneously stored on the SSD.
The required number of copies can be printed whenever needed from the operation panel. If more documents
than the set maximum are stored, the oldest job will be overwritten each time a new job is stored. When the
machine power is turned off, jobs stored in this mode are erased. For the number of documents that can be
stored in Quick Copy mode, see Quick Copy Jobs on page 8-97.

1 Press the Document Box key. The Document Box

Document Box: a b menu appears.
1
*********************
Custom Box
2 Sub Address Box
3 Polling Box

2 Press the  or  key to select [Job Box].

3 Press the OK key. The Job Box menu appears.

Job Box: a b
1
*********************
Private Print
2 Quick Copy

4 Press the or  key to select [Quick Copy].

5 Press the OK key. The user selection menu

Quick Copy: a b appears.
l
*********************
Fiala
l Maury

6 Press the  or  key to select the user.

6-18

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Document Box

7 Press the OK key. The print file selection menu

l Fiala: a b appears.
o
*********************
Data01
o Data02
o Data03
[ Menu ] [ Select ]

8 Press the  or  key to select the file to be

printed, and then press [Select] (the Right Select
key). The selected file will be marked.

If you need to add another file, repeat this

procedure to select the file.

NOTE: To select all files, press Menu (the Left Select

Menu: a b key) and select [Select All]. To deselect all files, select
1
*********************
Select All [Clear All]. To show file details, select [Detail]. 6
2 Clear All
3 Detail

9 Press the OK key. The file print and delete

Fiala: a b selection menu appears.
1
*********************
Print
2 Delete

10 Press the  or  key to select [Print] and press

the OK key.

NOTE: To delete the selected file without printing it,

select [Delete] and press the OK key. The file deletion
confirmation screen appears. Press [Yes] (the Left
Select key). Completed. appears and the file is
deleted.

11 The number of copies screen appears. Set the

Copies: M b number of copies and press the OK key.
(1 - 999,---)
********
--- copies

12 The file print confirmation screen appears. Press

[Yes] (the Left Select key). Accepted appears and
printing begins.

6-19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Document Box

6-20

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 7 Status / Job Cancel

This chapter explains how to check the status and history of jobs and cancel the jobs being
processed or waiting to be printed.

• Checking Job Status..................................................... 7-2

• Checking Job History.................................................... 7-8
• Sending the Job Log History ...................................... 7-13
• Pause and Resumption of Jobs.................................. 7-19
• Canceling of Jobs ....................................................... 7-19
• Device/Communication............................................... 7-20

7-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Status / Job Cancel

Checking Job Status

Check the status of jobs being processed or waiting to be printed.

Available Status Screens

The processing and waiting statuses of jobs are displayed as a list on the Message Display in four different
screens - Print Job, Send Job, Store Job, and Scheduled Job. The following job statuses are available.

Screen Job statuses to be displayed

Print Job • Copy

• Printer
• FAX reception
• Document Box
• E-mail reception
• Job Report /List
• Printing data from removable memory
Send Job • FAX transmission
• PC (SMB/FTP) transmission
• E-mail
• Application
• Multiple destination
• Sending Job FAX using Delayed
transmission
Store Job • Scan
• FAX
Scheduled Job • FAX

Print Job Status Screen

1 Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status
Status: a b menu appears.
1
*********************
Print Job Status
2 Send Job Status
3 Store Job Status
[ Pause ]

2 Press the  or  key to select [Print Job Status].

3 Press the OK key. Print Job Status appears. Press

Print Job Status: a b the  or  key to check the print queue.
0008 Copy r
0009 maury’s data
0010 W aaaa
[ Pause ] [ Menu ]

1 2 3 4

7-2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Status / Job Cancel

Press the OK key to check detailed information of

0009 Detail: C b the selected job.
Status: 1/9
Processing
NOTE: You can also check the job information by
pressing [Menu] (the Right Select key) and selecting
[Detail] in the menu that appears.

Press the  or  key to switch the display to other

information items. The items displayed are as
follows:

Status (status of job)

Accepted Time
Job Name
Job Type
User Name
Page and Copy
(number of pages and copies to be printed)
Original Page (number of pages of the original)
Color Mode 7
When complete job name not displayed in detailed information
When the job name in Job Name is displayed in a short form, press [Detail] (the Right Select key) to see the
complete job name. Press the OK key to return to the original screen.

The table below lists the items displayed in the Printing Jobs Status screen.

No. Item / Key Detail

1 Job No. Acceptance No. of job

2 Type Icons that indicate the job type

Copy job

Printer job W

FAX reception

E-mail reception p

Job from Document Box x

Report / List j

Data from Removable Memory Y

3 Job Name Job Name or file name

7-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Status / Job Cancel

No. Item / Key Detail

4 Status Status of job

r: Printing
s: Print Waiting
no icon: Pausing print job or error
R: Preferential print job is
running
S: Suspended because
preferential print job is
running

Send Job Status screen

1 Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status
Status: a b menu appears.
1
*********************
Print Job Status
2 Send Job Status
3 Store Job Status
[ Pause ]

2 Press the  or  key to select [Send Job Status].

3 Press the OK key. Send Job Status appears. Press

Send Job Status: a b the  or  key to check the send queue.
0010 066764333 r
0011 p Broadcast N
0017 0324256345 N
[ Cancel ] [ Menu ]

1 2 3 4

Press the OK key to check detailed information of

0011 Detail: C b the selected job.
Status: 1/8
Processing
NOTE: You can also check the job information by
pressing [Menu] (the Right Select key) and selecting
[Detail] in the menu that appears.

Press the  or  key to switch the display to other

information items. The items displayed are as
follows:

Status (status of job)

Accepted Time
Job Name
Job Type
User Name
Original Pages (number of pages of the original)
Color/B & W (color mode of the original)
Destination

7-4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Status / Job Cancel

When complete job name not displayed in detailed information

Press [Detail] (the Right Select key) in Job Name to see the complete job name. Press the OK key to return to
the original screen.

When complete destination name not displayed in detailed information

When there is only one destination, press [Detail] (the Right Select key) in Destination to see the complete
destination name. Press the OK key to return to the original screen.

When there are two or more destinations, press [List] (the Right Select key) in Destination to display the
destination list. Press the  or  key to select the desired destination and press the OK key. This displays the
complete name of the destination. Press the OK key to return to the destination list.

Pressing [Exit] (the Right Select key) while the destination list is displayed brings you back to the original
screen.

The table below lists the items displayed in the Sending Jobs Status screen.

No. Item / Key Detail

7
1 Job No. Acceptance No. of job

2 Type Icons that indicate the job type

Sending Job FAX

Sending Job PC (SMB/FTP)

Sending Job E-mail p

Sending Job TWAIN2/WSD Scan P

When broadcast sending is done,

Broadcast is displayed next to the
icon. When TWAIN send or WSD
send is executed, "Application"
appears next to the icon.

3 Destination Destination (Either destination name,

FAX number, E-mail address, or
server name)

4 Status Status of job

r: Sending
no icon: Sending Waiting
s: Pausing the job
X: Stop sending

7-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Status / Job Cancel

Store Job Status screen

1 Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status
Status: a b menu appears.
1
*********************
Print Job Status
2 Send Job Status
3 Store Job Status
[ Pause ]

2 Press the  or  key to select [Store Job Status].

3 Press the OK key. Store Job Status appears. Press

Store Job Status: a b the  or  key to check the store queue.
0008 N Scan r
0009 maury’s data
0010 aaaa
[ Cancel ] [ Menu ]

1 2 3 4

Press the OK key to check detailed information of

0009 Detail: C b the selected job.
Status: 1/8
Processing
NOTE: You can also check the job information by
pressing [Menu] (the Right Select key) and selecting
[Detail] in the menu that appears.

Press the  or  key to switch the display to other

information items. The items displayed are as
follows:

Status (status of job)

Accepted Time
Job Name
Job Type
User Name
Original Pages (number of pages of the original)
Color/B & W (color mode of the original)
Sender Info. (destination information)

7-6

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Status / Job Cancel

When complete job name not displayed in detailed information

Press [Detail] (the Right Select key) in Job Name to see the complete job name. Press the OK key to return to
the original screen.

When complete destination information not displayed in detailed information

Press [Detail] (the Right Select key) in Sender Info. to see the complete destination information. Press the OK
key to return to the original screen.

The table below lists the items displayed in the Storing Jobs Status screen.

No. Display / Key Details

1 Job No. Acceptance No. of job

2 Type Icons that indicate the job type

Storing Job Scan N

Storing Job FAX

7
3 Job Name Job name or file name is displayed.

4 Status Status of job

s: Storing Data
no icon: Storing Waiting

7-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Status / Job Cancel

Checking Job History

Check the history of completed jobs.

NOTE: Job history is also available by Command Center RX or KYOCERA Net Viewer from the computer. For
details, refer to the Command Center RX User Guide or KYOCERA Net Viewer User Guide.

Available Job History Screens

The job histories are displayed separately in three screens - Print Jobs, Send Jobs, Store Jobs, and Scheduled
Jobs. The following job histories are available.

Screen Job histories to be displayed

Print Job • Copy

• Printer
• FAX reception
• E-mail reception
• Printing from a Document Box
• Job Report / List
• Printing data from removable
memory

Send Job • FAX

• PC (SMB/FTP)
• E-mail
• Application
• Multiple destination

Store Job • Scan

• FAX
• Printer
• USB Memory

Scheduled Job • FAX

Displaying Print Job Log

1 Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status
Status: a b menu appears.
1
*********************
Print Job Status
2 Send Job Status
3 Store Job Status
[ Pause ]

2 Press the  or  key to select [Print Job Log].

7-8

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Status / Job Cancel

3 Press the OK key. Print Job Log appears. Press

Print Job Log: a b the  or  key to check the print log.
0006 maury’s da. v
0007 tom’s da. u
0008 susan’s da. u
[ Detail ]

A job result icon is displayed on the extreme right

of each job.

u : Job completed normally

v : Job error

t : Job aborted

NOTE: For details of other items, refer to Print Job

Status Screen on page 7-2.
7
Press the OK key or [Detail] (the Right Select key)
0006 Detail: C b to check the detailed information of the selected
Result: 1/9 print log.
Error
Press the  or  key to switch the display to other
00100
information items. The items displayed are as
follows:

Result
Accepted Time
End Time
Job Name
Job Type
User Name
Page and Copy
(number of pages and copies to be printed)
Original Page (number of pages of the original)
Color Mode
Sender Info. (destination information)

When complete job name not displayed in detailed information

When the job name in Job Name is displayed in a short form, press [Detail] (the Right Select key) to see the
complete job name. Press the OK key to return to the original screen.

When complete destination information not displayed in detailed information

Press [Detail] (the Right Select key) in Sender Info. to see the complete destination information. Press the OK
key to return to the original screen.

7-9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Status / Job Cancel

Displaying Send Job Log

1 Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status
Status: a b menu appears.
1
*********************
Print Job Status
2 Send Job Status
3 Store Job Status
[ Pause ]

2 Press the  or  key to select [Send Job Log].

3 Press the OK key. Send Job Log appears. Press

Send Job Log: a b the  or  key to check the send log.
0004 p Broadcast u
0003 0756545865 u A job result icon is displayed on the extreme right
of each job.
0002 p Morgan@kyocN v
[ Detail ] u : Job completed normally

v : Job error

t : Job aborted

NOTE: For details of other items, refer to Send Job

Status screen on page 7-4.

Press the OK key or [Detail] (the Right Select key)

0004 Detail: C b to check the detailed information of the selected
Result: 1/9 send log.
OK

Press the  or  key to switch the display to other

information items. The items displayed are as
follows:

Result
Accepted Time
End Time
Job Name
Job Type
User Name
Original Pages (number of pages of the original)
Color/B & W (color mode of the original)
Destination

7-10

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Status / Job Cancel

When complete job name not displayed in detailed information

Press [Detail] (the Right Select key) in Job Name to see the complete job name. Press the OK key to return to
the original screen.

When complete destination name not displayed in detailed information

When there is only one destination, press [Detail] (the Right Select key) in Destination to see the complete
destination name. Press the OK key to return to the original screen.

When there are two or more destinations, press [List] (the Right Select key) in Destination to display the
destination list. Press the  or  key to select the desired destination and press the OK key. This displays the
complete name of the destination. Press the OK key to return to the destination list.

Pressing [Exit] (the Right Select key) while the destination list is displayed brings you back to the original
screen.

Displaying Store Job Log

1 Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status
Status:
1
a b
*********************
Print Job Status
menu appears.
7
2 Send Job Status
3 Store Job Status
[ Pause ]

2 Press the  or  key to select [Store Job Log].

3 Press the OK key. Store Job Log appears. Press

Store Job Log: a b the  or  key to check the store queue.
0008 Scan u
0009 maury’s data v
0010 Y aaaa v
[ Detail ]

A job result icon is displayed on the extreme right

of each job.

u : Job completed normally

v : Job error

t : Job aborted

NOTE: For details of other items, refer to Store Job

Status screen on page 7-6.

7-11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Status / Job Cancel

Press the OK key or [Detail] (the Right Select key)

0009 Detail: C b to check the detailed information of the selected
Result: 1/9 job.
Error
10200

Press the  or  key to switch the display to other

information items. The items displayed are as
follows:

Result
Accepted Time
End Time
Job Name
Job Type
User Name
Original Pages (number of pages of the original)
Color/B & W (color mode of the original)
Sender Info. (destination information)

When complete job name not displayed in detailed information

Press [Detail] (the Right Select key) in Job Name to see the complete job name. Press the OK key to return to
the original screen.

When complete destination information not displayed in detailed information

Press [Detail] (the Right Select key) in Sender Info. to see the complete destination information. Press the OK
key to return to the original screen.

7-12

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Status / Job Cancel

Sending the Job Log History

You can send the job log history by e-mail. You can either send it manually as needed or have it sent
automatically whenever a set number of jobs is reached.

Displaying Job Log History Menu

1 Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b unit operation panel. The Sys. Menu/Count. menu
1
*********************
Report appears.
2 Counter
3 System/Network
[ Exit ]

When you are performing user management and

Login User Name: L b have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
******************** Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Login Password: Password to log in.

7
[ Login ] NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on
Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.

2 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Report].
1
*********************
Report
2 Counter
3 System/Network
[ Exit ]

3 Press the OK key. The Report menu appears.

Report: a b
1
*********************
Report Print
2 Admin Rpt Set.
3 Result Rpt Set.
[ Exit ]

IMPORTANT: When a time period to prohibit

Now, the machine is acceptance of jobs is set in timer settings, the screen
prohibited to be will display Now, the machine is prohibited to be used.
used. and return to the standby screen.
23:00 - 08:30

7-13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Status / Job Cancel

4 Press the  or  key to select [Job Log History].

Report: a b
2 Admin Rpt Set.
3 Result Rpt Set.
4
*********************
Job Log History
[ Exit ]

5 Press the OK key. The Job Log History menu

Job Log History: a b appears.
1
*********************
Auto Sending
2 Send History
3 Destination
[ Exit ]

Setting the destination

Set the destination to which job log histories are sent.

Use the procedure below to set the destination.

1 In the Job Log History menu, press the  or  key

Job Log History: a b to select [Destination].
1 Auto Sending
2 Send History
3
*********************
Destination
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Destination menu appears.

Destination: a b
1
*********************
Confirmation
2 Register

[ Exit ]

Confirming Current Destination

1 In the Destination menu, press the  or  key to
Destination: a b select [Confirmation].
1
*********************
Confirmation
2 Register

[ Exit ]

7-14

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Status / Job Cancel

2 Press the OK key. Dest. Confirm. appears.

Dest. Confirm.: a b
p
*********************N
Morgan@kyoceradocu
NOTE: Press the OK key to edit/delete the current
destination. Refer to Character Entry Method on
Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
[ Exit ]

3 Press [Exit] (the Right Select key). The basic

screen reappears.

Registering Destination
1 In the Destination menu, press the  or  key to
Destination: a b select [Register].
1 Confirmation
2
*********************
Register

[ Exit ]
7
2 Press the OK key. Register appears.
Register: a b
1
*********************
Address Book
2 Address Entry

To select a destination from the address book,

press the  or  key to select [Address Book] and
then press the OK key. This displays the address
book. Select your desired destination.

NOTE: For selecting a destination from the address

book, refer to Specifying Destination on page 3-41.

To directly enter a destination, press the  or 

key to select [Address Entry] and then press the
OK key. This displays an entry screen. Enter the
destination address directly.

3 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

Completed. screen returns to the Destination menu.

7-15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Status / Job Cancel

NOTE: If the address of the selected destination has

Register: a b been changed after you selected the destination from
1
*********************
Address Book the address book, [*] is displayed before [Address
2 *Address Entry Entry]. Refer to Confirming Current Destination on
page 7-14 and reconfirm the destination address.

Automatic Job Log History Transmission

This function automatically sends the job log history to the specified destinations whenever a set number of jobs
has been logged.

Use the procedure below to set automatic job log history transmission.

1 In the Job Log History menu, press the  or  key

Job Log History: a b to select [Auto Sending].
1
*********************
Auto Sending
2 Send History
3 Destination
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. Auto Sending appears.

Auto Sending: a b
1
*********************
*Off
2 On

3 Press the  or  key to select [Off] or [On].

If you select [On] and press the OK key, Jobs

Jobs: D b appears. Use the numeric keys to enter the
(1 - 16) number of jobs to be sent at a time.
******16*jobs

4 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Job Log History menu.

Manual Job Log History Transmission

You can also send the job log history to the specified destinations manually.

Use the procedure below to send the job log history manually.

7-16

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Status / Job Cancel

1 In the Job Log History menu, press the  or  key

Job Log History: a b to select [Send History].
1 Auto Sending
2
*********************
Send History
3 Destination
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears.

Send the job log
history.
Are you sure?

[ Yes ] [ No ]

IMPORTANT: If no destination is registered, Enter

Enter destination. destination is displayed. Refer to Registering
Destination on page 7-15 and register the desired
destination
7

3 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). Accepted. is

displayed and the job log is sent to the registered
destination before the screen returns to the Job
Log History menu.

Setting E-mail Subject

Set the subject automatically entered when sending job log histories by e-mail.

Use the procedure below to set the subject.

1 In the Job Log History menu, press the  or  key

Job Log History: a b to select [Subject].
2 Send History
3 Destination
4
*********************
Subject
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. Subject appears.

Subject: B b
%printer*
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on
Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
ABC
[ Text ]

3 Enter the subject.

4 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Job Log History menu.

7-17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Status / Job Cancel

Personal information in the job log

When the job log is sent by e-mail, personal information can be including the job log of the user who logs in.

Use the procedure below to set automatic job log history transmission.

1 In the Job Log History menu, press the  or  key

Job Log History: a b to select [Personal Info.].
1
*********************
Auto Sending
2 Send History
3 Destination
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. Personal Info. appears.

Personal Info.: a b
1
*********************
*Include
2 Exclude

3 Press the  or  key to select [Include] or

[Exclude].

4 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Job Log History menu.

7-18

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Status / Job Cancel

Pause and Resumption of Jobs

Pause /resume all printing jobs in printing/waiting.

The procedure for pausing and resuming jobs is explained below.

1 Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status

Status: a b menu appears.
1
*********************
Print Job Status
2 Send Job Status
3 Store Job Status
[ Pause ]

2 Press the  or  key to select [Print Job Status].

3 Press the OK key. Print Job Status appears.

Print Job Status: a b
0008 Copy r
*********************
0009 maury’s data
0010 y aaaa 7
[ Pause ] [ Menu ]

4 Press [Pause] (the Left Select key). Printing is

Pausing: a b paused.
0008 Copy s
*********************
0009 maury’s data s When you press [Resume] (the Left Select key) to
resume printing.
0010 y aaaa s
[ Resume ] [ Menu ]

NOTE: When you press the Back key, a confirmation

Resume paused jobs. screen appears. Press [Yes] (the Left Select key) to
Are you sure? resume printing.

[ Yes ] [ No ]

Canceling of Jobs
For canceling jobs, refer to Canceling Jobs on page 3-46.

7-19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Status / Job Cancel

Device/Communication
Configure the devices/lines installed or connected to this machine or check their status. You can also control
devices depending on their status.

Check of Device Status

1 Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status
Status: a b menu appears.
7 Store Job Log
8
*********************
Scanner
9 Printer
[ Pause ]

2 Press the  or  key to select [Scanner], [Printer],

[FAX] or [SSD].

3 Press the OK key. This displays the status of the

Scanner: b device selected in step 2.

Ready.

Printer: b

Ready.

FAX: b

Ready.

[ Log ]

4 Press the OK key. The screen returns to the Status

menu.

The items you can check are described below.

Scanner

The information (scanning, pausing, etc.) is displayed.

Printer

Information (waiting, printing, etc.) is displayed.

7-20

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Status / Job Cancel

FAX

The information (sending, waiting, etc.) is displayed.

SSD

The information (optional SSD) is displayed.

Handling the Devices

USB memory

The status of the USB memory that is connected to the machine appears. This is also used when removing the
USB memory from the machine.

1 Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status

Status: a b menu appears.
1
*********************
Print Job Status
2 Send Job Status
3 Store Job Status
[ Pause ] 7
2 Press the  or  key to select [USB Memory].
Status: a b
= Paper Status
>
*********************
USB Memory
? SSD
[ Pause ]

3 Press the OK key. This displays the status of the

USB Memory: C b USB memory.
Capacity: 1/3
512.0MB

[ Remove ]

Press the  or  key to switch the display to other

information items. The items displayed are as
follows:

Capacity
Used Area
Free Space

When you press [Remove] (the Left Select key), a

USB memory can be confirmation screen appears and you can remove
safely removed. the USB memory.

[ OK ]

7-21

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Status / Job Cancel

4 Press [OK] (the Right Select key). The screen

returns to the Status menu.

USB keyboard

This appears when a USB keyboard is connected to the machine, and indicates whether the keyboard can be
used.

1 Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status

Status: a b menu appears.
1
*********************
Print Job Status
2 Send Job Status
3 Store Job Status
[ Pause ]

2 Press the  or  key to select [USB Keyboard].

Status: a b
< Memory Card
= USB Memory
>
*********************
USB Keyboard
[ Pause ]

3 Press the OK key. Indicates whether the USB

USB Keyboard: C b keyboard can be used.

Available

4 Press the OK key. The screen returns to the Status

menu.

7-22

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 8 Default Setting (System Menu)

This chapter explains how to configure various settings of the machine using the menus on
the operation panel.

• Common Settings ......................................................... 8-2

• Copy Settings ............................................................. 8-69
• Sending Settings ........................................................ 8-75
• Document Box Settings .............................................. 8-83
• Printer Settings ........................................................... 8-99
• Printing Reports/Sending Notice .............................. 8-117
• Adjustment/Maintenance .......................................... 8-123
• Date/Timer ................................................................ 8-141
• Editing Destination (Address Book/Adding One-Touch Keys) ..... 8-158
• Restarting the System .............................................. 8-173
• Network Setup .......................................................... 8-174
• Network Security ...................................................... 8-185
• Optional Network ...................................................... 8-196
• NW InterfaceSend .................................................... 8-208
• Interface Block Setting.............................................. 8-209
• Security Level (Security Level setting) ..................... 8-214
• Optional Functions.................................................... 8-215

8-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

Common Settings
Common settings include;

• How to display the Sys. Menu/Count. menu …8-2

• Switching the Language for Display [Language] …8-3
• Default Screen …8-5
• Sound …8-6
• Display Bright. …8-7
• Original/Paper Settings …8-8
• Preset Limit …8-26
• Switching Unit of Measurement …8-27
• Error Handling …8-28
• Function Defaults …8-30
• Login Operation …8-62
• RAM Disk Mode …8-63
• Format SSD …8-64
• Format SD Card …8-65
• Optional Memory …8-66
• TonerAlert Level …8-68

How to display the Sys. Menu/Count. menu

1 Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main
unit operation panel.

When you are performing user management and

Login User Name: L b have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
******************* Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Login Password: Password to log in.

[ Login ] NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on

Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.

2 The Sys. Menu/Count. menu appears.

Sys. Menu/Count.: a b
1
*********************
Report
2 Counter
3 System/Network
[ Exit ]

8-2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

Switching the Language for Display [Language]

You can select the language of the message display by following the procedure given below. You can optionally
download messages in other languages. Contact your service technician for information.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Common Settings].
4 User/Job Account
5 User Property
6
*********************
Common Settings
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu

Common Settings: a b appears.
1
*********************
Language
2 Default Screen
3 Sound
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Language].

Language: a b
4 Press the OK key. The Language menu appears. 8
1
*********************
*English The available languages are as follows:
2 Deutsch English
3 Français Deutsch
Français
Español
Italiano
Nederlands
Русский
Português

The optional languages are as follows:

Optional language Message display

Turkish Türkçe

Greek Ελληνικά

Polish Polski

Czech Èeský

Hungarian Magyar

Finnish Suomi

Hebrew

Arabic

8-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

Optional language Message display

Swedish Svensk

Danish Dansk

Norwegian Norsk

Romanian

Korean

Simplified Chinese

Traditional Chinese

If you are using one of the optional languages, it is

displayed in place of Portugues.

5 Press the  or  key to select a language.

6 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Common Settings menu.

8-4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

Default Screen
Select the screen appearing right after start-up (default screen). The options are as follows.

The table below lists the available screens.

Item Description

Status The Status/Job Cancel screen (the screen shown

when the Status/Job Cancel key is pressed)
appears.

Copy The Copy screen (the screen shown when the

Copy key is pressed) appears.

Send The Send screen (the screen shown when the

Send key is pressed) appears.

FAX The FAX screen (the screen shown when the

FAX key is pressed) appears.

Document Box The Document Box screen (the screen shown

when the Document Box key is pressed)
appears.
8
Use the procedure below to select the default startup screen.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Common Settings].
4 User/Job Account
5 User Property
6
*********************
Common Settings
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu

Common Settings: a b appears.
1 Language
2
*********************
Default Screen
3 Sound
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Default Screen].

4 Press the OK key. Default Screen appears.

Default Screen: a b
1 Status
2
*********************
*Copy
3 Send

5 Press the  or  key to select the default screen.

8-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

6 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Common Settings menu.

Sound
Set options for buzzer sound during the machine operations.

The table below lists the buzzer types and their settings and details. The asterisk in the table is a default setting.

Item Value Description

Key Off, On * Emit a sound when the

Confirmation control panel are pressed.

Job Finish Off*, On Emit a sound when a print

job is normally completed.

Ready Off*, On Emit a sound when the

warm-up is completed.

Warning Off, On* Emit a sound when errors

occur.

Keyboard Off*, On This sounds when the USB

Confirm keyboard is used.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Common Settings].
4 User/Job Account
5 User Property
6
*********************
Common Settings
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu

Common Settings: a b appears.
1 Language
2 Default Screen
3
*********************
Sound
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Sound].

4 Press the OK key. Sound appears.

Sound: a b
1
*********************
Buzzer
2 FAX Speaker
3 FAX Monitor
[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [Buzzer].

8-6

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

6 Press the OK key. Buzzer appears.

Buzzer: a b
1
*********************
Key Confirmation
2 Job finish
3 Ready
[ Exit ]

7 Press the  or  key to select [Key Confirmation].

8 Press the OK key. Key Confirmation appears.

Key Confirmation: a b
1
*********************
*Off
2 On

9 Press the  or  key to select [On] or [Off].

10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Buzzer menu.

Display Bright. 8
Set the brightness of the display.

Use the procedure below to adjust the display brightness.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Common Settings].
4 User/Job Account
5 User Property
6
*********************
Common Settings
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu

Common Settings: a b appears.
1
*********************
Language
2 Default Screen
3 Sound
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Display Bright.].

4 Press the OK key. Display Bright. appears.

Display Bright.: a b
3 Darker -1
4
*********************
*Normal 0
5 Lighter+1

8-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

5 Press the  or  key to select the display

brightness from [Darker -3] to [Lighter +3].

6 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Common Settings menu.

Original/Paper Settings
Register additional types and sizes of originals and paper.

Custom Original Size Setup

Set up frequently-used custom original size. The dimensions available are as follows.

The table below lists the sizes that can be registered.

Input units Dimensions

Inch models X: 1.97 to 14.02" (in 0.01" increments)

Y: 1.97 to 8.50" (in 0.01" increments)

Metric models X: 50 to 356 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Y: 50 to 216 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Use the procedure below to set a custom original size.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Common Settings].
4 User/Job Account
5 User Property
6
*********************
Common Settings
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu

Common Settings: a b appears.
1
*********************
Language
2 Default Screen
3 Sound
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Orig./Paper Set.].

4 Press the OK key. The Orig./Paper Set. menu

Orig./Paper Set.: a b appears.
1
*********************
Custom Orig.Size
2 Def. Orig. Size
3 Custom PaperSize
[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [Custom Orig.Size].

8-8

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

6 Press the OK key. Size Entry(Y) appears.

Size Entry(Y): D b
(1.97 - 8.50)
x ***7.00*"

7 Use the numeric keys to enter the paper length (Y).

8 Press the OK key. Size Entry(X) appears.

Size Entry(X): D b
(1.97 - 14.02)
J **11.23*"

9 Use the numeric keys to enter the paper width (X).

10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Orig./Paper Set. menu.

8-9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

Default Original Size Setup

In the screen for setting the paper size for the paper feed cassette or multi purpose tray, select the paper size
to be used as the default value.

Use the procedure below to select the paper size to be used as the default value.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Common Settings].
4 User/Job Account
5 User Property
6
*********************
Common Settings
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu

Common Settings: a b appears.
1
*********************
Language
2 Default Screen
3 Sound
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Orig./Paper Set.].

4 Press the OK key. The Orig./Paper Set. menu

Orig./Paper Set.: a b appears.
1
*********************
Custom Orig.Size
2 Def. Orig. Size
3 Custom PaperSize
[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [Def. Orig. Size].

6 Press the OK key. Def. Orig. Size appears.

Def. Orig. Size: a b
1
*********************
*Letterq
2 Legalq
3 Statementq

7 Press the  or  key to select the paper size to be

used as the default value.

8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Orig./Paper Set. menu.

8-10

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

Adding a Custom Size and Media Type for Paper to Print

Set up a frequently-used custom paper size. The custom size options are displayed on the screen to select
paper.

The table below lists the sizes that can be registered.

Input units Dimensions

Inch models Cassette: X: 4.13 to 8.50" (in 0.01" increments)

Y: 5.83 to 14.02" (in 0.01" increments)

Paper Feeder: X: 3.63 to 8.50" (in 0.01" increments)

Y: 6.38 to 14.02" (in 0.01" increments)

Multi Purpose Tray: X: 2.76 to 8.50" (in 0.01" increments)

Y: 5.83 to 14.02" (in 0.01" increments)

Metric models Cassette: X: 105 to 216 (in 1 mm increments)

Y: 148 to 356 (in 1 mm increments)

Paper Feeder: X: 92 to 216 (in 1 mm increments)

Y: 162 to 356 (in 1 mm increments)

Multi Purpose Tray: X: 70 to 216 (in 1 mm increments)

Y: 148 to 356 (in 1 mm increments) 8
Custom paper sizes can be added for each paper source.

Select media type for each paper size.

Media type: Plain, Transparency, Vellum, Labels, Recycled, Rough, Preprinted, Bond, Cardstock, Color,
Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick, Envelope, Coated, High Quality, Custom 1-8

NOTE: Refer to Paper Weight on page 8-18 for Custom 1-8 for media type.

Use the procedure below to select a custom paper size and media type.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Common Settings].
4 User/Job Account
5 User Property
6
*********************
Common Settings
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu

Common Settings: a b appears.
1
*********************
Language
2 Default Screen
3 Sound
[ Exit ]

8-11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

3 Press the  or  key to select [Orig./Paper Set.].

4 Press the OK key. The Orig./Paper Set. menu

Orig./Paper Set.: a b appears.
1
*********************
Custom Orig.Size
2 Def. Orig. Size
3 Custom PaperSize
[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [Custom

PaperSize].

6 Press the OK key. The Custom PaperSize menu

Custom PaperSize a b appears.
1
*********************
Cassette 1 Size
2 Cassette 2 Size
3 Cassette 3 Size

7 Select the paper source in which you want to set

Size Entry(Y): D b the custom size and press the OK key. Size
(5.83 - 14.02) Entry(Y) appears.
x ***14.02*"

8 Use the numeric keys to enter the paper length (Y).

9 Press the OK key. Size Entry(X) appears.

Size Entry(X): Db
(4.13 - 8.50)
J ***8.50*"

10 Use the numeric keys to enter the paper width (X).

11 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Orig./Paper Set. menu.

8-12

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

Paper Size and Media Type Setup for Cassettes

Select the size and type of paper used when cassette 1 and the optional paper feeder (cassettes 2 and 3) are
used. A paper size setting can be specified for a cassette when the Paper Size Dial is set to "Other".
The available paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below.

Cassette 1

Selection Item Selectable Size/Type

Paper Size Inch size: Letter, Legal, Statement and Oficio II

Metric size: A4, A5, A6, B5, Folio, 216x340mm,
16K, ISO B5, Executive, Envelope C5 and Custom*

Media Type Plain, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color, Rough,

Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick (163 g/m2 or less),
High Quality and Custom 1~8,

Paper feeder

Selection Item Selectable Size/Type

Paper Size Inch size: Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive,

and Oficio II
Metric size: A4, A5, B5, Folio, 216x340mm, 16K, 8
ISO B5, Envelope #10 (Commercial #10),
Envelope #9 (Commercial #9), Envelope #6
(Commercial #6 3/4), Envelope Monarch,
Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Oufuku Hagaki,
Youkei 4, Youkei 2, Custom*

Media Type Plain, Labels**, Recycled, Preprinted***, Bond, Rough,

Cardstock**, Color, Prepunched***, Letterhead***,
Envelope**, Coated**, Thick (163 g/m2 or less),
Thick** (163 g/m2 and more), High Quality and Custom 1~8

* For instructions on how to specify the custom paper size, refer to Original/Paper Settings on page 8-8.
** Only on products with the paper feeder (multi purpose) installed.
*** To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to Special Paper Action on page 8-24.

NOTE: To change to a media type other than Plain, refer to Paper Weight on page 8-18.

Use the procedure below to select the paper size and media type for each cassette.
1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 
Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Common Settings].
4 User/Job Account
5 User Property
6
*********************
Common Settings
[ Exit ]

8-13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu

Common Settings: a b appears.
1
*********************
Language
2 Default Screen
3 Sound
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Orig./Paper Set.].

4 Press the OK key. The Orig./Paper Set. menu

Orig./Paper Set.: a b appears.
1
*********************
Custom Orig.Size
2 Def. Orig. Size
3 Custom PaperSize
[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [Cassette 1 Set.],

[Cassette 2 Set.] or [Cassette 3 Set.].

Follow the steps below when you select the main

unit cassette ([Cassette 1]). Operate in a similar
fashion when you select an optional cassette
([Cassette 2 or 3])

6 The Cassette 1 Set. menu appears.

Cassette 1 Set.: a b
1
*********************
Cassette 1 Size
2 Cassette 1 Type

[ Exit ]

7 Press the  or  key to select [Cassette 1 Size].

NOTE: This item does not appear when the Paper

Size Dial on the cassette is set to other than "Other".

8 Press the OK key. Cassette 1 Size appears.

Cassette 1 Size: a b
1
*********************
*Lettera
2 Legala
3 Statementa

9 Press the  or  key to select the paper size.

8-14

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

10 Press the OK key. The screen returns to the

Cassette 1 Set.: a b Cassette 1 Set. menu.
1
*********************
Cassette 1 Size
2 Cassette 1 Type

[ Exit ]

11 Press the  or  key to select [Cassette 1 Type].

12 Press the OK key. Cassette 1 Type appears.
Cassette 1 Type: a b
1
*********************
*Plain
2 Rough
3 Recycled

13 Press the  or  key to select the paper type.

14 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Cassette 1 Set. menu.

8-15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

Paper Size and Media Type Setup for Multi Purpose Tray

Select size and media type for multi purpose tray. Set up frequently-used size and media type before use.

The available paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below.

Item Description

Paper Standard Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive, Oficio II,

Size Sizes A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, Folio, 216x340 mm, 16K,
ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9,
Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL,
Envelope C5, Hagaki, Oufuku Hagaki, Youkei 4,
Youkei 2, Custom*
Media Type Plain (105 g/m2 or less), Transparency, Rough,
Vellum (63 g/m2 or less), Labels, Recycled,
Preprinted**, Bond, Cardstock, Color,
Prepunched**, Letterhead**, Envelope, Coated,
Thick (106 g/m2 and more), High Quality,
Custom 1-8**
* Refer to Adding a Custom Size and Media Type for Paper to Print on
page 8-11 for selecting Custom Paper Size.
** Refer to Paper Weight on page 8-18 for selecting Custom 1- 8 from
Media Type.
To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to
Special Paper Action on page 8-24.

NOTE: To change to a media type other than Plain, refer to Paper Weight on page 8-18

Use the procedure below to select the paper size and media type for manual paper feed.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Common Settings].
4 User/Job Account
5 User Property
6
*********************
Common Settings
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu

Common Settings: a b appears.
1
*********************
Language
2 Default Screen
3 Sound
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Orig./Paper Set.].

8-16

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

4 Press the OK key. The Orig./Paper Set. menu

Orig./Paper Set.: a b appears.
1
*********************
Custom Orig.Size
2 Def. Orig. Size
3 Custom PaperSize
[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [MP Tray Set.].

6 Press the OK key. The MP Tray Set. menu

MP Tray Set.: a b appears.
1
*********************
MP Tray Size
2 MP Tray Type

[ Exit ]

7 Press the  or  key to select [MP Tray Size].

8 Press the OK key. MP Tray Size appears.

MP Tray Size: a b
= 16Ka
> ISO B5 8
? *Envelope #10
*********************

9 Press the  or  key to select the paper size.

MP Tray Size: a b
= 16Ka
> ISO B5
? *Envelope #10
*********************

10 Press the OK key. The screen returns to the MP

MP Tray Set.: a b Tray Set. menu.
1 MP Tray Size
2
*********************
MP Tray Type

[ Exit ]

11 Press the  or  key to select [MP Tray Type].

12 Press the OK key. MP Tray Type appears.
MP Tray Type: a b
1
*********************
*Plain
2 Transparency
3 Rough

8-17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

13 Press the  or  key to select the paper type.

14 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the MP Tray Set. menu.

Paper Weight

Select weight for each media type. The options for media type and weight of paper are as follows.

Paper types and weights

: Default value : Available X: Not available

Paper Normal Normal Normal Extra

Light Heavy 1 Heavy 2 Heavy 3 Duplex
Weight 1 2 3 Heavy

Weight (g/m2), 60g/m2 64g/m2 75g/m2 91g/m2 106g/m2 136g/m2 164g/m2 Trans-
Media type to to to to to to to parency
63g/m2 74g/m2 90g/m2 105g/m2 135g/m2 163g/m2 220g/m2

Plain         
Transparency         X

Vellum         X
Labels         X

Recycled         
Preprinted         

Bond         
Cardstock         X
Color         

Prepunched         
Rough         

Letterhead         
Coated         

Thick         

Envelope         X
High Quality         

Custom 1-8         *

* Can be selected when the setting is [Light] to [Heavy 2].

8-18

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

For Custom 1-8, settings for duplex printing and media type name can be changed.

Item Description

Duplex Prohibit Duplex printing not allowed.

Permit Duplex printing allowed.

Name Change names for Custom 1-8. Names

should be not more than 16 characters.
Selecting media type at multi purpose tray,
the name after change will be displayed.

Use the procedure below to set the paper weight.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Common Settings].
4 User/Job Account
5 User Property
6
*********************
Common Settings
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu 8

Common Settings: a b appears.
1
*********************
Language
2 Default Screen
3 Sound
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Orig./Paper Set.].

4 Press the OK key. The Orig./Paper Set. menu

Orig./Paper Set.: a b appears.
1
*********************
Custom Orig.Size
2 Def. Orig. Size
3 Custom PaperSize
[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [Media Type Set.].

6 Press the OK key. Media Type Set. menu appears.

Media type Set.: K b
1
*********************
Plain
2 Transparency
3 Rough
[ Exit ]

7 Press the  or  key to select the paper type for

which you want to make settings.

8-19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

8 Press the OK key. The menu for the selected

Plain: a b paper type appears.
1
*********************
Paper Weight

[ Exit ]

9 Press the  or  key to select [Paper Weight].

10 Press the OK key. The Paper Weight menu

Paper Weight: a b appears.
1
*********************
Extra Heavy
2 *Heavy 3
3 Heavy 2

11 Press the  or  key to select the weight of paper.

12 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
Plain: a b screen returns to the menu for the selected paper
1
*********************
Paper Weight type.

[ Exit ]

When the selected paper type is [Custom 1 to 8],

Custom 1: a b you can further set whether to enable or disable
1
*********************
Paper Weight duplex and the name of the custom paper type.
2 Duplex
3 Name
[ Exit ]

13 Press the  or  key to select [Duplex].

14 Press the OK key. The Duplex menu appears.
Duplex: a b
1
*********************
Permit
2 Prohibit

[ Exit ]

15 Press the  or  key to select whether to enable

or disable duplex.

8-20

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

16 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

Custom 1: a b screen returns to the menu for the selected custom
1
*********************
Paper Weight paper type.
2 Duplex
3 Name
[ Exit ]

17 Press the  or  key to select [Name].

18 Press the OK key. Name Entry is displayed.
Name Entry: C b
Osaka SD Kyocer*S Enter the name of the custom paper type.

ABC NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on

[ Text ] Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.

19 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

Custom 1: a b screen returns to the menu for the selected custom
1
*********************
Paper Weight paper type.
2 Duplex
3 Name
[ Exit ]
8

8-21

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

Default Paper Source

Select the default paper source from Cassette 1-3 and Multi Purpose Tray.

NOTE: [Cassette 2] and [Cassette 3] are displayed when the optional paper feeder is installed.

Use the procedure below to select the default paper source.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Common Settings].
4 User/Job Account
5 User Property
6
*********************
Common Settings
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu

Common Settings: a b appears.
1
*********************
Language
2 Default Screen
3 Sound
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Orig./Paper Set.].

4 Press the OK key. The Orig./Paper Set. menu

Orig./Paper Set.: a b appears.
1
*********************
Custom Orig.Size
2 Def. Orig. Size
3 Custom PaperSize
[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [Def.

PaperSource].

6 Press the OK key. Def. PaperSource appears.

Def. PaperSurce: a b
1
*********************
*Cassette 1
2 Cassette 2
3 Cassette 3

7 Press the  or  key to select the paper source to

be used preferentially.

8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the menu for the selected custom
paper type.

8-22

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

Media for Auto Selection

When [Auto] is selected in Paper Selection, the paper source that is automatically selected can be limited by
media types.If Plain is selected, the paper source with plain paper loaded in the specific size is selected. Select
[All Media Types] for the paper source with any kind of paper loaded in the specific size.

Use the procedure below to select the paper size and media type used by Auto Selection.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Common Settings].
4 User/Job Account
5 User Property
6
*********************
Common Settings
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu

Common Settings: a b appears.
1
*********************
Language
2 Default Screen
3 Sound
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Orig./Paper Set.]. 8

4 Press the OK key. The Orig./Paper Set. menu
Orig./Paper Set.: a b appears.
1
*********************
Custom Orig.Size
2 Def. Orig. Size
3 Custom PaperSize
[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [Media for Auto].

6 Press the OK key. The color selection menu

Media for Auto: a b appears.
1
*********************
Full Color
2 Black & White

7 Press the  or  key to select [Full Color] or

[Black & White].

8 Press the OK key. Media for Auto appears.

Media for Auto: a b
1 All Media Type
2
*********************
*Plain
3 Transparency

8-23

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

9 Press the  or  key to select [All Media Type] or

the paper type to be used for paper selection.

10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Orig./Paper Set. menu.

Special Paper Action

When printing on Prepunched, Preprint, and Letterhead, punch-holes might not be aligned or the print direction
might be upside-down depending on how originals are set and the combination of copying functions. In such a
case, select [Adj. PrintDirect] to adjust the print direction. When paper orientation is not important, select [Speed
Priority].

The table below lists the available settings and their details.

Item Description

Adj. PrintDirect Adjust print direction. Print speed is a little

slower. Select this item to print on
Prepunched, Preprint and Letterhead.

Speed Priority Give the job speed top priority and

disregard the paper orientation. Select this
item when paper orientation is not
important.

If you select [Adj. PrintDirect], load paper according to the steps below.

Example: copying on Letterhead

Original Paper Finished Cassette Multi Purpose Tray

Original Paper Finished Cassette Multi Purpose Tray

NOTE: When loading cover paper in a cassette or multi purpose tray, load the face, on which printing is
supposed to be done, upward.

8-24

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

Use the procedure below to specify the actions performed for special paper types.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Common Settings].
4 User/Job Account
5 User Property
6
*********************
Common Settings
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu

Common Settings: a b appears.
1
*********************
Language
2 Default Screen
3 Sound
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Orig./Paper Set.].

4 Press the OK key. The Orig./Paper Set. menu

Orig./Paper Set.: a b appears.
1
*********************
Custom Orig.Size
2 Def. Orig. Size 8
3 Custom PaperSize
[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [SpcialPaper Act.].

6 Press the OK key. SpcialPaper Act. appears.

SpcialPaper Act.: a b
1
*********************
*Adj. PrintDirect
2 Speed Priority

7 Press the  or  key to select [Adj. PrintDirect] or

SpcialPaper Act.: a b [Speed Priority].
1 Adj. PrintDirect
2 *Speed Priority
*********************

8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Orig./Paper Set. menu.

8-25

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

Preset Limit
Restrict the number of copies that can be made at one time. Options are 1-999 copies.

Use the procedure below to set the limit on the number of copies.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Common Settings].
4 User/Job Account
5 User Property
6
*********************
Common Settings
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu

Common Settings: a b appears.
1
*********************
Language
2 Default Screen
3 Sound
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Preset Limit].

4 Press the OK key. The Preset Limit menu appears.

Preset Limit: D b
(1 - 999)
**999*

5 Press the  or  key to enter the number of

copies.

6 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Common Settings menu.

8-26

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

Switching Unit of Measurement

Select inch or metric for the unit for paper dimensions.

Use the procedure below to change the input units.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Common Settings].
4 User/Job Account
5 User Property
6
*********************
Common Settings
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu

Common Settings: a b appears.
1
*********************
Language
2 Default Screen
3 Sound
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Measurement].

4 Press the OK key. The Measurement menu

8
Measurement: a b appears.
1
*********************
*inch
2 mm

5 Press the  or  key to select [inch] or [mm].

6 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Common Settings menu.

8-27

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

Error Handling
Select whether to cancel or continue the job when error has occurred. The possible errors and what to do for
the errors are as follows.

Duplexing Error

Select what to do when duplex printing is not possible for the selected paper size and media type.

Item Description

1-sided Printed in 1-sided

Display Error Error message to cancel printing is

displayed.

Paper Mismatch Error

Select the method to handle if the selected paper size or paper type does not match the paper size or paper
type set in the paper source when printing from your computer.

Item Description

Ignore Printing continues.

Display Error Error message to cancel printing is

displayed.

Use the procedure below to specify the settings for error handling.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Common Settings].
4 User/Job Account
5 User Property
6
*********************
Common Settings
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu

Common Settings: a b appears.
1
*********************
Language
2 Default Screen
3 Sound
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Error Handling].

8-28

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

4 Press the OK key. The Error Handling menu

Error Handling: a b appears.
1
*********************
DuplexPaperError
2 PaperMismatchErr

[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select

[DuplexPaperError].

6 Press the OK key. DuplexPaperError appears.

DuplexPaperError: a b
1 1-sided
2 *Display Error
*********************

7 Press the  or  key to select the method to

handle if duplex is disabled.

8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

Error Handling: a b screen returns to the Error Handling menu. 8
1 DuplexPaperError
2
*********************
PaperMismatchErr

[ Exit ]

9 Press the  or  key to select

[PagerMismatchErr].

10 Press the OK key. PagerMismatchErr appears.

PaperMismatchErr: a b
1 Ignore
2
*********************
*Display Error

11 Press the  or  key to select the method to

handle paper mismatch.

12 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Error Handling menu.

8-29

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

Function Defaults
Defaults are the values automatically set after the warm-up is completed or the Reset key is pressed.

Set the defaults for available settings such as copying and sending. Setting the frequently-used values as
defaults makes subsequent jobs easier.

Orig.Orientation

Set the original orientation defaults. The available default settings are shown below.

Item Description

c Top Edge Top Select the original's top edge at the top.

d Top Edge Left Select the original's top edge at the left.

Refer to page 4-8 for Original Orientation.

Use the procedure below to select the default orientation when originals are placed on the platen.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Common Settings].
4 User/Job Account
5 User Property
6
*********************
Common Settings
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu

Common Settings: a b appears.
1
*********************
Language
2 Default Screen
3 Sound
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Function Default].

4 Press the OK key. The Function Default menu

Function Default: a b appears.
1
*********************
Color Selection
2 Scan Resolution
3 FAX Resolution
[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [Orig.Orientation].

8-30

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

6 Press the OK key. Orig.Orientation appears.

Orig.Orientation: a b
1 c Top Edge Top
2 *d Top Edge Left
*********************

7 Press the  or  key to select [c Top Edge Top]

or [d Top Edge Left] .

8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Function Default menu.

Backgrnd(Copy)

Select the Backgrnd(Copy) default. The available default settings are shown below.

Item Description

Off Do not adjust background density.

Auto Set to auto adjustment.

Manual (Darker 5) Set to (Darker 5) in manual adjustment.

8
Use the procedure below to select the default Backgrnd(Copy).

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Common Settings].
4 User/Job Account
5 User Property
6
*********************
Common Settings
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu

Common Settings: a b appears.
1
*********************
Language
2 Default Screen
3 Sound
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Function Default].

4 Press the OK key. The Function Default menu

Function Default: a b appears.
1
*********************
Color Selection
2 Scan Resolution
3 FAX Resolution
[ Exit ]

8-31

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

5 Press the  or  key to select [Backgrnd(Copy)].

6 Press the OK key. Backgrnd(Copy) appears.

Backgrnd(Copy): a b
1
*********************
*Off
2 Auto
3 Manual(Darker 5)

7 Press the  or  key to select [Off], [Auto] or

[Manual(Darker 5)].

8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Function Default menu.

Backgrnd(Send)

Select the Backgrnd(Send) default. The available default settings are shown below.

Item Description

Off Do not adjust background density.

Auto Set to auto adjustment.

Manual (Darker 5) Set to (Darker 5) in manual adjustment.

Use the procedure below to select the default Backgrnd(Send).

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Common Settings].
4 User/Job Account
5 User Property
6
*********************
Common Settings
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu

Common Settings: a b appears.
1
*********************
Language
2 Default Screen
3 Sound
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Function Default].

8-32

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

4 Press the OK key. The Function Default menu

Function Default: a b appears.
1
*********************
Color Selection
2 Scan Resolution
3 FAX Resolution
[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [Backgrnd(Send)].

6 Press the OK key. Backgrnd(Send) appears.

Backgrnd(Send): a b
1
*********************
*Off
2 Auto
3 Manual(Darker 5)

7 Press the  or  key to select [Off], [Auto] or

[Manual(Darker 5)].

8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Function Default menu.
8
Con.scan-ExptFAX

Set the continuous scan defaults. The available default settings are shown below.

Item Description

Off Continuous scan not performed

On Continuous scan performed

Refer to page 4-14 for Continuous Scan.

Use the procedure below to select the default settings for continuous scanning.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Common Settings].
4 User/Job Account
5 User Property
6
*********************
Common Settings
[ Exit ]

8-33

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu

Common Settings: a b appears.
1
*********************
Language
2 Default Screen
3 Sound
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Function Default].

4 Press the OK key. The Function Default menu

Function Default: a b appears.
1
*********************
Color Selection
2 Scan Resolution
3 FAX Resolution
[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select

[Con.scan-ExptFAX].

6 Press the OK key. Continuous Scan appears.

Con.scan-ExptFAX: a b
1
*********************
*Off
2 On

7 Press the  or  key to select [Off] or [On].

8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Function Default menu.

Original Image (Copy)

Set the default original document type for copying. The available default settings are shown below.

Item Description

Text+Photo Text and photos together.

Photo For photos taken with a camera.

Text Only text, no photos.

Map For maps, etc.

Printed Document For documents printed from this machine.

8-34

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

Use the procedure below to select the default quality setting for originals for copying.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Common Settings].
4 User/Job Account
5 User Property
6
*********************
Common Settings
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu

Common Settings: a b appears.
1
*********************
Language
2 Default Screen
3 Sound
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Function Default].

4 Press the OK key. The Function Default menu

Function Default: a b appears.
1
*********************
Color Selection
2 Scan Resolution 8
3 FAX Resolution
[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select

[Orig.Image(Copy)].

6 Press the OK key. Orig.Image(Copy) appears.

Orig.Image(Copy): a b
1
*********************
*Text+Photo
2 Photo
3 Text

7 Press the  or  key to select [Text+Photo],

[Photo], [Text], [Map] or [Printed Document].

8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Function Default menu.

8-35

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

Original Image (Send)

Set the default original document type for sending. The available default settings are shown below.

Item Description

Text+Photo Text and photos together.

Photo For photos taken with a camera.

Text Only text, no photos.

for OCR Image quality suitable for OCR software.

Use the procedure below to select the default quality setting for originals for sending.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Common Settings].
4 User/Job Account
5 User Property
6
*********************
Common Settings
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu

Common Settings: a b appears.
1
*********************
Language
2 Default Screen
3 Sound
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Function Default].

4 Press the OK key. The Function Default menu

Function Default: a b appears.
1
*********************
Color Selection
2 Scan Resolution
3 FAX Resolution
[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select

[Orig.Image(Send)].

6 Press the OK key. Orig.Image(Send) appears.

Orig.Image(Send): a b
1
*********************
*Text+Photo
2 Photo
3 Text

8-36

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

7 Press the  or  key to select [Text+Photo],

[Photo], [Text] or [for OCR].

8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Function Default menu.

Scan Resolution

Select the default scanning resolution. The options are 600x600dpi, 400x400dpi U.Fin (Ultra Fine), 300x300dpi,
200x400dpi S.Fin (Super Fine), 200x200dpi Fine, 200x100dpi Norm. (Normal).

Use the procedure below to select the default resolution setting.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Common Settings].
4 User/Job Account
5 User Property
6
*********************
Common Settings
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu

Common Settings: a b appears.
1
*********************
Language
2 Default Screen
8
3 Sound
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Function Default].

4 Press the OK key. The Function Default menu

Function Default: a b appears.
1
*********************
Color Selection
2 Scan Resolution
3 FAX Resolution
[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [Scan Resolution].

6 Press the OK key. Scan Resolution appears.

Scan Resolution: a b
1
*********************
200x100dpi Norm.
2 200x200dpi Fine
3 200x400dpi S.Fin

7 Press the  or  key to select [200x100dpi

Norm.], [200x200dpi Fine], [200x400dpi S.Fin],
[300x300dpi], [400x400dpi U.Fin] or [600x600dpi].

8-37

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Function Default menu.

Color Selection

Select the default color mode setting. The available default settings are shown below.

<Copy>

Color mode Description

Auto Color Automatically recognize whether

documents are color or black and white.

Full Color Scan document in full color.

Black & White Scan document in black and white.

<FAX/Scan>

Color mode Description

Auto(Color/Gray) Color and black & white originals are

automatically detected. Color originals are
scanned in full color, and black & white
originals are scanned in shades of black &
white.

Auto(Color/B&W) Color and black & white originals are

automatically detected. Color originals are
scanned in full color, and black & white
originals are scanned in binary black &
white.

Full Color Scan document in full color.

Grayscale Scan document in grayscale for smoother

and finer finish.

Black & White Scan document in black and white.

Use the procedure below to select the default color mode setting.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Common Settings].
4 User/Job Account
5 User Property
6
*********************
Common Settings
[ Exit ]

8-38

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu

Common Settings: a b appears.
1
*********************
Language
2 Default Screen
3 Sound
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Function Default].

4 Press the OK key. The Function Default menu

Function Default: a b appears.
1
*********************
Color Selection
2 Scan Resolution
3 FAX Resolution
[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [Color Selection].

6 Press the OK key. Color Selection appears.

Color Selection: a b
1
*********************
Copy
2 Send/Store 8

7 Press the  or  key to select [Copy] or [Send/

Store].

8 Press the OK key. Color Selection appears.

Copy: a b
1
*********************
*Auto Color
2 Full Color
3 Black & White

9 If the  or  key was pressed to select Copy,

select [Auto Color], [Full Color], or [Black & White].
If Send or Save was selected, select [Auto (Color/
Gray)], [Auto (Color/B&W)], [Full Color],
[Grayscale], or [Black & White].

10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Function Default menu.

8-39

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

File Format

Select the default file type to send the scanned originals. The available default settings are shown below.

File Format Description

PDF Send files in PDF format.

TIFF Send files in TIFF format.

XPS Send files in XPS format.

JPEG Send files in JPEG format.

High Comp. PDF Send files in High Comp. PDF format.

NOTE: Refer to page 5-12 for file formats.

Use the procedure below to select the default file format.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Common Settings].
4 User/Job Account
5 User Property
6
*********************
Common Settings
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu

Common Settings: a b appears.
1
*********************
Language
2 Default Screen
3 Sound
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Function Default].

4 Press the OK key. The Function Default menu

Function Default: a b appears.
1
*********************
Color Selection
2 Scan Resolution
3 FAX Resolution
[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [File Format].

8-40

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

6 Press the OK key. File Format appears.

File Format: a b
1
*********************
*PDF
2 TIFF
3 XPS

7 Press the  or  key to select [PDF], [TIFF],

[XPS], [JPEG] or [High Comp. PDF].

8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Function Default menu.

Zoom

Select the enlarged/reduced default when paper size/sending size changed after the originals set. The available
default settings are shown below.

Item Description

100% Copy (send/save) at actual size (100%).

Auto Automatically reduce or enlarge the 8

originals to match paper size/ sending size.

Use the procedure below to select the default zoom setting.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Common Settings].
4 User/Job Account
5 User Property
6
*********************
Common Settings
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu

Common Settings: a b appears.
1
*********************
Language
2 Default Screen
3 Sound
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Function Default].

4 Press the OK key. The Function Default menu

Function Default: a b appears.
1
*********************
Color Selection
2 Scan Resolution
3 FAX Resolution
[ Exit ]

8-41

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

5 Press the  or  key to select [Zoom].

6 Press the OK key. Zoom appears.

Zoom: a b
1
*********************
*100%
2 Auto

7 Press the  or  key to select [100%] or [Auto].

8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Function Default menu.

File Name Entry

Set an automatically entered name (default) for jobs. Additional information such as Date and Time and Job No.
can also be set.

The table below lists the additional information available.

Item Description

None No additional information available.

Date Adds date and time.

Job No. Adds the job number.

Job No. + Date Adds the job number plus date and time.

Date + Job No. Adds date and time plus the job number.

NOTE:
• Refer to page 4-17 and page 5-20 for name entry.
• Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.

Use the procedure below to set the default file name.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Common Settings].
4 User/Job Account
5 User Property
6
*********************
Common Settings
[ Exit ]

8-42

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu

Common Settings: a b appears.
1
*********************
Language
2 Default Screen
3 Sound
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Function Default].

4 Press the OK key. The Function Default menu

Function Default: a b appears.
1
*********************
Color Selection
2 Scan Resolution
3 FAX Resolution
[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [File Name Entry].

6 Press the OK key. File Name Entry appears. Enter

File name Entry: A b the document name (up to 32 characters).
doc 1*
S 8
ABC
[ Text ]

7 Press the OK key. Additional Info appears.

Additional Info.: a b
1
*********************
None
2 Date
3 Job No.

8 Press the  or  key to select [None], [Date],

[JobNo.], [JobNo. + Date] or [Date + JobNo.].

9 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Function Default menu.

Subject/Body

Set the subject and body automatically entered (default subject and body) when sending the scanned originals
by E-mail.

NOTE:
• Refer to Send as E-mail on page 3-25.
• Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.

Use the procedure below to set the default e-mail subject and message body.

8-43

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Common Settings].
4 User/Job Account
5 User Property
6
*********************
Common Settings
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu

Common Settings: a b appears.
1
*********************
Language
2 Default Screen
3 Sound
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Function Default].

4 Press the OK key. The Function Default menu

Function Default: a b appears.
1
*********************
Color Selection
2 Scan Resolution
3 FAX Resolution
[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [Subject/Body].

6 Press the OK key. Subject Entry appears. Enter

Subject Entry: K b the e-mail subject (up to 60 characters).
abcdefghijklmnopqrstu
vwxyzABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP If you press the Back key, you can return to the
Function Default menu.
QRSTUVWXYZ* S
ABC
[ Text ]

7 Press the OK key. Body Entry appears. Enter e-

Body Entry: a b mail body text (up to 500 characters).
abcdefghijklmnopqrstu
vwxyzABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP If you press the Back key, you can return to
Subject Entry.
QRSTUVWXYZ*
ABC
[ Text ]

8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Function Default menu.

8-44

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

Collate

Set the defaults for Collate. The table below shows the available settings.

Item Description

Collate Off Collate not performed.

On Collate performed.

NOTE: Refer to page 3-19 for Collate/Offset.

Use the procedure below to set the default Collate/Offset settings.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Common Settings].
4 User/Job Account
5 User Property
6
*********************
Common Settings
[ Exit ]

Common Settings: a b
2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu
appears.
8
1
*********************
Language
2 Default Screen
3 Sound
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Function Default].

4 Press the OK key. The Function Default menu

Function Default: a b appears.
1
*********************
Color Selection
2 Scan Resolution
3 FAX Resolution
[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [Collate].

6 Press the OK key. Collate appears.

Collate: a b
1 Off
2 *On
*********************

7 Press the  or  key to select [Off] or [On].

8-45

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Function Default menu.

EcoPrint

EcoPrint conserves toner when printing. This is recommended for test copies where faded printing is not a
problem.

Select the EcoPrint default. The table below shows the available settings.

Item Description

Off No EcoPrint performed.

On EcoPrint performed.

NOTE: Refer to page 4-10 for EcoPrint.

Use the procedure below to set the default EcoPrint setting.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Common Settings].
4 User/Job Account
5 User Property
6
*********************
Common Settings
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu

Common Settings: a b appears.
1
*********************
Language
2 Default Screen
3 Sound
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Function Default].

4 Press the OK key. The Function Default menu

Function Default: a b appears.
1
*********************
Color Selection
2 Scan Resolution
3 FAX Resolution
[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [EcoPrint].

8-46

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

6 Press the OK key. EcoPrint appears.

EcoPrint: a b
1
*********************
*Off
2 On

7 Press the  or  key to select [Off] or [On].

8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Function Default menu.

JPEG/TIFF Print

Select the JPEG/TIFF Print default. The table below shows the available settings.

Item Description

Paper Size Scaled to fit the paper size.

Image Resolution Matched to the image resolution.

Print Resolution Matched to the print resolution.

8
NOTE: Refer to page 6-3 for JPEG/TIFF Print.

Use the procedure below to set the default JPEG/TIFF Print setting.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Common Settings].
4 User/Job Account
5 User Property
6
*********************
Common Settings
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu

Common Settings: a b appears.
1
*********************
Language
2 Default Screen
3 Sound
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Function Default].

8-47

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

4 Press the OK key. The Function Default menu

Function Default: a b appears.
1
*********************
Color Selection
2 Scan Resolution
3 FAX Resolution
[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [JPEG/TIFF Print].

6 Press the OK key. JPEG/TIFF Print appears.

JPEG/TIFF Print: a b
1 g
*********************
*Paper Size
2 Image Resolution T
3 Print Resolution T

7 Press the  or  key to select [Paper Size],

[Image Resolution] or [Print Resolution].

8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Function Default menu.

XPS FitTo Page

Reduces or enlarges the image size to fit to the selected paper size when printing XPS file.

Use the procedure below to set the default XPS FitTo Page setting.

NOTE: Refer to page 6-4 for XPS FitTo Page.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Common Settings].
4 User/Job Account
5 User Property
6
*********************
Common Settings
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu

Common Settings: a b appears.
1
*********************
Language
2 Default Screen
3 Sound
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Function Default].

8-48

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

4 Press the OK key. The Function Default menu

Function Default: a b appears.
1
*********************
Color Selection
2 Scan Resolution
3 FAX Resolution
[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [XPS FitTo Page].

6 Press the OK key. XPS FitTo Page appears.

XPS FitTo Page: a b
1
*********************
*Off
2 On

7 Press the  or  key to select [Off] or [On].

8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Function Default menu.

File Separation 8
Create several files by dividing scanned original data page by page, and send the files.

Use the procedure below to split scanned original data into separate files when sending scanned originals.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Common Settings].
4 User/Job Account
5 User Property
6
*********************
Common Settings
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu

Common Settings: a b appears.
1
*********************
Language
2 Default Screen
3 Sound
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Function Default].

4 Press the OK key. The Function Default menu

Function Default: a b appears.
1
*********************
Color Selection
2 Scan Resolution
3 FAX Resolution
[ Exit ]

8-49

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

5 Press the  or  key to select [File Separation].

6 Press the OK key. File Separation appears.

File Separation: a b
1
*********************
*Off
2 Each Page

7 Press the  or  key to select [Off] or [Each

Page].

8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Function Default menu.

2 in 1 Layout

Select the default value for layout when [2 in 1 Layout] is selected for Combine. Items available for the default
value are as follows:

Item Description

g L to R f T to B Arranges from left to right or top to bottom.

e R to L Arranges from right to left.

Use the procedure below to select the default value for layout.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Common Settings].
4 User/Job Account
5 User Property
6
*********************
Common Settings
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu

Common Settings: a b appears.
1
*********************
Language
2 Default Screen
3 Sound
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Function Default].

4 Press the OK key. The Function Default menu

Function Default: a b appears.
1
*********************
Color Selection
2 Scan Resolution
3 FAX Resolution
[ Exit ]

8-50

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

5 Press the  or  key to select [Detail Setting].

6 Press the OK key. The Detail Setting menu

Detail Setting: a b appears.
1
*********************
2 in 1 Layout
2 4 in 1 Layout
3 Border Line
[ Exit ]

7 Press the  or  key to select [2 in 1 Layout].

8 Press the OK key. 2 in 1 Layout appears.

2 in 1 Layout a b
1 *g L to R f T to B
*********************
2 e R to L

9 Press the  or  key to select [g L to R f T to

B] or [e R to L].

10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Detail Setting menu.
8
4 in 1 Layout

Select the default value for layout when [4 in 1 Layout] is selected for Combine. Items available for the default
value are as follows:

Item Description

h Right then Down Arranges from upper left to right.

i Down then Right Arranges from upper left to bottom.

j Left then Down Arranges from upper right to left.

k Down then Left Arranges from upper right to bottom.

Use the procedure below to select the default value for layout.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Common Settings].
4 User/Job Account
5 User Property
6
*********************
Common Settings
[ Exit ]

8-51

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu

Common Settings: a b appears.
1
*********************
Language
2 Default Screen
3 Sound
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Function Default].

4 Press the OK key. The Function Default menu

Function Default: a b appears.
1
*********************
Color Selection
2 Scan Resolution
3 FAX Resolution
[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [Detail Setting].

6 Press the OK key. The Detail Setting menu

Detail Setting: a b appears.
1
*********************
2 in 1 Layout
2 4 in 1 Layout
3 Border Line
[ Exit ]

7 Press the  or  key to select [4 in 1 Layout].

8 Press the OK key. 4 in 1 Layout appears.

4 in 1 Layout: a b
1
*********************
*h Right then Down
2 i Down then Right
3 j Left then Down

9 Press the  or  key to select [h Right then

Down], [i Down then Right], [j Left then Down]
or [k Down then Left].

10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Detail Setting menu.

8-52

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

Border Line

Select the default value for border line when [2 in 1 Layout] or [4 in 1 Layout] is selected for Combine. Items
available for the default value are as follows:

Item Description

None No border line.

l Solid Line Draws solid border lines.

m Dotted Line Draws dotted border lines.

n Positioning Mark Puts a mark on the border line position.

Use the procedure below to select the default value for border line.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Common Settings].
4 User/Job Account
5 User Property
6
*********************
Common Settings
[ Exit ]
8
2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu
Common Settings: a b appears.
1
*********************
Language
2 Default Screen
3 Sound
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Function Default].

4 Press the OK key. The Function Default menu

Function Default: a b appears.
1
*********************
Color Selection
2 Scan Resolution
3 FAX Resolution
[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [Detail Setting].

6 Press the OK key. The Detail Setting menu

Detail Setting: a b appears.
1
*********************
2 in 1 Layout
2 4 in 1 Layout
3 Border Line
[ Exit ]

7 Press the  or  key to select [Border Line].

8-53

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

8 Press the OK key. Border Line appears.

Border Line: a b
1
*********************
* None
2 l Solid Line
3 m Dotted Line

9 Press the  or  key to select [ None], [l Solid

Line], [m Dotted Line] or [n Positioning Mark].

10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Detail Setting menu.

Orig. Binding

Select the default value for the binding edge of the original when [2-sided>>1-sided] or [2-sided>>2-sided] is
selected for Duplex. Items available for the default value are as follows:

Item Description

o Left/Right Left/right binding

p Top Top binding

Use the procedure below to select the default value for the binding edge of the original.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Common Settings].
4 User/Job Account
5 User Property
6
*********************
Common Settings
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu

Common Settings: a b appears.
1
*********************
Language
2 Default Screen
3 Sound
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Function Default].

8-54

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

4 Press the OK key. The Function Default menu

Function Default: a b appears.
1
*********************
Color Selection
2 Scan Resolution
3 FAX Resolution
[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [Detail Setting].

6 Press the OK key. The Detail Setting menu

Detail Setting: a b appears.
1
*********************
2 in 1 layout
2 4 in 1 Layout
3 Border Line
[ Exit ]

7 Press the  or  key to select [Orig. Binding].

8 Press the OK key. Orig. Binding appears.

Orig. Binding: a b
1
*********************
*o Left/Right
2 p Top 8

9 Press the  or  key to select [o Left/Right] or

[ p Top].

10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Detail Setting menu.

8-55

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

Finish Binding

Select the default value for the binding edge of the finished copies when [1-sided>>2-sided] or [2-sided>>2-
sided] is selected for Duplex. Items available for the default value are as follows:

Item Description

o Left/Right Left/right binding

p Top Top binding

Use the procedure below to select the default value for the binding edge of the finished copies.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Common Settings].
4 User/Job Account
5 User Property
6
*********************
Common Settings
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu

Common Settings: a b appears.
1
*********************
Language
2 Default Screen
3 Sound
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Function Default].

4 Press the OK key. The Function Default menu

Function Default: a b appears.
1
*********************
Color Selection
2 Scan Resolution
3 FAX Resolution
[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [Detail Setting].

6 Press the OK key. The Detail Setting menu

Detail Setting: a b appears.
1
*********************
2 in 1 Layout
2 4 in 1 Layout
3 Border Line
[ Exit ]

7 Press the  or  key to select [Finish Binding].

8-56

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

8 Press the OK key. Finish Binding appears.

Finish. Binding: a b
1
*********************
*o Left/Right
2 p Top

9 Press the  or  key to select [ o Left/Right] or

[p Top].

10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Detail Setting menu.

Image Quality

Select the default value for image quality when File Format is selected. Select the default value in the range
from [1 Low(High Comp)] (high compression) to [5 High(Low Comp)] (low compression).

Use the procedure below to select the default value for image quality.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Common Settings].
4 User/Job Account
5 User Property
8
6
*********************
Common Settings
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu

Common Settings: a b appears.
1
*********************
Language
2 Default Screen
3 Sound
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Function Default].

4 Press the OK key. The Function Default menu

Function Default: a b appears.
1
*********************
Color Selection
2 Scan Resolution
3 FAX Resolution
[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [Detail Setting].

8-57

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

6 Press the OK key. The Detail Setting menu

Detail Setting: a b appears.
1
*********************
2 in 1 layout
2 4 in 1 Layout
3 Border Line
[ Exit ]

7 Press the  or  key to select [Image Quality].

8 Press the OK key. Image Quality appears.

Image Quality: a b
1
*********************
*1 Low(High Comp)
2 2
3 3

9 Press the  or  key to select from [1 Low(High

Comp)] to [5 High(Low Comp)].

10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Detail Setting menu.

Color TIFF Comp.

Set the default value for compression method for TIFF images handled by this machine.

Use the procedure below to set the default value for color TIFF compression method.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Common Settings].
4 User/Job Account
5 User Property
6
*********************
Common Settings
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu

Common Settings: a b appears.
1
*********************
Language
2 Default Screen
3 Sound
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Function Default].

8-58

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

4 Press the OK key. The Function Default menu

Function Default: a b appears.
1
*********************
Color Selection
2 Scan Resolution
3 FAX Resolution
[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [Detail Setting].

6 Press the OK key. The Detail Setting menu

Detail Setting: a b appears.
1
*********************
2 in 1 layout
2 4 in 1 Layout
3 Border Line
[ Exit ]

7 Press the  or  key to select [Color TIFF

Comp.].

8 Press the OK key. Color TIFF Comp. appears.

Color TIFF Comp.: a b
1
*********************
*TIFF V6 8
2 TTN2

9 Press the  or  key to select [TIFF V6] or

[TTN2].

10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Detail Setting menu.

PDF/A setting

You can set the default PDF/A setting used in the machine.

The procedure for specifying the default PDF/A setting is explained below.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Common Settings].
4 User/Job Account
5 User Property
6
*********************
Common Settings
[ Exit ]

8-59

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu

Common Settings: a b appears.
1
*********************
Language
2 Default Screen
3 Sound
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Function Default].

4 Press the OK key. The Function Default menu

Function Default: a b appears.
1
*********************
Color Selection
2 Scan Resolution
3 FAX Resolution
[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [Detail Setting].

6 Press the OK key. The Detail Setting menu

Detail Setting: a b appears.
1
*********************
2 in 1 layout
2 4 in 1 Layout
3 Border Line
[ Exit ]

7 Press the  or  key to select [PDF/A].

8 Press the OK key. The PDF/A menu appears.

PDF/A: a b
1
*********************
*Off
2 PDF/A-1a
3 PDF/A-1b

9 Press the  or  key to select [Off], [PDF/A-1a],

or [PDF/A-1b].

10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Detail Setting menu.

8-60

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

High Comp.PDF

Select the default quality setting for high compressed PDF files.

The table below shows the available settings.

Item Description

Compression Ratio Priority Compression Ratio is given priority with

smaller file size.

Standard Standard quality

Quality Priority Image quality is given priority with larger file

size.

Use the procedure below to select the default setting for High Comp.PDF.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Common Settings].
4 User/Job Account
5 User Property
6
*********************
Common Settings
[ Exit ] 8
2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu
Common Settings: a b appears.
1
*********************
Language
2 Default Screen
3 Sound
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Function Default].

4 Press the OK key. The Function Default menu

Function Default: a b appears.
1
*********************
Color Selection
2 Scan Resolution
3 FAX Resolution
[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [Detail Setting].

6 Press the OK key. The Detail Setting menu

Detail Setting: a b appears.
1
*********************
2 in 1 layout
2 4 in 1 Layout
3 Border Line
[ Exit ]

8-61

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

7 Press the  or  key to select [High Comp.PDF].

8 Press the OK key. The High Comp.PDF menu

High Comp.PDF: a b appears.
1
*********************
*Comp. Priority
2 Standard
3 Quality Priority

9 Press the  or  key to select [Comp. Priority],

[Standard], or [Quality Priority].

10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Detail Setting menu.

Login Operation
Specify the character entry method in the login screen that appears when user management is enabled.

Item Description

Use Numeric Key Use the numeric keys to select and enter
characters.

Select Character Enter characters by selecting them from

the character palette that appears.

Use the procedure below to adjust the Login Operation.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Common Settings].
4 User/Job Account
5 User Property
6
*********************
Common Settings
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu

Common Settings: a b appears.
1
*********************
Language
2 Default Screen
3 Sound
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Login Operation].

8-62

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

4 Press the OK key. Login Operation appears.

Login Operation: a b
1
*********************
*Use Numeric Key
2 Select Character

5 Press the  or  key to select [Use Numeric Key]

or [Select Character].

6 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Common Settings menu.

RAM Disk Mode

A RAM disk can be created and its size can be set. Creating a RAM disk makes it possible to print from a Job
Box.

The procedure for setting the RAM Disk Mode is explained below.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Common Settings].
4 User/Job Account 8
5 User Property
6
*********************
Common Settings
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu

Common Settings: a b appears.
1
*********************
Language
2 Default Screen
3 Sound
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [RAM Disk Mode].

4 Press the OK key. RAM Disk Mode appears.

RAM Disk Mode: a b
1
*********************
*Off
2 On

5 Press the  or  key to select [Off] or [On].

8-63

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

6 Press the OK key. If [Off] is selected and the OK

RAM Disk Mode: D b key is pressed, proceed to step 8. If [On] is
(1 - 64) selected, the RAM disk size screen appears.
**32* MB

7 Enter the size of the RAM disk with the numeric

keys.

8 Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears.

Restart.
Are you sure?

[ Yes ] [ No ]

9 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The machine is

restarted.

Format SSD
When an optional SSD is inserted into the machine for the first time, it must be formatted before use.

This menu is displayed only when the SSD is installed on the machine.

NOTE: If the SSD is installed in the machine, the Document Box will be available. Formatting will destroy any
existing data on a storage device including a used SSD. Formatting of the SSD must be executed from the
machine. When the SSD has not yet been formatted, the Attention lamp flashes and Format SSD is displayed.

Use the procedure below to format the SSD.

When a new SSD is inserted in the machine's slot, Format SSD will appear on the message display.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Common Settings].
4 User/Job Account
5 User Property
6
*********************
Common Settings
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu

Common Settings: a b appears.
1
*********************
Language
2 Default Screen
3 Sound
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Format SSD].

8-64

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

4 Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears.

Format.
Are you sure?
z SSD

[ Yes ] [ No ]

5 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The

Formatting... screen appears and SSD formatting
begins. Once the formatting ends, the Common
Settings menu reappears.
Press [No] (the Right Select key) returns to the
Common Settings menu without formatting the
SSD.

Format SD Card
The machine is equipped with a slot for an SD card.

A new SD card must be formatted before it can be used in the machine. Formatting allows data to be written to
the SD card.

IMPORTANT: Format SD Card is only displayed when an SD card is installed in the machine and protection is 8
disabled.

NOTE: Formatting will destroy any existing data on a storage device including a used SD card.
Formatting of the SD card must be executed from the machine.

When a new SD card is inserted in the machine's slot, Format SD Card will appear on the message display.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Common Settings].
4 User/Job Account
5 User Property
6
*********************
Common Settings
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu

Common Settings: a b appears.
1
*********************
Language
2 Default Screen
3 Sound
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Format SD Card].

8-65

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

4 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu

Format. appears.
Are you sure?
z SD Card

[ Yes ] [ No ]

5 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The Formatting

SD card... screen appears and SD card formatting
begins. Once the formatting ends, the Common
Settings menu reappears.
Press [No] (the Right Select key) returns to the
Common Settings menu without formatting the SD
card.

Optional Memory
If optional memory is installed, you can specify whether most of the memory is allocated to the copy function or
the print function.

Item Description

Normal The optional memory is allocated to the

copy function or the print function based on
a previously selected setting.

Copy Priority This allocates most memory to data

spooling for sort copy. When copy priority is
specified, the number of pages that can be
printed in sort copying increases.

Printer Priority The amount of memory allocated to RAM

disk memory and the amount of memory
allocated to drawing can be increased.
When print priority is specified, the
maximum value that can be set in RAM
disk mode increases.

Use the procedure below to adjust the Optional Memory.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Common Settings].
4 User/Job Account
5 User Property
6
*********************
Common Settings
[ Exit ]

8-66

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu

Common Settings: a b appears.
1
*********************
Language
2 Default Screen
3 Sound
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Optional Memory].

4 Press the OK key. Optional Memory appears.

Optional Memory: a b
1
*********************
*Normal
2 Printer Priority
3 Copy Priority

5 Press the  or  key to select [Normal], [Printer

Priority] or [Copy Priority].

6 Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears.

Restart.
Are you sure? 8

[ Yes ] [ No ]

7 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The machine is

restarted.

8-67

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

TonerAlert Level
Set the amount of remaining toner to alert low toner.

The procedure for setting the TonerAlert Level is explained below.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.: a b key to select [Common Settings].
4 User/Job Account
5 User Property
6
*********************
Common Settings
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu

Common Settings: a b appears.
1
*********************
Language
2 Default Screen
3 Sound
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [TonerAlert Level].

4 Press the OK key. TonerAlert Level appears.

TonerAlert Level: a b
1
*********************
*Off
2 On

5 Press the  or  key to select [Off] or [On].

6 If [On] is selected and the OK key is pressed, the

Toner Level: M b Toner Level screen appears.
(5 - 100)
********%
5 If [Off] is selected and the OK key is pressed,
proceed to step 8.

7 Press the  or  key or the numeric keys to set

the level at which an alert will be displayed.

8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Common Settings menu.

8-68

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

Copy Settings
The following settings are available for copying functions.

• Paper Selection …8-69

• Auto Paper Selection …8-70
• Auto % Priority …8-71
• DP Read Action …8-72
• Select Key Set …8-73

NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with
administrator privileges.

Paper Selection
Set the default paper selection. The table below shows the available settings.

Item Description

Auto Automatically select the cassette

containing paper in the same size as 8
originals.

Def. PaperSource Select paper source set by Default Paper

Source (refer to page 8-22).

Use the procedure below to set the default paper selection.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Copy].
7
*********************
Copy
8 Printer
9 Send
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Copy menu appears.

Copy: a b
1
*********************
Paper Selection
2 AutoPaperSelect.
3 Auto % Priority
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Paper Selection].

8-69

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

4 Press the OK key. Paper Selection appears.

Paper Selection: a b
1
*********************
*Auto
2 Def. PaperSource

5 Press the  or  key to select [Auto] or [Def.

Paper Source].

6 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Copy menu.

Auto Paper Selection

If [Auto] is selected for Paper Selection, set the paper size selection method when the zoom changes. The table
below shows the available settings.

Item Description

MostSuitableSize Select paper based on the current zoom

and the size of the original.

Same as OrigSize Select paper that matches the size of the

original, regardless the zoom.

Use the procedure below to specify the action performed for Auto Paper Selection.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Copy].
7
*********************
Copy
8 Printer
9 Send
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Copy menu appears.

Copy: a b
1
*********************
Paper Selection
2 AutoPaperSelect.
3 Auto % Priority
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [AutoPaperSelect.].

8-70

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

4 Press the OK key. AutoPaperSelect. appears.

AutoPaperSelect.:a b
1
*********************
*MostSuitableSize
2 Same as OrigSize

5 Press the  or  key to select [MostSuitableSize]

or [Same as OrigSize].

6 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Copy menu.

Auto % Priority
When a paper source of different size from the original is selected, select whether automatic zoom (reduce/
zoom) is performed.

The table below shows the available settings. The default setting is Off.

Item Detail

Off No zoom performed (copied in original size).

8
On Automatic zoom performed as appropriate.

Use the procedure below to specify the automatic zoom priority.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Copy].
7
*********************
Copy
8 Printer
9 Send
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Copy menu appears.

Copy: a b
1
*********************
Paper Selection
2 AutoPaperSelect.
3 Auto % Priority
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Auto % Priority].

8-71

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

4 Press the OK key. AutoPaperSelect. appears.

Auto % Priority: a b
1
*********************
*Off
2 On

5 Press the  or  key to select [Off] or [On].

6 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Copy menu.

DP Read Action
You can set whether priority is given to speed or image quality when scanning an original on the document
processor.

The table below shows the available settings. The default setting is Speed Priority.

Item Detail

Speed Priority Priority is given to speed when scanning

Quality Priority Priority is given to image quality when scanning

Use the procedure below to specify the DP Read Action.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Copy].
7
*********************
Copy
8 Printer
9 Send
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Copy menu appears.

Copy: a b
1
*********************
Paper Selection
2 AutoPaperSelect.
3 Auto % Priority
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [DP Read Action].

4 Press the OK key. DP Read Action appears.

DP Read Action: a b
1
*********************
*Speed Priority
2 Quality Priority

8-72

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

5 Press the  or  key to select [Speed Priority] or

[Quality Priority].

6 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Copy menu.

Select Key Set

If you register a function to the Left Select key or Right Select key, you can quickly set the function when using
copy functions.

You can register one of the following functions to each key.

• None
• Paper Selection
• Collate
• Duplex
• Zoom
• Combine
• Original Size
8
• Orig.Orientation
• Original Image
• Density
• EcoPrint
• Continuous Scan
• File Name Entry
• JobFinish Notice
• Print Override
• Color Selection
• Color Balance
• Sharpness
• Backgrnd Density
• Saturation

Use the procedure below to set Select Key Set.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Copy].
7
*********************
Copy
8 Printer
9 Send
[ Exit ]

8-73

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

2 Press the OK key. The Copy menu appears.

Copy: a b
1
*********************
Paper Selection
2 AutoPaperSelect.
3 Auto % Priority
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Select Key Set.].

4 Press the OK key. Select Key Set. menu appears.

Select Key Set.: a b
1 Left
*********************
2 Right

[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [Left] or [Right].

6 Press the OK key. This displays the function

Left: a b selection screen for the flexible key selected in
4 Duplex step 5. The screen shown is the one when [Left] is
5
*********************
*Zoom selected.
6 Combine

7 Press the  or  key to select the function you

want to register to the flexible key.

8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Select Key Set. menu.

IMPORTANT: If you try to set the function that is

This function is registered to the other flexible key, you cannot set it and
already registered. This function is already registered. is displayed.

8-74

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

Sending Settings
The sending settings allow you to specify the following sending function options.

• Select Key Set …8-75

• Destination confirmation screen before transmission …8-77
• Default Screen …8-78
• Send and Forward …8-79

NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with
administrator privileges.

Select Key Set

If you register a function to the Left Select key or Right Select key, you can quickly set the function when using
sending functions.

You can register one of the following functions to each key.

• None
• Color Selection
8
• Original Size
• Original Image
• Scan Resolution
• Sending Size
• Zoom
• Orig.Orientation
• Continuous Scan
• File Format
• File Name Entry
• Subject/Body
• JobFinish Notice
• FAX Resolution
• FAX Direct TX
• FAX Delayed TX
• FAX RX Polling
• FAX TX Report
• Density
• Duplex
• FTP Encrypted TX
• File Separation
• Sharpness
• Backgrnd Density

8-75

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

Use the procedure below to set Select Key Set.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Send].
7 Copy
8 Printer
9
*********************
Send
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Send menu appears.

Send: a b
1
*********************
Select Key Set.
2 DestinationCheck
3 Default Screen
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Select Key Set.].

4 Press the OK key. Select Key Set. menu appears.

Select Key Set.: a b
1
*********************
Left
2 Right

[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [Left] or [Right].

6 Press the OK key. This displays the function

Left: a b selection screen for the flexible key selected in
2 Color Selection step 5. The screen shown is the one when [Left] is
3
*********************
Original Size selected.
4 Original Image

7 Press the  or  key to select the function you

want to register to the flexible key.

8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Select Key Set. menu.

IMPORTANT: If you try to set the function that is

This function is registered to the other flexible key, you cannot set it and
already registered. This function is already registered. is displayed.

8-76

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

Destination confirmation screen before transmission

You can specify whether or not the destination confirmation screen appears after the Start key is pressed or
after a destination is added or edited before transmission.

The table below shows the available settings.

Item Detail

Check beforeSend Specify whether or not the destination

confirmation screen appears before
transmission.

Check New Dest. Specify whether or not the destination

confirmation screen appears when the
destination is new.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Send].
7 Copy
8 Printer
9
*********************
Send
[ Exit ] 8
2 Press the OK key. The Send menu appears.
Send: a b
1
*********************
Select Key Set.
2 DestinationCheck
3 Default Screen
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select

[DestinationCheck].

4 Press the OK key. The destination confirmation

DestinationCheck:a b menu appears.
1
*********************
Check beforeSend
2 Check New Dest.

[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [Check before

Send] or [Check New Dest.].

8-77

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

6 Press the OK key. The menu of the selected

Check beforeSend:a b function appears.
1
*********************
*OFF
2 On The screen when the Check before Send menu is
selected is shown.

7 Press the  or  key to select the desired

function.

8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the destination confirmation
menu.

Default Screen
Set the default screen displayed when you press the Send key.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Send].
7 Copy
8 Printer
9
*********************
Send
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Send menu appears.

Send: a b
1
*********************
Select Key Set.
2 DestinationCheck
3 Default Screen
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Default Screen].

4 Press the OK key. The Default Screen appears.

Default Screen: a b
1
*********************
*Destination
2 Address Book

5 Press the  or  key to select [Destination] or

[Address Book].

6 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Send menu.

8-78

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

Send and Forward

Select whether to forward the original to another destination when sending images.

Displaying Send and Forward Menu

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Send].
7 Copy
8 Printer
9
*********************
Send
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Send menu appears.

Send: a b
1
*********************
Select Key Set.
2 DestinationCheck
3 Default Screen
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Send and

Forward].
8
4 Press the OK key. The Send and Forward menu
Send and Forward: a b appears.
1
*********************
Forward
2 Destination

Forward

Select whether to forward the original.

1 In the Send and Forward menu, press the  or 

Send and Forward: a b key to select [Forward].
1
*********************
Forward
2 Destination

2 Press the OK key. Forward appears.

Forward: a b
1
*********************
*Off
2 On

8-79

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

3 Press the  or  key to select [Off] or [on].

If [On] is selected and the OK key is pressed, the

Forward Rule screen appears.

If [Off] is selected and the OK key is pressed,

proceed to step 6.

4 Press the  or  key to select the Forward Rule.

Forward: a b
1 p E-mail T
*********************
2 G Folder(SMB) T
3 H Folder(FTP) T
[ Select ]

5 Press [Select] (the Right Select key). The

selected file name is indicated by a checkmark
next to it.

If you need to add the Forward Rule, repeat steps

4 to 5 to select them.

6 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

Send and Forward: a b screen returns to the Send and Forward menu.
1
*********************
Forward
2 Destination

Setting the destination

Set the destination to which the original is forwarded.

Use the procedure below to set the destination.

1 In the Send and Forward menu, press the  or 

Send and Forward: a b key to select [Destination].
1
*********************
Forward
2 Destination

2 Press the OK key. The Destination menu appears.

Destination: a b
1
*********************
Confirmation
2 Register

[ Exit ]

8-80

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

Confirming Current Destination

1 In the Destination menu, press the  or  key to
Destination: a b select [Confirmation].
1
*********************
Confirmation
2 Register

[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. Dest. Confirm. appears.

Dest. Confirm.: a b
p Morgan@###########
*********************N
NOTE: Press the OK key to edit/delete the current
destination.Refer to Character Entry Method on
Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
[ Exit ]

3 Press [Exit] (the Right Select key). The basic

screen reappears.

Registering Destination
1 In the Destination menu, press the  or  key to
Destination: a b select [Register]. 8
1 Confirmation
2
*********************
Register

[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. Register appears.

Register: a b
1
*********************
Address Book To select a destination from the address book,
2 Address Entry press the  or  key to select [Address Book] and
then press the OK key. This displays the address
book. Select your desired destination.

NOTE: For selecting a destination from the address

book, refer to Specifying Destination on page 3-41.

To directly enter a destination, press the  or 

key to select [Address Entry] and then press the
OK key. This displays an entry screen. Enter the
destination address directly.

3 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

Completed. screen returns to the Destination menu.

8-81

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

NOTE: If the address of the selected destination has

Register: a b been changed after you selected the destination from
1 Address Book the address book, [*] is displayed before [Address
2 *Address Entry
********************* Entry]. Refer to Confirming Current Destination on 8-
81 and reconfirm the destination address.

8-82

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

Document Box Settings

The following settings are available for Document Box.

• Select Key Set …8-83

• Custom Box …8-85
• Job Box …8-97

Select Key Set

If you register a function to the Left Select key or Right Select key, you can quickly set the function when
printing from or saving to a document box.

You can register one of the following functions to each key for either of printing from and saving to a document
box.

Print
• None
• Collate
• Paper Selection
• Duplex
• EcoPrint
8
• File Name Entry
• JobFinish Notice
• Print Override
• Color Selection
• Encrypted PDF
• JPEG/TIFF Print
• XPS FitTo Page
• Del. afterPrint

Store
• None
• Color Selection
• Original Size
• Original Image
• Scan Resolution
• Storing Size
• Zoom
• Orig.Orientation
• Continuous Scan
• File Format
• File Separation
• File Name Entry

8-83

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

• JobFinish Notice
• Density
• Duplex
• Sharpness
• Backgrnd Density

Use the procedure below to set Select Key Set.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Document Box].
;
*********************
Document Box
< Edit Destination
= Adjust/Maint.
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Document Box menu

Document Box: a b appears.
1
*********************
Custom Box
2 Sub Address Box
3 Job Box
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Select Key Set.].

4 Press the OK key. Select Key Set. menu appears.

Select Key Set.: a b
1
*********************
Print
2 Store

[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [Print] or [Store].

6 Press the OK key. This displays the flexible key

Print: a b selection screen for the function selected in step 5.
1
*********************
Left The screen shown is the one when [Print] is
2 Right selected.

[ Exit ]

7 Press the  or  key to select [Left] or [Right].

8 Press the OK key. This displays the function

Left: a b selection screen for the flexible key selected in
1
*********************
None step 7. The screen shown is the one when [Left] is
2 Collate selected.
3 Paper Selection

8-84

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

9 Press the  or  key to select the function you

want to register to the flexible key.

10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the flexible key selection screen.

IMPORTANT: If you try to set the function that is

This function is registered to the other flexible key, you cannot set it and
already registered. This function is already registered. is displayed.

Custom Box

IMPORTANT: To use a Custom Box, an optional SSD must be installed in the machine. The SSD must be
formatted from the machine. For more information, refer to Format SSD on 8-64.

NOTE: On network compatible models, the creation and setting of Custom Boxes is also possible from
Command Center RX.
8
Displaying Custom Box Menu
1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Document Box].
;
*********************
Document Box
< Edit Destination
= Adjust/Maint.
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Document Box menu

Document Box: a b appears.
1
*********************
Custom Box
2 Sub Address Box
3 Job Box
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Custom Box].

4 Press the OK key. The Custom Box menu

Custom Box: a b appears.
1
*********************
Detail/Edit
2 File Del. Time

[ Exit ]

8-85

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

Custom Box creation

Create a Custom Box. Enter the Box Name and Box Number then it is possible to continue on and set the details
of the Box.

NOTE: When user login administration is enabled, log in as a user with administrator authority.

The procedure for Custom Box creation is explained below.

1 In the Custom Box menu, press the  or  key to

Custom Box: a b select [Detail/Edit].
1
*********************
Detail/Edit
2 File Del. Time

[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Custom Box list appears.

Custom Box: a b
0001q
*********************
Dandoko
0002q DANDOKO box
0003q DBox
[ Menu ]

3 Press [Menu] (the Right Select key). Menu

Menu: a b appears.
1
*********************
Detail/Edit
2 Delete
3 Add Box

4 In the Menu screen, select the [Add Box] and press

Box Name Entry: a b the OK key. The Box Name Entry screen appears.
*
S
ABC
[ Text ]

5 Enter the Box Name using the numeric keys.

NOTE: Up to 32 characters can be entered.

8-86

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

6 Press the OK key. The Box Number Entry screen

Box Number Entry: a b appears.
(0001 - 1000)
/0003-

*[0000]:Auto

7 Use the numeric keys or press the  or  key to

enter the Box Number.

NOTE: Enter the Box Number as a four-digit number

from 0001 - 1000.

8 Press the OK key.

q Box03: a b
1
********************-
Exit
2 Detail

9 Press the  or  key to select [Detail] or [Exit] 8

then press the OK key.

To set the details of the Box, select [Detail] and

proceed to Detailed box settings on page 8-87.

If the details of the Box will not be set then select

[Exit] and finish the operation.

Detailed box settings

Set the details of the Box when necessary. The items to set are different between when user login administration
is not enabled, when user login administration is enabled and the user is logged in with administrator authority
and when user login administration is enabled and the user is logged in with user authority.

Detail: P b
Box Name: 1/9
Box03

[ Edit ]

8-87

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

The detailed settings for the Box are as shown below.

User login On
Setting User login Off Reference Page
Administ
User
rator

Box Name Yes Yes Yes Box Name (Change the Box name) on 8-
88

Owner – Yes No Owner (Owner settings) on 8-89

Permission – Yes Yes Permission (settings for the sharing of a

Box) on 8-90

Box Password Yes Yes Yes Box Password (Box password setting) on
8-90

Box Number Yes Yes Yes Box number (Change of the Box
number) on 8-91

Usage Restrict. Yes Yes No Usage Restrict. (Setting for maximum

possible capacity usage) on 8-92

Auto File Del. Yes Yes Yes Auto File Del. (Setting for automatic file
deletion) on 8-92

Overwrite Set. Yes Yes Yes Overwrite Set. (Setting of overwrite

storage) on 8-93

Del. afterPrint Yes Yes Yes Del. afterPrint (Setting for file deletion after
printing) on 8-94

Yes: The setting can be changed.

No: The setting cannot be changed.
–: No setting

Box Name (Change the Box name)

Change the Box name.

1 In the Detail menu screen, press the  or  key to

Detail: P b select [Box Name].
Box Name: 1/9
Box03

[ Edit ]

2 Press [Edit] (the Right Select key). The Box Name

Box Name Entry: a b Entry screen appears.
Box03*
S
ABC
[ Text ]

8-88

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

3 Enter the Box Name using the numeric keys.

NOTE: Up to 32 characters can be entered.

4 Press the OK key. The Detail menu screen

reappears.

Owner (Owner settings)

When user login administration is enabled, set the owner of the Box. If the owner is not set then the owner name
is displayed as -----.

1 In the Detail menu screen, press the  or  key to

Detail: P b select [Owner].
Owner: 2/9
Smith

[ Change ]

2 Press [Change] (the Right Select key). The

Owner: a b Owner setting screen appears.
1
********************-
Local User 8
2 Network User
3 None

3 Press the  or  key to select [Local User] or

[Network User].

NOTE: When [Local User] is selected, select the user

that you want to set as the owner and press the OK
key.
If the owner will not be set then select [None] and
press the OK key.

4 Press the OK key. The Login User Name screen

Login User Name: a b appears.
*

ABC
[ Text ]

5 Enter the Login User Name using the numeric

keys.

NOTE: Up to 64 characters can be entered.

8-89

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

6 Press the OK key. The Detail menu screen

reappears.

Permission (settings for the sharing of a Box)

When user login administration is enabled, this setting determines whether or not a Box will be shared with other
users.

1 In the Detail menu screen, press the  or  key to

Detail: P b select [Permission].
Permission: 3/9
Shared

[ Change ]

2 Press [Change] (the Right Select key). The

Permission: a b Permission screen appears.
1
********************-
*Shared
2 Private

3 Press the  or  key to select [Shared] or

[Private].

4 Press the OK key. The Detail menu screen

reappears.

Box Password (Box password setting)

It is possible to set a password for a box and restrict the users who have access to it. Enter one if necessary.

NOTE: This setting is not displayed when user login administration is enabled and the Permission (settings
for the sharing of a Box) on page 8-90 has been set to [Private].

1 In the Detail menu screen, press the  or  key to

Detail: P b select [Box Password].
Box Password: 4/9


[ Edit ]

2 Press [Edit] (the Right Select key). The New

New Password: a b Password entry screen appears.
* S

ABC
[ Text ]

8-90

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

3 Enter the new password using the numeric keys.

NOTE: Up to 16 characters can be entered.

4 Press the OK key. The Confirm Password entry

Confirm Password: a b screen appears.
* S

ABC
[ Text ]

5 To confirm, re-enter the password to be registered.

Enter the password using the numeric keys.

6 Press the OK key. If the password is correct, the

setting is changed to the new password and the
Detail menu screen reappears.

If the password is not correct, the display shows

Incorrect password. and returns to the New
Password screen, so enter again from the new
password. 8
Box number (Change of the Box number)

Change the Box number.

1 In the Detail menu screen, press the  or  key to

Detail: P b select [Box Number].
Box Number: 5/9
0002

[ Edit ]

2 Press [Edit] (the Right Select key). The Box Name

Box Number Entry: a b Entry screen appears.
(0001 - 1000)
/0002-

3 Use the numeric keys or press the  or  key to

enter the Box Number.

NOTE: Enter the Box Number as a four-digit number

from 0001 - 1000.
If the display shows This box number is already
registered., this Box Number is already in use.
Register a different Box Number.

8-91

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

4 Press the OK key. The Detail menu screen

reappears.

Usage Restrict. (Setting for maximum possible capacity usage)

It is possible to restrict the capacity of Boxes in order to preserve the SSD capacity. To limit the usage capacity,
enter the maximum value (MB) using the numeric keys. The limit value will vary depending on the number of
user Boxes that are created, but it is possible to enter the maximum between 1 and 30,000 (MB).

1 In the Detail menu screen, press the  or  key to

Detail: P b select [Usage Restrict.].
Usage Restrict.: 6/9
200MB

[ Change ]

2 Press [Change] (the Right Select key). The Usage

Usage Restrict.: a b Restrict. screen appears.
(1 - 30000)
/**200-MB

3 Enter the limit value using the numeric keys, the 

or  key.

4 Press the OK key. The Detail menu screen

reappears.

Auto File Del. (Setting for automatic file deletion)

This automatically deletes the documents that have been saved after a fixed period. Set to [On] for the
automatic deletion and then enter the number of days that the documents will be stored. Between 1 and 31
(days) can be entered. Set to [Off] if automatic deletion will not be used.

1 In the Detail menu screen, press the  or  key to

Detail: P b select [Auto File Del.].
Auto File Del.: 7/9
Off

[ Change ]

2 Press [Change] (the Right Select key). The Auto

Auto File Del.: a b File Del. menu screen appears.
1
********************-
*Off
2 On

3 Press the  or  key to select [On] or [Off].

8-92

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

NOTE: If [On] has been selected, set the number of

days for storage as the [Period]. [Period] is only
displayed if it has been set to [On].

4 Press the OK key. The Period screen appears.

Period: a b
(1 - 31)
/*7-day(s)

5 Enter the number of days for storage using the

numeric keys, the  or  key.

6 Press the OK key. The Detail menu screen

reappears.

Overwrite Set. (Setting of overwrite storage)

This setting is used to permit or prohibit the overwriting of old documents that have been stored for the storage
of new documents.

1 In the Detail menu screen, press the  or  key to

8
Detail: P b select [Overwrite Set.].
Overwrite Set.: 8/9
Permit

[ Change ]

2 Press [Change] (the Right Select key). The

Overwrite Set.: a b Overwrite Set. screen appears.
1
********************-
*Permit
2 Prohibit

3 Press the  or  key to select [Permit] or

[Prohibit].

4 Press the OK key. The Detail menu screen

reappears.

8-93

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

Del. afterPrint (Setting for file deletion after printing)

This automatically deletes the documents from the Boxes when the printing is complete.

1 In the Detail menu screen, press the  or  key to

Detail: P b select [Del. afterPrint].
Del. afterPrint: 9/9
Off

[ Change ]

2 Press [Change] (the Right Select key). The Del.

Del. afterPrint: a b afterPrint screen appears.
1
********************-
*Off
2 On

3 Press the  or  key to select [On] or [Off].

4 Press the OK key. The Detail menu screen

reappears.

Editing Custom Boxes

It is possible to change the detailed settings of the Custom Boxes.

1 In the Custom Box list screen, press the  or 

Custom Box: a b key to select the Box to edit.
q Dandoko
*********************
0001
0002q DANDOKO box
0003q DBox
[ Menu ]

2 Press [Menu] (the Right Select key). The Menu

Menu: a b screen appears.
1 Detail/Edit
***********************-
2 Delete
3 Add Box

3 Press the  or  key to select [Detail/Edit].

4 Press the OK key. The Detail screen appears.

Detail: a b
Box Name: 1/9
NOTE: If the screen for entering a password is
Box03
displayed then enter the password using the numeric
keys and then press the OK key.
[ Edit ]

8-94

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

5 Press the  or  key to check each of the settings

and make changes.

NOTE: For the method for making changes, refer to

Detailed box settings on page 8-87.

6 When the editing is completed press the OK key.

The Custom Box list screen reappears.

Deleting Custom Boxes

It is possible to delete Custom Boxes.

1 In the Custom Box list screen, press the  or 

Custom Box: a b key to select the Box to delete.
q Dandoko
*********************
0001
0002q DANDOKO box
0003q DBox
[ Menu ]

2 Press [Menu] (the Right Select key). The Menu

Menu: a b screen appears. 8
1 Detail/Edit
***********************-
2 Delete
3 Add Box

3 Press the  or  key to select [Delete].

4 Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears.

Delete.
Are you sure?
z q Dandoko

[ Yes ] [ No ]

5 To proceed with deleting the custom box, press

[Yes] (the Left Select key). Completed. appears
and the custom box is deleted. The once deleting
of the custom box ends, the Custom Box list
screen reappears.

Pressing [No] (the Right Select key) returns to the

file list screen without deleting the custom box.

8-95

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

Setting automatic document deletion for Custom Boxes

Set the time for documents stored in Custom Boxes to be automatically deleted.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Document Box].
;
*********************
Document Box
< Edit Destination
= Adjust/Maint.
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Document Box menu

Document Box: a b appears.
1
*********************
Custom Box
2 Sub Address Box
3 Job Box
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Custom Box].

4 Press the OK key. The Custom Box menu

Custom Box: a b appears.
1
*********************
Detail/Edit
2 File Del. Time

[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [File Del. Time].

6 Press the OK key. The File Del. Time screen

File Del. Time: a b appears.
Hour Min.
/00-: 00

7 Use the numeric keys or press the  or  key to

enter the hours and minutes.

Press the  or  key to increase or decrease the

figures.
Use the  or  key to move the position being
entered, which is shown highlighted.

8 Press the OK key. The Custom Box Menu screen

reappears.

8-96

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

Job Box
Job Box settings can be set. Select settings for Quick Copy Jobs and Job Retention Deletion. Quick Copy Jobs
sets the number of files that can be saved using Quick Copy. Job Ret. Deletion sets the period of time a job
retention file can be saved. When a file has been saved for longer than the period, it is automatically deleted.

Quick Copy Jobs

The procedure for setting Quick Copy Jobs is explained below.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Document Box].
;
*********************
Document Box
< Edit Destination
= Adjust/Maint.
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Document Box menu

Document Box: a b appears.
1
*********************
Custom Box
2 Sub Address Box
3 Job Box
[ Exit ] 8
3 Press the  or  key to select [Job Box].

4 Press the OK key. The Job Box screen appears.

Job Box: a b
1
*********************
Quick Copy Jobs
2 JobRet. Deletion

[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [Quick Copy Jobs].

6 Press the OK key. The Quick Copy Jobs screen

Quick Copy Jobs: D b appears.
(0 - 300)
****0* job(s)

7 Enter the number of Quick Copy Jobs that can be

saved with the numeric keys.

8 Press the OK key. The Job Box screen reappears.

8-97

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

Job Retention Deletion

The procedure for setting Job Retention Deletion is explained below.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Document Box].
;
*********************
Document Box
< Edit Destination
= Adjust/Maint.
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Document Box menu

Document Box: a b appears.
1
*********************
Custom Box
2 Sub Address Box
3 Job Box
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Job Box].

4 Press the OK key. The Job Box screen appears.

Job Box: a b
1
*********************
Quick Copy Jobs
2 JobRet. Deletion

[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [Job Ret. Deletion].

6 Press the OK key. The Job Retention Deletion

JobRet. Deletion:a b screen appears.
1
*********************
*Off
2 1 hour
3 4 hours

7 Press the  or  key to select the period that jobs

are retained.

8 Press the OK key. The Job Box screen reappears.

8-98

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

Printer Settings
Printing from computers, settings are generally made on the application software screen. However, the
following settings are available for configuring the defaults to customize the machine.

• Emuration Set …8-99

• Color Setting …8-102
• EcoPrint …8-102
• Override A4/LTR …8-103
• Duplex …8-104
• Copies …8-105
• Orientation …8-107
• Gloss Mode …8-108
• Wide A4 …8-109
• FormFeed Timeout …8-109
• LF Action …8-110
• CR Action …8-111
• Job Name …8-112
• User Name …8-113
•
•
Paper Feed Mode…8-114
Auto Cass.Change…8-115
8

NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with
administrator privileges.

Emuration Set
Select the emulation for operating this machine by commands oriented to other types of printers.

Selection of emulation

This machine can emulate the following printers:

• PCL6
• KPDL
• KPDL(Auto)

NOTE: When [KPDL (Auto)] is selected for the emulation mode, automatic switching between KPDL and
PCL6 (substitute emulation) takes place based on the print data.

8-99

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

Use the procedure below to select the emulation.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Printer].
7 Copy
8
*********************
Printer
9 Send
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears.

Printer: a b
1
*********************
Emulation Set.
2 Color Setting
3 EcoPrint
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Emuration Set.].

4 Press the OK key. Emuration Set. appears.

Emulation Set.: a b
1
*********************
*PCL6
2 KPDL
3 KPDL(Auto)

5 Press the  or  key to select the printer you want

to emulate.

6 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Printer menu.

NOTE: If you select [KPDL] or [KPDL(Auto)], the

operation after selecting the emulation is different from
others.

If you select [KPDL], refer to page 8-101.

If you select [KPDL(Auto)], refer to page 8-101.

8-100

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

When KPDL Is Selected for Emulation

When you use the KPDL emulation mode, set whether or not to output KPDL error reports. The default setting
is Off.

Use the procedure below to make the setting.

1 In Emulation Set, press the  or  key to select

Emulation Set.: a b [KPDL].
1 PCL6
2
*********************
KPDL
3 KPDL(Auto)

2 Press the OK key. KPDL Error Rpt appears.

KPDL Error Rpt: a b
1
*********************
*Off
2 On

3 Press the  or  key to select [Off] or [On]. 8

4 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Printer menu.

When KPDL(Auto) Is Selected for Emulation

When you select [KPDL(Auto)], set whether or not to output KPDL error reports. The default setting is Off.

Use the procedure below to make the setting.

1 In Emulation Set, press the  or  key to select

Emulation Set.: a b [KPDL(Auto)].
1 PCL6
2 KPDL
3 KPDL(Auto)
*********************

2 Press the OK key. KPDL Error Rpt appears.

KPDL Error Rpt: a b
1
*********************
*Off
2 On

3 Press the  or  key to select [Off] or [On].

4 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Printer menu.

8-101

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

Color Setting
You can select whether status reports are printed in color or black & white.

Use the procedure below to select the Color Setting.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Printer].
7 Copy
8
*********************
Printer
9 Send
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears.

Printer: a b
*********************
1 Emulation Set.
2 Color Setting
3 EcoPrint
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Color Setting].

4 Press the OK key. Color Setting appears.

Color Setting: a b
*********************
1 *Color
2 Black & White

5 Press the  or  key to select to select [Color] or

[Black & White].

6 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Printer menu.

EcoPrint
EcoPrint conserves toner when printing. This is recommended for test copies where faded printing is not a
problem.

Use the procedure below to specify the EcoPrint setting.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Printer].
7 Copy
8
*********************
Printer
9 Send
[ Exit ]

8-102

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

2 Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears.

Printer: a b
*********************
1 Emulation Set.
2 Color Setting
3 EcoPrint
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [EcoPrint].

4 Press the OK key. EcoPrint appears.

EcoPrint: a b
1
*********************
*Off
2 On

5 Press the  or  key to select [Off] or [On].

6 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Printer menu.

Override A4/LTR 8
Select whether to treat A4 size and Letter, which are similar in size, as the same size when printing. The table
below shows the available settings.

Item Description

On A4 and Letter are regarded as the same in

size. The machine will use whichever size
is in the paper source.

Off A4 and Letter are not regarded as the

same in size.

Use the procedure below to specify the override A4/Letter setting. The default setting is On.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Printer].
7 Copy
8
*********************
Printer
9 Send
[ Exit ]

8-103

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

2 Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears.

Printer: a b
*********************
1 Emulation Set.
2 Color Setting
3 EcoPrint
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Override A4/LTR].

4 Press the OK key. Override A4/LTR appears.

Override A4/LTR: a b
1 Off
2 *On
*********************

5 Press the  or  key to select [Off] or [On].

6 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Printer menu.

Duplex
Select binding orientation for duplex mode. The table below shows the available settings.

Item Description Finish

Off No duplex mode

Bind Long Longer edge

Edge bound

Bind Short Shorter edge

Edge bound

Use the procedure below to select a duplex setting.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Printer].
7 Copy
8
*********************
Printer
9 Send
[ Exit ]

8-104

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

2 Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears.

Printer: a b
*********************
1 Emulation Set.
2 Color Setting
3 EcoPrint
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Duplex].

4 Press the OK key. Duplex appears.

Duplex: a b
1
*********************
*Off
2 Bind Long Edge
3 Bind Short Edge

5 Press the  or  key to select [Off], [Bind Long

Edge] or [Bind Short Edge].

6 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Printer menu.
8
Copies
Set the default number of copies, from 1 to 999.

Use the procedure below to specify the default number of copies.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Printer].
7 Copy
8
*********************
Printer
9 Send
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears.

Printer: a b
*********************
1 Emulation Set.
2 Color Setting
3 EcoPrint
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Copies].

8-105

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

4 Press the OK key. Copies appears.

Copies: D b
(1 - 999)
*******1*copies

5 Press the  or  key or the numeric keys to set

the default number of copies.

6 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Printer menu.

8-106

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

Orientation
Set the default orientation, Portrait or Landscape.

Portrait Landscape
Printer Printer

Use the procedure below to set the default orientation for printing.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Printer].
7 Copy
8
*********************
Printer
9 Send
[ Exit ] 8
2 Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears.
Printer: a b
*********************
1 Emulation Set.
2 Color Setting
3 EcoPrint
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Orientation].

4 Press the OK key. Orientation appears.

Orientation: a b
1
*********************
*Portrait
2 Landscape

5 Press the  or  key to select [Portrait] or

[Landscape].

6 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Printer menu.

8-107

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

Gloss Mode
Gloss Mode, when set to High, increases the effect of glossiness in printing by reducing the printing speed by
half.

IMPORTANT: Gloss Mode is not available when Labels and Transparency is selected as the paper type setting.
Depending on the paper used, printing in gloss mode may cause wrinkle in paper. To reduce wrinkle, try using
thicker paper.

Use the procedure below to select Gloss mode.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Printer].
7 Copy
8
*********************
Printer
9 Send
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears.

Printer: a b
*********************
1 Emulation Set.
2 Color Setting
3 EcoPrint
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Gloss Mode].

4 Press the OK key. Gloss Mode appears.

Gloss Mode: a b
1
*********************
*Off
2 On

5 Press the  or  key to select [Off] or [On].

6 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Printer menu.

8-108

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

Wide A4
Turn this to on to increase the maximum number of characters that can be printed in a line for an A4 page (78
characters at 10 pitch) and Letter size page (80 characters at 10 pitch). This setting is only effective in PCL 6
emulation.

Use the procedure below to select Wide A4.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Printer].
7 Copy
8
*********************
Printer
9 Send
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears.

Printer: a b
*********************
1 Emulation Set.
2 Color Setting
3 EcoPrint
[ Exit ]
8
3 Press the  or  key to select [Wide A4].

4 Press the OK key. Wide A4 appears.

Wide A4: a b
1
*********************
*Off
2 On

5 Press the  or  key to select [Off] or [On].

6 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Printer menu.

FormFeed Timeout
Receiving print data from the computer, the machine may sometimes wait if there is no information signalling
that the last page does not have any more data to be printed. When the preset timeout passes, the machine
automatically prints paper. The options are between 5 and 495 seconds.

Use the procedure below to set the form feed timeout.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Printer].
7 Copy
8
*********************
Printer
9 Send
[ Exit ]

8-109

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

2 Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears.

Printer: a b
*********************
1 Emulation Set.
2 Color Setting
3 EcoPrint
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [FormFeed

Timeout].

4 Press the OK key. FormFeed Timeout appears.

FormFeed TimeOut: D b
(5 - 495)
******30*Sec.

5 Press the  or  key to set the Form Feed

Timeout. You can set the timeout delay in seconds.
You cannot use the numeric keys to enter this
value.

6 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Printer menu.

LF Action
Set the line feed action when the machine receives the line feed code (character code 0AH). The table below
shows the available settings. The default setting is LF Only.

Item Description

LF Only Only line feed performed.

LF and CR Line feed and character return performed.

Ignore LF No line feed performed.

Use the procedure below to specify a LF action.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Printer].
7 Copy
8
*********************
Printer
9 Send
[ Exit ]

8-110

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

2 Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears.

Printer: a b
*********************
1 Emulation Set.
2 Color Setting
3 EcoPrint
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [LF Action].

4 Press the OK key. LF Action appears.

LF Action: M b
1
*********************
*LF Only
2 LF and CR
3 Ignore LF

5 Press the  or  key to select [LF Only], [LF and

CR] or [Ignore LF].

6 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Printer menu.
8
CR Action
Set the character return action when the machine receives the character return code (character code 0DH). The
table below shows the available settings. The default setting is CR Only.

Item Description

CR Only Only character return performed.

LF and CR Character return and line feed performed.

Ignore CR No character return performed.

Use the procedure below to specify a CR action.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Printer].
7 Copy
8
*********************
Printer
9 Send
[ Exit ]

8-111

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

2 Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears.

Printer: a b
*********************
1 Emulation Set.
2 Color Setting
3 EcoPrint
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [CR Action].

4 Press the OK key.

CR Action: a b
1
*********************
*CR Only
2 LF and CR
3 Ignore CR

5 Press the  or  key to select [CR Only], [LF and

CR] or [Ignore CR].

6 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Printer menu.

Job Name
Set whether the job name set in the printer driver is displayed.

Use the procedure below to specify a Job Name.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Printer].
7 Copy
8
*********************
Printer
9 Send
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears.

Printer: a b
*********************
1 Emulation Set.
2 Color Setting
3 EcoPrint
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Job Name].

8-112

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

4 Press the OK key. Job Name appears.

Job Name.: a b
1
*********************
*Off
2 On

5 Press the  or  key to select [Off] or [On].

6 Press the OK key.

When [On] is selected, a screen appears for you to

set the job name to be used.

When [Off] is selected, Completed. is displayed

and the screen returns to the Printer screen.

7 Press the  or  key to select [Job Name], [Job

Additional Info.:a b No.+Job Name] or [Job Name+Job No.].
1
*********************
*Job Name
2 Job No.+Job Name
3 Job Name+Job No.
8
8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Printer menu.

User Name
Set whether the user name set in the printer driver is displayed.

Use the procedure below to specify the User Name setting.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Printer].
7 Copy
8
*********************
Printer
9 Send
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears.

Printer: a b
*********************
1 Emulation Set.
2 Color Setting
3 EcoPrint
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [User Name].

8-113

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

4 Press the OK key. User Name appears.

User Name: a b
1 Off
2 *On
*********************

5 Press the  or  key to select [Off] or [On].

6 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Printer menu.

Paper Feed Mode

Set the default value of the paper feed direction used for the printer functions. The default setting is Auto.

Item Description

Auto Sets the paper feed direction automatically.

Fixed Sets the paper feed direction the same as

in the previous printing operation.

Use the procedure below to set Paper Feed Mode.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Printer].
7 Copy
8
*********************
Printer
9 Send
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears.

Printer: a b
*********************
1 Emulation Set.
2 Color Setting
3 EcoPrint
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Paper Feed

Mode].

4 Press the OK key. Paper Feed Mode appears.

Paper Feed Mode: a b
1
*********************
*Auto
2 Fixed

8-114

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

5 Press the  or  key to select [Auto] or [Fixed].

6 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Printer menu.

Auto Cass.Change
Select the action that takes place when the cassette runs out of paper during printing. Selections are as follows.
The default setting is [On].

Item Description

Off The printer displays Load Cassette # (# is a

cassette number) or Load MP Tray, and
stops printing.
Load the paper according to the paper source
displayed to resume printing.
To print from the other paper cassette, press
the  or  key to display Use alternative?,
press the  or  key to select the desired
paper source, and then press [GO].

On If there is another cassette with the same

size and type of paper, printing will 8
automatically continue.

Use the procedure below to set the Auto Cass.Change.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Printer].
7 Copy
8
*********************
Printer
9 Send
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears.

Printer: a b
*********************
1 Emulation Set.
2 Color Setting
3 EcoPrint
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Auto

Cass.Change].

8-115

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

4 Press the OK key. Auto Cass.Change appears.

Auto Cass.Change:a b
1 Off
2 *On
*********************

5 Press the  or  key to select [Off] or [On].

6 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Printer menu.

8-116

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

Printing Reports/Sending Notice

Print reports to check the machine settings and status. Default settings for printing the result reports can also
be configured.

NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only print by logging in with administrator privileges.
You can select whether status reports are printed in color or black & white. Refer to Color Setting on 8-102

Printing Reports
Printable reports are as follows.

Menu map

Outputs a menu map of this machine.

Menu Map
Status Page
Firmware Version

Status Page
Check the information including current settings, available memory space, and optional equipment installed.

Status Page
Firmware Version

8-117

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

Font List

Check the font samples installed in the machine.

Optional Network Status

You can view information on the installed network interface card or wireless interface card.

Use the procedure below to print a Menu Map / Status Page / Font List / Optional Network Status.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Report].
1
*********************
Report
2 Counter
3 System/Network
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Report menu appears.

Report: a b
1
*********************
Report Print
2 Admin Rpt Set.
3 Result Rpt Set.
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Report Print].

4 Press the OK key. The Report Print menu appears.

Report Print: a b
1
*********************
Menu Map
2 Status Page
3 Font List
[ Exit ]

8-118

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

5 Press the  or  key to select [Menu Map],

[Status Page], [Font List] or [Opt NW Status].

6 Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears.

Print.
Are you sure? The screen shown is the one when Status Page is
z Status Page selected.

[ Yes ] [ No ]

7 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The selected

report is output. Accepted. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Report Print menu.

NOTE: When acceptance of jobs is prohibited, Now, the machine is prohibited to be used. is displayed and
the output is canceled.

Service Status Page

More detailed information is available than on the Status Page. Service personnel usually print the service
status pages for maintenance purpose.
8
Network Status Page

Check the information including network interface firmware version, network address and protocol.

Use the procedure below to print a Service Status / Network Status.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Adjust/Maint.].
; Document Box
< Edit Destination
=
*********************
Adjust/Maint.
[ Exit ]

8-119

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

2 Press the OK key. The Adjust/Maint. menu

Adjust/Maint.: a b appears.
1
*********************
Copy Denst. Adj.
2 Send/Box Density
3 Backgrnd Density
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Service Setting].

4 Press the OK key. Service Setting menu appears.

Service Setting: a b
1
*********************
Service Status
2 Network Status
3 Test Page
[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [Service Status] or

[Network Status].

6 Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears.

Print.
Are you sure? The screen shown is the one when Network Status
z Network Status is selected.

[ Yes ] [ No ]

7 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The selected

report is output. Accepted. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Service Setting menu.

NOTE: When acceptance of jobs is prohibited, Now, the machine is prohibited to be used. is displayed and
the output is canceled.

8-120

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

Send Result Report

Automatically print a report of transmission result when a transmission is complete. The table below shows the
available settings. The default setting is Error Only.

Item Description

Off No result report printed.

On Result report automatically printed.

Transmitted images can also be attached.

Error Only Result report printed only when a

transmission ends in an error. If two or
more destinations are registered, the
reports are printed only for the destinations
with the errors. Transmitted images can
also be attached.

Use the procedure below to send a Result Report.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Report].
1
*********************
Report 8
2 Counter
3 System/Network
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Report menu appears.

Report: a b
1
*********************
Report Print
2 Admin Rpt Set.
3 Result Rpt Set.
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Result Rpt Set.].

4 Press the OK key. The Result Rpt Set. menu

Result Rpt Set.: a b appears.
1
*********************
Send Result
2 FAX RX Result
3 JobFinish Notice
[ Exit ]

8-121

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

5 Press the  or  key to select [Send Result]. The

Send Result: a b Send Result menu appears.
1
*********************
E-mail/Folder
2 FAX
3 CancelBeforeSend
[ Exit ]

6 Press the  or  key to select [E-mail/Folder],

E-mail/Folder: a b [FAX], [CancelBeforeSend]] or [Dest. Info.].
1 Off Selected menu appears.
2 On
3 *Error Only
********************* NOTE: Selecting [CancelBeforeSend] can be
specified whether the machine prints the report when
canceling the operation before sending.
When selecting [Off] in both E-mail/Folder and FAX
menu, [CancelBeforeSend] is not displayed.

7 Press the  or  key to select [Off], [On] or [Error

Only].
When selecting [FAX], press the  or  key to
select [Off], [On], [Error Only] or [Specify Each
Job].
When [On], [Error Only], or [Specify Each Job] is
selected and the OK key is pressed, [Off], [Partial
Image], or [Full Image] can be selected.
When selecting [CancelBeforeSend], press the 
or  key to select [Off] or [On].
When selecting [Dest. Info.], press the  or  key
to select [Dest. or Name] or [Dest. and Name].

8 Press the OK key. A Result Report is sent.

Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the Send Result menu.

8-122

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

Adjustment/Maintenance
Adjust printing quality and conduct machine maintenance.

• Copy Denst. Adj. …8-123

• Send/Box Density …8-124
• Backgrnd Density …8-125
• AutoColorCorrect …8-126
• ColorCalibration …8-126
• Color Regist. …8-127
• Correct. Bk Line …8-134
• LaserScanner Cln (Laser scanner cleaning mode setting) …8-135
• Drum Refresh (Drum refresh mode setting) …8-136
• Altitude Adj. (Altitude adjustment setting) …8-137
• MC (Main charger output setting) …8-138
• Mem.Diagnostics …8-139

NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with
administrator privileges.
8
Copy Denst. Adj.
Adjust copy density. Adjustment can be made in 7 levels.

Use the procedure below to adjust the copy density.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Adjust/Maint.].
; Document Box
< Edit Destination
=
*********************
Adjust/Maint.
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Adjust/Maint. menu

Adjust/Maint.: a b appears.
1
*********************
Copy Denst. Adj.
2 Send/Box Density
3 Backgrnd Density
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Copy Denst. Adj.].

8-123

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

4 Press the OK key. Copy Denst. Adj. appears.

Copy Denst. Adj.: a b
3 -1
4
*********************
* 0 Normal
5 +1

5 Press the  or  key to select the density from

[-3 Lighter] to [+3 Darker].

6 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Adjust/Maint. menu.

Send/Box Density
Adjust scan density when sending or storing the data in Document Box. Adjustment can be made in 7 levels.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Adjust/Maint.].
; Document Box
< Edit Destination
=
*********************
Adjust/Maint.
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Adjust/Maint. menu

Adjust/Maint.: a b appears.
1
*********************
Copy Denst. Adj.
2 Send/Box Density
3 Backgrnd Density
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Send/Box

Density].

4 Press the OK key. Send/Box Density appears.

Send/Box Density: a b
3 -1
4
*********************
* 0 Normal
5 +1

5 Press the  or  key to select the density from

[-3 Lighter] to [+3 Darker].

6 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Adjust/Maint. menu.

8-124

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

Backgrnd Density
Darkens or lightens the overall background density. Copy mode and send/document box mode can each be
adjusted to one of seven levels. Use the procedure below to specify the setting for Background Density.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Adjust/Maint.].
; Document Box
< Edit Destination
=
*********************
Adjust/Maint.
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Adjust/Maint. menu

Adjust/Maint.: a b appears.
1
*********************
Copy Denst. Adj.
2 Send/Box Density
3 Backgrnd Density
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Backgrnd Density].

Backgrnd Density:a b
4 Press the OK key. Backgrnd Density appears. 8
1
*********************
Copy(Auto)
2 Send/Box(Auto)

[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [Copy(Auto)] or

[Send/Box(Auto)].

6 Press the OK key. This displays the density

Copy(Auto): a b selection screen for the mode selected in step 5.
3 -1 The screen shown is the one when [Copy(Auto)] is
4
*********************
* 0 Normal selected.
5 +1

7 Press the  or  key to select the density from [-

3 Lighter] to [+3 Darker].

8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Adjust/Maint. menu.

8-125

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

AutoColorCorrect
This setting allows you to adjust the detection level used by the machine to determine whether the original is
color or black and white during Auto Color Mode. Setting a lower value will result in more originals being
identified as color, while a larger value will tend to increase the number of originals being identified as black and
white.

Use the procedure below to set the Auto Color Detection Level.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Adjust/Maint.].
; Document Box
< Edit Destination
=
*********************
Adjust/Maint.
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Adjust/Maint. menu

Adjust/Maint.: a b appears.
1
*********************
Copy Denst. Adj.
2 Send/Box Density
3 Backgrnd Density
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [AutoColorCorrect].

4 Press the OK key. AutoColorCorrect appears.

AutoColorCorrect: a b
*********************
1 5
2 4
3 3

5 Press the or  key to select a value from [5] to

[1].

6 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Adjust/Maint. menu.

ColorCalibration
This machine contains a calibration function that automatically makes adjustments to compensate for changes
that occur over time due to variations in the ambient temperature and humidity. So that the highest quality color
printing can be maintained, this color calibration operation is carried out automatically each time the power to
the machine is turned on. If color tone does not improve or color drift does not improve after executing this color
adjustment, perform color print position correction on page 8-127.

8-126

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

Use the procedure below to set the Color Calibration.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Adjust/Maint.].
; Document Box
< Edit Destination
=
*********************
Adjust/Maint.
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Adjust/Maint. menu

Adjust/Maint.: a b appears.
1
*********************
Copy Denst. Adj.
2 Send/Box Density
3 Backgrnd Density
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [ColorCalibration].

4 Press the OK key. ColorCalibration appears.

Start the color
calibration.
Are you sure? 8
[ Yes ] [ No ]

5 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key) to execute Color

Calibration.

6 Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to

the Adjust/Maint. menu.

Color Regist.
When first installing the machine or moving it to a new location, color drift during printing may occur. Use this
function to correct the color position of each of cyan, magenta and yellow to resolve color drift. Normal
registration and detailed settings are available for Color Registration. Color drift can be largely corrected
through normal registration. However, if it is not resolved or to perform more detailed settings, use the detailed
settings.

NOTE: To perform color registration, verify that either Letter or A4 paper is loaded into a cassette.

IMPORTANT: Before performing color registration, be sure to perform color calibration (see page 8-126). If
color drift remains, perform color registration. By performing color registration without performing color
calibration, the color drift will be resolved once, however, it may cause the serious color drift later.

8-127

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

Normal Registration

Follow the steps below to correct normal color drift.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Adjust/Maint.].
; Document Box
< Edit Destination
=
*********************
Adjust/Maint.
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Adjust/Maint. menu

Adjust/Maint.: a b appears.
1
*********************
Copy Denst. Adj.
2 Send/Box Density
3 Backgrnd Density
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Color Regist.].

4 Press the OK key. Color Regist. appears.

Color Regist.: a b
1
*********************
Normal
2 Detail

[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [Normal].

6 Press the OK key. The normal registration

Normal: a b appears. Press the  or  key to select [Print
1
*********************
Print Chart Chart].
2 Adjust Magenta
3 Adjust Cyan

7 Press the OK key. The chart print confirmation

Print. menu appears.
Are you sure?
w Registration chart.

[ Yes ] [ No ]

8-128

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

8 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key) to execute chart

printing. After the charts are printed, you will return
to the standard menu of color print position
correction.

Three charts, H-L (left), V (center), and H-R (right)

are printed on one sheet of paper for each of the
colors M (magenta), C (cyan), and Y (yellow).

<Chart Example>

Color Registration Correction Chart

MV
MH-L MH-R
I G E C A 1 3 5 7 9 I I G E C A 1 3 5 7 9
H
H F D B 0 2 4 6 8 G H F D B 0 2 4 6 8
F
E
D
C
B
A
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

8
CV
CH-L CH-R
I
I G E C A 1 3 5 7 9 H I G E C A 1 3 5 7 9
H F D B 0 2 4 6 8 G H F D B 0 2 4 6 8
F
E
D
C
B
A
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

YV
YH-L YH-R
I
I G E C A 1 3 5 7 9 H I G E C A 1 3 5 7 9
H F D B 0 2 4 6 8 G H F D B 0 2 4 6 8
F
E
D
C
B
A
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

8-129

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

9 Press the  or  key to select [Adjust Magenta].

Normal: a b Press the OK key. The magenta correction menu
1
*********************
Print Chart appears.
2 Adjust Magenta
3 Adjust Cyan

10 In the color registration correction chart printed in

Print Registration Chart above, note the numbers
of the sections in the magenta H and V charts
where the lines most closely coincide as a single
straight line. In the left example, the value would be
B.

11 Press  or  key to change items (H-L, V and H-

Adjust Magenta: a b R). Press  or  key to enter the value read from
(I - A, 0 - 9) the chart and press [OK].
Magenta correction is performed. After a brief
interval you will return to the standard menu of
0 V: 0
H-L:*** H-R: 0
color print position correction.

Press  key to increase the value from 0 to 9. To

decrease, press .
By pressing , the value changes from 0 to
alphabetic letters, going from A to I. To move in the
reverse direction, press .

You cannot use the numeric keys to enter these

values.

12 Repeat steps 9 to 11 to correct cyan and yellow.

Detailed Settings

Follow the steps below to perform more detailed correction.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Adjust/Maint.].
; Document Box
< Edit Destination
=
*********************
Adjust/Maint.
[ Exit ]

8-130

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

2 Press the OK key. The Adjust/Maint. menu

Adjust/Maint.: a b appears.
1
*********************
Copy Denst. Adj.
2 Send/Box Density
3 Backgrnd Density
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Color Regist.].

4 Press the OK key. Color Regist. appears.

Color Regist.: a b
1
*********************
Normal
2 Detail

[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [Detail].

6 Press the OK key. The detail registration appears.

Detail: a b Press the  or  key to select [Print Chart].
1
*********************
Print Chart
2 Adjust Magenta 8
3 Adjust Cyan

7 Press the OK key. The chart print confirmation

Print. menu appears.
Are you sure?
w Registration chart.

[ Yes ] [ No ]

8 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key) to execute chart

printing. After the charts are printed, you will return
to the detail menu of color print position correction.

Two charts, H-1 to H-5V (upper) and V-3 (lower)

are printed on one sheet of paper for each of the
colors M (magenta), C (cyan), and Y (yellow).

8-131

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

<Chart Example>

9 Press the  or  key to select [Adjust Magenta].

Detail: a b Press the OK key. The magenta correction menu
1
*********************
Print Chart appears.
2 Adjust Magenta
3 Adjust Cyan

8-132

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

10 In the color registration correction chart printed in

Print Registration Chart above, note the numbers
of the sections in the magenta H and V charts
where the lines most closely coincide as a single
straight line. In the left example, the value would be
B.

11 Press  or  key to change items (H-1 to H-5, V-

Adjust Magenta: a b 3). Press  or  key to enter the value read from
(I - A, 0 - 9) the chart and press [OK].
H-1:***H-2:
0 0 H-3: 0 Magenta correction is performed. After a brief
0
H-4:***H-5: 0 V-3: 0 interval you will return to the detail menu of color
print position correction.

Press  key to increase the value from 0 to 9. To

decrease, press .
By pressing , the value changes from 0 to
alphabetic letters, going from A to I. To move in the
reverse direction, press .

You cannot use the numeric keys to enter these

values.
8
12 Repeat steps 9 to 11 to correct cyan and yellow.

8-133

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

Correct. Bk Line
Correct fine black lines (black streaks caused by contamination), which may appear on the copies, when the
document processor is used.

K
Paper feed
direction

The table below shows the available settings.

Item Description

Off No correction performed.

On(Low) Correction performed. The reproduction of

the image becomes lower when using Off.

On(High) Correction performed. Select this item if

black streak remains after using On (Low).
The reproduction of the image becomes
lower when using On (Low).

NOTE: Using Correcting Fine Black Line can impair reproduction of fine characters. It is recommended to
keep the default ([Off]).

Use the procedure below to specify the setting for correcting fine black lines.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Adjust/Maint.].
; Document Box
< Edit Destination
=
*********************
Adjust/Maint.
[ Exit ]

8-134

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

2 Press the OK key. The Adjust/Maint. menu

Adjust/Maint.: a b appears.
1
*********************
Copy Denst. Adj.
2 Send/Box Density
3 Backgrnd Density
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Correct. Bk Line].

4 Press the OK key. Correct. Bk Line appears.

Correct. Bk Line: a b
1
*********************
*Off
2 On(Low)
3 On(High)

5 Press the  or  key to select [Off], [On(Low)] or

[On(High)].

6 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Adjust/Maint. menu.
8
LaserScanner Cln (Laser scanner cleaning mode setting)
This sets the cleaning mode for the laser scanner. When the printing quality declines, cleaning the laser scanner
can restore the printing quality.

Use the procedure below to set the laser scanner cleaning mode setting.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Adjust/Maint.].
; Document Box
< Edit Destination
=
*********************
Adjust/Maint.
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Adjust/Maint. menu

Adjust/Maint.: a b appears.
1
*********************
Copy Denst. Adj.
2 Send/Box Density
3 Backgrnd Density
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Service Setting].

8-135

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

4 Press the OK key. The Service Setting menu

Service Setting: a b appears.
1
*********************
Service Status
2 Network Status
3 Test Page
[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [LaserScanner

Cln].

6 Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears.

Start the laser
scanner cleaning.
Are you sure?

[ Yes ] [ No ]

7 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). Completed. is

displayed and the screen returns to the Service
Setting menu.

Drum Refresh (Drum refresh mode setting)

This sets the refresh mode for the drum. When the printing quality declines, refreshing the drum can restore the
printing quality.

Use the procedure below to set the drum refresh mode setting.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Adjust/Maint.].
; Document Box
< Edit Destination
=
*********************
Adjust/Maint.
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Adjust/Maint. menu

Adjust/Maint.: a b appears.
1
*********************
Copy Denst. Adj.
2 Send/Box Density
3 Backgrnd Density
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Service Setting].

8-136

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

4 Press the OK key. The Service Setting menu

Service Setting: a b appears.
1
*********************
Service Status
2 Network Status
3 Test Page
[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [Drum Refresh].

6 Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears.

Start the drum
refresh.
Are you sure?

[ Yes ] [ No ]

7 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). Completed. is

displayed and the screen returns to the Service
Setting menu.

8
Altitude Adj. (Altitude adjustment setting)
This sets the altitude adjustment mode. If you are using the machine at an altitude of 1500 m or higher and print
quality has deteriorated, the Altitude Adjustment mode setting can be used to restore print quality.

Use the procedure below to set the altitude adjustment setting.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Adjust/Maint.].
; Document Box
< Edit Destination
=
*********************
Adjust/Maint.
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Adjust/Maint. menu

Adjust/Maint.: a b appears.
1
*********************
Copy Denst. Adj.
2 Send/Box Density
3 Backgrnd Density
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Service Setting].

8-137

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

4 Press the OK key. The Service Setting menu

Service Setting: a b appears.
1
*********************
Service Status
2 Network Status
3 Test Page
[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [Altitude Adj.].

6 Press the OK key. Altitude Adj. appears.

Altitude Adj.: a b
1
*********************
*Normal
2 High 1
3 High 2

7 Press the  or  key to select [Normal], [High 1]

or [High 2].

8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Service Setting menu.

MC (Main charger output setting)

This sets the output of the main charger. When print quality has deteriorated, the output of the main charger
can be changed to restore print quality.

NOTE: This menu only appears when the Altitude Adj. (Altitude adjustment setting) on page 8-137 is set to
[Normal].

Use the procedure below to set the main charger output setting.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Adjust/Maint.].
; Document Box
< Edit Destination
=
*********************
Adjust/Maint.
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Adjust/Maint. menu

Adjust/Maint.: a b appears.
1
*********************
Copy Denst. Adj.
2 Send/Box Density
3 Backgrnd Density
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Service Setting].

8-138

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

4 Press the OK key. The Service Setting menu

Service Setting: a b appears.
1
*********************
Service Status
2 Network Status
3 Test Page
[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [MC].

6 Press the OK key. MC appears.

MC: a b
1 1
2 2
3 *3
*********************

7 Press the  or  key to select [1] to [5].

8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Service Setting menu.

Mem.Diagnostics 8
Perform this function to check the machine memory.

Use the procedure below to set the Memory Diagnostics mode setting.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Adjust/Maint.].
; Document Box
< Edit Destination
=
*********************
Adjust/Maint.
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Adjust/Maint. menu

Adjust/Maint.: a b appears.
1
*********************
Copy Denst. Adj.
2 Send/Box Density
3 Backgrnd Density
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Service Setting].

4 Press the OK key. The Service Setting menu

Service Setting: a b appears.
1
*********************
Service Status
2 Network Status
3 Test Page
[ Exit ]

8-139

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

5 Press the  or  key to select [Mem.Diagnostics].

6 Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears.

Perform this function
to check the machine
memory.

[ Start ] [ Cancel ]

7 Press [Start] (the Left Select key). Turn the main

power switch off and on to run this function. is
displayed. Turn the main power switch off and on.

8-140

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

Date/Timer
Date/Timer settings include:

• Date/Time …8-141
• Date Format …8-143
• Time Zone …8-144
• Summer Time …8-145
• Auto Panel Reset …8-146
• Low Power Timer …8-149
• Sleep Level (models except for Europe) …8-150
• Sleep Timer …8-152
• Auto Error Clear …8-153
• Unusable Time …8-156

NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with
administrator privileges.

Date/Time 8
Set the date and time for the location where you use the machine. If you perform Send as E-mail, the date and
time set here will be displayed on the header.

CAUTION: Be sure to set Time Zone before the Date/Time setup.

Use the procedure below to set the date and time.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Common Settings].
4 User/Job Account
5 User Property
6
*********************
Common Settings
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu

Common Settings: a b appears.
1
*********************
Language
2 Default Screen
3 Sound
[ Exit ]

8-141

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

3 Press the  or  key to select [Date Setting], and

press the OK key.

When you are performing user management and

Login User Name: L b have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
******************* Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Login Password: Password to log in.

[ Login ]

4 The Date Settings menu appears.

Date Setting: a b
1
*********************
Date/Time
2 Date Format
3 Time Zone
[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [Date/Time].

6 Press the OK key. The screen to enter the date of

Date/Time: a b Date/Time appears.
Year Month Day
*2009* 01 01
(Time Zone:Tokyo )

7 Set the date.

Press the  or  key to move to the item (Year /

Month / Day) you want to enter.

Press the  or  key to set each item.

8 Press the OK key. The screen to enter the time of

Date/Time: a b Date/Time appears.
Hour Min. Second
****11 : 45: 50
(Time Zone:Tokyo )

9 Set the time.

Press the  or  key to move to the item (Hour /

Min. / Second) you want to enter.

Press the  or  key to set each item.

10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Date Settings menu.

8-142

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

NOTE: If you try to change the date/time when a trial

application is running, the If you change Date/Time
setting, trial functions will be unavailable. Are you
sure? message is displayed. To change the date/time,
press [Yes] (the Left Select key).

Date Format
Select the display format of year, month, and date. The year is displayed in Western notation.

Use the procedure below to select the date format.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Common Settings].
4 User/Job Account
5 User Property
6
*********************
Common Settings
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu

Common Settings: a b appears.
1
*********************
Language 8
2 Default Screen
3 Sound
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Date Setting], and

press the OK key.

When you are performing user management and

Login User Name: L b have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
******************* Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Login Password: Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right
Select key).
[ Login ]

4 The Date Settings menu appears.

Date Setting: a b
1
*********************
Date/Time
2 Date Format
3 Time Zone
[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [Date Format].

8-143

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

6 Press the OK key. Date Format appears.

Date Format: a b
1
*********************
*Month/Day/Year
2 Day/Month/Year
3 Year/Month/Day

7 Press the  or  key to select [Month/Day/Year],

[Day/Month/Year] or [Year/Month/Day].

8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Date Settings menu.

Time Zone
Set the time difference in the location you are from GMT.

Use the procedure below to set the time difference.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Common Settings].
4 User/Job Account
5 User Property
6
*********************
Common Settings
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu

Common Settings: a b appears.
1
*********************
Language
2 Default Screen
3 Sound
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Date Setting], and

press the OK key.

When you are performing user management and

Login User Name: L b have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
******************* Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Login Password: Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right
Select key).
[ Menu ] [ Login ]

4 The Date Settings menu appears.

Date Setting: a b
1
*********************
Date/Time
2 Date Format
3 Time Zone
[ Exit ]

8-144

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

5 Press the  or  key to select [Time Zone].

6 Press the OK key. Time Zone appears.

Time Zone: a b
1
*********************
-12:00 Internati
2 -11:00 UTC-11
3 -10:00 Hawaii

7 Press the  or  key to select your location.

8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Date Settings menu.

NOTE: If you select a region that does not utilize

summer time, the summer time setting screen will not
appear.

Summer Time
Set whether or not to apply summer time to the display of the date.
8
Use the procedure below to set Summer Time.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Common Settings].
4 User/Job Account
5 User Property
6
*********************
Common Settings
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu

Common Settings: a b appears.
1
*********************
Language
2 Default Screen
3 Sound
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Date Setting], and

press the OK key.

When you are performing user management and

Login User Name: L b have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
******************* Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Login Password: Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right
Select key).
[ Menu ] [ Login ]

8-145

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

4 The Date Settings menu appears.

Date Setting: a b
2
*********************
Date Format
3 Time Zone
4 Summer Time
[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [Summer Time].

6 Press the OK key. Summer Time appears.

Summer Time: a b
1
*********************
*Off
2 On

7 Press the  or  key to select [Off] or [On].

8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Date Settings menu.

Auto Panel Reset

If no jobs are run for a certain period of time, automatically reset settings and return to the default setting.

NOTE: Refer to page 8-30 for the default settings.

Auto Panel Reset ON/OFF

Select to use Auto Panel Reset or not.

Use the procedure below to specify the auto panel reset setting. The default setting is On.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Common Settings].
4 User/Job Account
5 User Property
6
*********************
Common Settings
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu

Common Settings: a b appears.
1
*********************
Language
2 Default Screen
3 Sound
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Timer Setting], and

press the OK key.

8-146

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

When you are performing user management and

Login User Name: L b have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
******************* Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Login Password: Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right
Select key).
[ Login ]

4 The Timer Settings menu appears.

Timer Setting: a b
1
*********************
Auto Panel Reset
2 PanelReset Timer
3 Low Power Timer
[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [Auto Panel Reset].

6 Press the OK key. Auto Panel Reset appears.

Auto Panel Reset: a b
1 Off
2 *On
*********************
8

7 Press the  or  key to select [Off] or [On].

8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Timer Settings menu.

Panel Reset Timer

If you select [On] for Auto Panel Reset, set the amount of time to wait before Auto Panel Reset. Options are
between 5 and 495 seconds (every five seconds). The default setting is 90 seconds.

NOTE: If you select [Off] for Auto Panel Reset, the time display does not appear.

Use the procedure below to set the reset time.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Common Settings].
4 User/Job Account
5 User Property
6
*********************
Common Settings
[ Exit ]

8-147

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu

Common Settings: a b appears.
1
*********************
Language
2 Default Screen
3 Sound
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Timer Setting], and

press the OK key.

When you are performing user management and

Login User Name: L b have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
******************* Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Login Password: Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right
Select key).
[ Login ]

4 The Timer Settings menu appears.

Timer Setting: a b
1
*********************
Auto Panel Reset
2 PanelReset Timer
3 Low Power Timer
[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [Panel Reset

Timer].

6 Press the OK key. Panel Reset Timer appears.

PanelReset Timer:D b
(5 - 495)
******90*sec.

7 Press the  or  key to set the Panel Reset Timer.

Set the amount of time before resetting the
message display on the panel in seconds. You
cannot use the numeric keys to enter this value.

8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Timer Settings menu.

8-148

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

Low Power Timer

The time until the machine enters low power mode can be set. The range that can be set is as follows.

Value

For Europe
30 ppm model: 1 to 60 minutes (1minute increments)
35 ppm model: 1 to 120 minutes (1minute increments)

Except for Europe

1 to 240 minutes (1minute increments)

Use the procedure below to set the Low Power Timer. The default setting is 1 minute.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Common Settings].
4 User/Job Account
5 User Property
6
*********************
Common Settings
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu

8
Common Settings: a b appears.
1
*********************
Language
2 Default Screen
3 Sound
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Timer Setting], and

press the OK key.

A login screen will appear. Then, enter the user ID

Login User Name: L b and password with administrator privileges to log
******************* in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key).
Login Password:

[ Login ]

4 The Timer Settings menu appears.

Timer Setting: a b
1
*********************
Auto Panel Reset
2 PanelReset Timer
3 Low Power Timer
[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [Low Power Timer].

8-149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

6 Press the OK key. Low Power Timer appears.

Low Power Timer: M b
(1 - 240)
*******1*min.

7 Press the  or  key to set the Low Power Timer.

Set the amount of time before entering the Low
Power state in minutes. You cannot use the
numeric keys to enter this value.

8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Timer Settings menu.

Sleep Level (models except for Europe)

Detailed settings can be selected for sleep mode. Detailed settings for sleep mode are called Energy Saver
mode. When a function is set in Energy Saver mode and the function sends data to the machine, the machine
does not execute the function. When Quick Recovery is specified, the machine wakes from sleep mode when
any kind of data is received.

Example: When print data is sent from a PC connected by Network

Quick Recovery When the machine receives print data, it wakes from sleep mode and starts
printing.

Energy Saver The machine does not wake from sleep mode when it receives print data and
printing does not take place.

Use the procedure below to specify the Sleep Level.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Common Settings].
4 User/Job Account
5 User Property
6
*********************
Common Settings
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu

Common Settings: a b appears.
1
*********************
Language
2 Default Screen
3 Sound
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Timer Setting], and

press the OK key.

8-150

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

When you are performing user management and

Login User Name: L b have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
******************* Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Login Password: Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right
Select key).
[ Login ]

4 The Timer Settings menu appears.

Timer Setting: a b
1
*********************
Auto Panel Reset
2 PanelReset Timer
3 Low Power Timer
[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [Sleep Level].

6 Press the OK key. Sleep Level appears.

Sleep level: a b
1
*********************
Quick Recovery
2 Energy Saver
8

7 Press the  or  key to select [Quick Recovery]

or [Energy Saver].

8 Select [Quick Recovery] and press the OK key.

Energy Saver: a b Completed. appears and you return to the timer
1
*********************
Network settings menu.
2 Card Reader Select [Energy Saver] and press the OK key. The
3 FAX detailed settings screen of Energy Saver mode
appears.

9 Press the  or  key to select the desired

function for energy saver.
10 Press the OK key. The setting screen of each item
Network: a b appears.
1 Off
2 *On
*********************

11 Press the  or  key to select [Off] or [On] for the

energy saver. When [On] is set for a function and
that function sends data to the machine when the
machine is in Energy Saver mode, the machine will
not execute the function.

8-151

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

12 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Energy Saver mode.

Sleep Timer

Set the amount of time to wait before Auto Sleep.

Value

For Europe
1 to 60 minutes (1minute increments)

Except for Europe

1 to 240 minutes (1minute increments)

Use the procedure below to set the Auto Sleep time. The default setting is 1 minute.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Common Settings].
4 User/Job Account
5 User Property
6
*********************
Common Settings
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu

Common Settings: a b appears.
1
*********************
Language
2 Default Screen
3 Sound
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Timer Setting], and

press the OK key.

When you are performing user management and

Login User Name: L b have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
******************* Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Login Password: Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right
Select key).
[ Login ]

4 The Timer Settings menu appears.

Timer Setting: a b
1
*********************
Auto Panel Reset
2 PanelReset Timer
3 Low Power Timer
[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [Sleep Timer].

8-152

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

6 Press the OK key. Sleep Timer appears.

Sleep Timer: D b
(1 - 240)
******15*min.

7 Press the  or  key or the numeric keys to set

the Sleep Timer. Set the amount of time before
entering the sleep state in minutes.

8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Timer Settings menu.

Auto Error Clear

If an error occurs during printing, the print job stops to wait for the next step to be taken by the user. In the Auto
Error Clear mode, automatically clear the error after a set amount of time elapses.

The following errors are automatically cleared.

Cannot duplex print on this paper.

Send error. 8
Cannot connect to Authentication Server.
Incorrect account ID. Job is canceled.
Job Accounting restriction exceeded. Cannot print.
Job Accounting restriction exceeded. Cannot scan.
Job not stored. Press [OK].
Job Accounting restriction exceeded. Job is canceled.
Sub address/Polling box limit exceeded. Job is canceled.
Memory is full. Print job cannot be processed completely.
Maximum Number of scanned pages. Job is canceled.
Print overrun.
KPDL error.
USB memory error. Job is canceled.
No multi copies. Press [OK].

Auto Error Clear ON/OFF

Select whether to use Auto Error Clear or not.

Use the procedure below to specify the auto error clear setting.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Common Settings].
4 User/Job Account
5 User Property
6
*********************
Common Settings
[ Exit ]

8-153

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu

Common Settings: a b appears.
1
*********************
Language
2 Default Screen
3 Sound
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Timer Setting], and

press the OK key.

When you are performing user management and

Login User Name: L b have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
******************* Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Login Password: Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right
Select key).
[ Login ]

4 The Timer Settings menu appears.

Timer Setting: a b
1
*********************
Auto Panel Reset
2 PanelReset Timer
3 Low Power Timer
[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [Auto Err. Clear].

6 Press the OK key. Auto Err. Clear appears.

Auto Err. Clear: a b
1
*********************
*Off
2 On

7 Press the  or  key to select [Off] or [On].

8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Timer Settings menu.

8-154

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

Error Clear Timer

If you select [On] for Auto Error Clear, set the amount of time to wait before automatically clearing errors.
Options are between 5 and 495 seconds (every five seconds). The default setting is 30 seconds.

If you set 0 as the time, errors are not displayed.

NOTE: If you select [Off] for Auto Error Clear, the time display does not appear.

Use the procedure below to set the automatic error clear delay.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Common Settings].
4 User/Job Account
5 User Property
6
*********************
Common Settings
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu

Common Settings: a b appears.
1
*********************
Language
2 Default Screen 8
3 Sound
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Timer Setting], and

press the OK key.

When you are performing user management and

Login User Name: L b have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
******************* Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Login Password: Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right
Select key).
[ Login ]

4 The Timer Settings menu appears.

Timer Setting: a b
1
*********************
Auto Panel Reset
2 PanelReset Timer
3 Low Power Timer
[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [Err. Clear Timer].

8-155

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

6 Press the OK key. Err. Clear Timer appears.

Err. Clear Timer: b
(5 - 495)
******30*sec.

7 Press the  or  key to set the Error Clear Timer.

Set the amount of time before clearing errors in
seconds. You cannot use the numeric keys to enter
this value.

8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Timer Settings menu.

Unusable Time
You can specify the prohibition period to use.

Use the procedure below to set the Unusable Time.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Common Settings].
4 User/Job Account
5 User Property
6
*********************
Common Settings
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu

Common Settings: a b appears.
1
*********************
Language
2 Default Screen
3 Sound
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Timer Setting], and

Login User Name: L b press the OK key.
*******************
Login Password: When you are performing user management and
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
[ Login ] Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right
Select key).

4 The Timer Settings menu appears.

Timer Setting: a b
1
*********************
Auto Panel Reset
2 PanelReset Timer
3 Low Power Timer
[ Exit ]

8-156

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

5 Press the  or  key to select [Unusable Time].

6 Press the OK key. Unusable Time appears.

Unusable Time: a b
1 Off
2
*********************
*On

[ Exit ]

7 Press the  or  key to select [On].

8 Press the OK key. Start Time appears.

Start Time: a b
Hour Min.
***11*: 45
(Current Time 11:45)

9 Press the  or  key to set the Start Time.

10 Press the OK key. End Time appears.

End Time:
Hour Min.
a b 8
***07*: 00
(Current Time 11:45)

11 Press the  or  keyto set the End Time.

12 Press the OK key. Unlock Code appears.
Unlock Code: a b
(0000 - 9999)
******0000***

13 Press the  or  key or numeric keys to set the

unlock code.

14 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Timer Settings menu.

8-157

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

Editing Destination (Address Book/Adding One-Touch Keys)

Save frequently used destinations to Address Book or One-touch keys. The saved destinations can be
changed. The destinations are available for Send as E-mail, Send to Folder, and Fax Transmission.

Adding an Individual Destination

A maximum of 200 individual addresses can be registered. Each address can include the information such as
destination name, E-mail address, FTP server folder path, computer folder path, and FAX No..

NOTE:
• If user login administration is enabled, you can only edit destinations in the Address Book by logging in with
administrator privileges.
• Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.

Use the procedure below to register a new individual contact.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Edit Destination].
; Document Box
<
*********************
Edit Destination
= Adjust/Maint.
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Edit Destination menu

Edit Destination:a b appears.
1
*********************
Addressbook
2 Print List

[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Address Book].

4 Press the OK key. The Address Book list screen

Addressbook: a b appears.
k
*********************
Design
l Fiala
l Maury
[ Menu ]

5 Press [Menu] (the Right Select key). Menu

Menu: a b appears.
1
*********************
Detail Edit
2 Delete
3 Add Address
4 Search(Name)

8-158

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

6 Press the  or  key to select [Add Address].

7 Press the OK key. Add Address appears.

Add Address: a b
1
*********************
Contact
2 Group

8 Press the  or  key to select [Contact].

9 Press the OK key. This displays the screen for

Detail: C b editing destinations.
Contact Name 1/6
Sally
NOTE: If the maximum number of destinations has
already been registered, the screen will display
[ Edit ] Registered numbers exceeded. and return to the
Address Book.

10 Enter each item and then press the OK key.

Registered. is displayed and the screen returns to
the Address Book list screen. 8
Refer to the descriptions below for how to enter
each item.

Entering Contact Name

1 Press the  or  key to select [Contact Name].
Detail: C b
Contact Name 1/6
Sally

[ Edit ]

2 Press [Edit] (the Right Select key). An entry

Contact Name: A b screen appears.
Sally*
S
ABC
[ Text ]

3 Enter the contact name.

If creating a new contact name, the address

number allocated to the destination is already
entered.

4 Press the OK key. The contact name is registered.

8-159

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

Entering E-mail Address

1 Press the  or  key to display E-mail Address.
Detail: C b
p E-mail Address: 3/6
[email protected]

[ Edit ]

2 Press [Edit] (the Right Select key). An entry

Address Entry: B b screen appears.
*

ABC
[ Text ]

3 Enter the e-mail address.

NOTE: Destination can be specified using the

Address Book or the One-touch keys. Refer to
Specifying Destination on page 3-41.

4 Press the OK key. The e-mail address is

registered.

Entering Folder (SMB/FTP) Address

Folder (SMB) Address

The table below explains the items to be entered.

Item Description Max. No. of Characters

Host Name* Host name or IP address of the 64 chars

sending computer

Path Share name 128 chars

For example: scannerdata
If saving in a folder in the
shared folder:
"share name\folder name in
shared folder"

Login User Name User name for folder access 64 chars

For example,
abcdnet\james.smith

Login Password Password for folder access 64 chars

* If you specify a port number other than the default (445), use the "Host name:
port number" format. (E.g. SMBhostname: 140)

8-160

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

Folder (FTP) Address

The table below explains the items to be entered.

Item Description Max. No. of Characters

Host Name* Host name or IP address of the 64 chars

sending computer

Path Path for the file to be stored 128 chars

For example, "User\ScanData".
If no path is entered, the file is
stored in the home directory.

Login User Name User name for folder access 64 chars

Login Password Password for folder access 64 chars

Encryption If secure communication is On, -

encryption method can be
selected from Auto, DES, 3DES
and AES.
* If you specify a port number other than the default (21), use the "Hostname: port
number" format. (E.g. FTPhostname: 140)
8
1 Press the  or  key to display Folder(SMB) or
Detail: C b Folder(FTP).
Folder(SMB): 4/6
Ntid7004

[ Edit ]

2 Press [Edit] (the Right Select key). An entry

Host Name(SMB): A b screen appears.
Osaka SD*

ABC 3 Enter the host name.

[ Text ]

or

Host Name(FTP): A b NOTE: Destination can be specified using the

Address Book or the One-touch keys. Refer to
Osaka SD*
Specifying Destination on page 3-41.

ABC Enclose the IPv6 address in brackets [ ].

[ Text ]

8-161

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

4 Press the OK key. Path appears.

Path: A b
SD3\report*

ABC
[ Text ]

5 Enter the path name.

6 Press the OK key. Login User Name appears.

Login User Name: A b
Maury* S

ABC
[ Text ]

7 Enter the Login User Name.

8 Press the OK key. Login Password appears.

Login Password: A b
OOOOOOOOOOO*

ABC
[ Text ]

9 Enter the Login Password.

10 Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears.

Check the connection.
Are you sure?

[ Yes ] [ No ]

NOTE: If the screen for confirming the entry of a new

destination (page 8-77) is set to [On], screens to
confirm the entered host name and path name appear.
Enter the same host name and path name again and
press the OK key on their respective screens.

8-162

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

11 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). This makes a

Dest. Confirm.: a b connection with the entered destination.
p Morgan@kyoceradocuN
0667640000*********
0667741234
[ Exit ]

If the connection is successful, Connected. is

displayed on the screen. Press [OK] (the Right
Select key). Completed. is displayed and the
folder (SMB/FTP) address is registered.

If the connection failed, Cannot connect. is

displayed. Press [OK] (the Right Select key). The
screen shown in step 2 reappears. Check and re-
enter the destination.

Address Number

Address Number is an ID for a destination. When creating a new destination, the smallest unused address
number is automatically allocated. You can select any available number out of 200 numbers for individuals and
50 numbers for groups.

1 Press the  or  key to display Address Number.

8
Detail: C b
Address Number: 7/7
053

[ Edit ]

2 Press [Edit] (the Right Select key). An entry

Address Number: D b screen appears.
(001 - 250)
*****053*

3 Press the  or  key or the numeric keys to enter

the address number.

4 Press the OK key. The address number is

registered.

NOTE: If you enter an address number that is already

registered, the screen will display This address
number is already registered. and return to the screen
of step 2.

8-163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

Adding a Group
Compile two or more individuals into a group. Designations in the group can be added at the same time. When
adding a group, a maximum of 50 groups can be added in the Address Book.

NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only edit destinations in the Address Book by logging
in with administrator privileges.
Before adding a group in the Address Book, the individuals to be included in the group must be added first.Up
to 100 destinations can be added as the addresses. Among them, 5 destinations can be assigned for a FTP or
SMB address. The available addresses will then be 95 in total for email and/or fax addresses.

Use the procedure below to register a group.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Edit Destination].
; Document Box
<
*********************
Edit Destination
= Adjust/Maint.
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Edit Destination menu

Edit Destination:a b appears.
1
*********************
Addressbook
2 Print List

[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Address Book].

4 Press the OK key. The Address Book list screen

Addressbook: a b appears.
k
*********************
Design
l Fiala
l Maury
[ Menu ]

5 Press [Menu] (the Right Select key). Menu

Menu: a b appears.
1 Detail/Edit
2 Delete
3 Add Address
*********************

6 Press the  or  key to select [Add Address].

8-164

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

7 Press the OK key. Add Address appears.

Add Address: a b
1 Contact
2 Group
*********************

8 Press the  or  key to select [Group].

9 Press the OK key. This displays the screen for

Detail: C b editing groups.
Group Name: 1/4
GUI Section
NOTE: If the maximum number of groups has already
been registered, the screen will display Registered
[ Edit ] numbers exceeded. and return to the Address Book.

10 Enter each item and then press the OK key.

Registered. is displayed and the screen returns to
the Address Book list screen.

Refer to the descriptions below for how to enter

each item. 8
Entering Group Name
1 Press the  or  key to display Group Name.
Detail: C b
Group Name: 1/4
GUI Section

[ Edit ]

2 Press [Edit] (the Right Select key). An entry

Group Name: A b screen appears.
GUI*
S
ABC
[ Text ]

3 Enter the group name.

If creating a new group name, the address number

allocated to the destination is already entered.

4 Press the OK key. The group name is registered.

8-165

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

Entering Group Member

1 Press the  or  key to display Group Member.
Detail: C b
Group Member: 2/4
30

[ Edit ]

2 Press [Edit] (the Right Select key). This displays

Group Member: a b the list of destinations registered to the group.
p
*********************
Sally
Morgan
G Morgan
[ Menu ]

3 Press [Menu] (the Right Select key). The group

Menu: a b editing menu appears.
1 Detail
2 Delete
3 Add Member
*********************

4 Press the  or  key to select [Add Member].

5 Press the OK key. This displays the list of

Contacts: a b destinations registered in the Address Book.
l
*********************
Fiala
l Maury
NOTE: If 100 members have already been registered
l Morgan in the group, the screen will display Registered
[ Menu ] numbers exceeded. and return to the Group Member.

6 Press the  or  key to select the destination you

want to add to the group.

7 Press the OK key. This displays the sending

l Sally: a b address registered to the selected destination.
0667643277
p [email protected]
Ntid7004
[ Menu ]

8 Press the  or  key to select the sending

address.

9 Press the OK key.

10 Press the Back key to retuen to the Detail.

8-166

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

11 Use the  or  key to check if the group was set

correctly.

12 Press the OK key. The group is added to the

Address Book.

NOTE: If you select an individual destination that has

already been registered to the group, the screen will
display This address is already registered. and return
to the screen of step 7.

Deleting member from group

To delete a member registered to the group, follow the procedure below.

1 While Group Member is displayed, press [Edit] (the

Group Member: a b Right Select key). This displays the list of
p
*********************
Sally destinations registered to the group.
Morgan
Morgan
[ Menu ]
8
2 Press the  or  key to select the destination you
want to delete.

3 Press [Menu] (the Right Select key). The group

Menu: a b editing menu appears.
1 Detail
2
*********************
Delete
3 Add Member

4 Press the  or  key to select [Delete].

5 Press the OK key. A confirmation message

Delete. appears.
Are you sure?
z p Sally

[ Yes ] [ No ]

6 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). Completed. is

displayed and the screen returns to Group
Member.

Entering Address Number

Address Number is an ID for a destination. When creating a new destination, the smallest unused address
number is automatically allocated. You can select any available number out of 200 numbers for individuals and
50 numbers for groups.

8-167

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

1 Press the  or  key to display Address Number.

Detail: C b
Address Number: 4/4
019

[ Edit ]

2 Press [Edit] (the Right Select key). An entry

Address Number: D b screen appears.
(001 - 250)
*****053*

3 Press the  or  key or the numeric keys to enter

the address number.

4 Press the OK key. The address number is

registered.

NOTE: If you enter an address number that is already

registered, the screen will display This address
number is already registered. and return to the screen
of step 2.

Editing a Destination
Edit/delete the destinations (individuals) you added to the Address Book.

Use the procedure below to edit a destination.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [Edit Destination].
; Document Box
<
*********************
Edit Destination
= Adjust/Maint.
[ Exit ]

2 Press the OK key. The Edit Destination menu

Edit Destination:a b appears.
1
*********************
Addressbook
2 Print List

[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Address Book].

8-168

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

4 Press the OK key. The Address Book list screen

Addressbook: a b appears.
k
*********************
Design
l Fiala
l Maury
[ Menu ]

5 Press the  or  key to select the destination you

want to edit.

6 Press [Menu] (the Right Select key). Menu

Menu: a b appears.
1
*********************
Detail Rdit
2 Delete
3 Add Address
4 Search(Name)

7 Press the  or  key to select [Detail/Edit].

8 Press the OK key. This displays the screen for

Detail: A b editing the selected destination.
Contact name 1/7
The screen shown is the one when an individual's
8
Sally
destination is selected.

[ Edit ]

9 Edit items as necessary.

For how to edit each item, refer to Adding an

Individual Destination on page 8-158 and Adding a
Group on page 8-164.

10 After completing editing, press the OK key. A

Overwrite. confirmation screen appears.
Are you sure?
z p Sally

[ Yes ] [ No ]

11 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). Registered. is

displayed and the screen returns to the Address
Book list screen.

8-169

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

Adding a Destination on One-touch Key

This machine has 11 one-touch keys and you can register 2 destinations to each of them.

The one-touch keys are arranged as shown below:

No.1 No.2 No.3 No.4

No.12 No.13 No.14 No.15
No.5 No.6 No.7 No.8
No.16 No.17 No.18 No.19
No.9 No.10 No.11
SHIFT
No.20 No.21 No.22

NOTE: Refer to One-Touch Key on page 3-3 for how to use them.

Registering new destination

Use the procedure below to register a new destination under a One-touch key.

1 In the basic screen, press the one-touch key to

Select Key No.: a b which you want to register the destination and hold
1
*********************
No. 1 it (2 seconds or longer). Select Key Set. appears.
2 No. 12
The screen shown is the one when No.1/No.12 is
pressed and held.
[ Exit ]

2 Press the  or  key to select the key number to

which you want to register the destination.

3 Press the OK key. The Address Book list screen

Addressbook: a b appears.
k
*********************
Design
l Fiala
l Maury
[ Menu ]

4 Press the  or  key to select the destination you

want to register.

NOTE: If you want to search from the Address Book,

refer to Search in Address Book on page 3-42.

5 Press the OK key. The selected destination is

registered to the one-touch key. Registered. is
displayed and the screen returns to the basic
screen.

8-170

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

Editing One-touch Key

Edit/delete the destinations you added to One-touch Key.

Use the procedure below to edit the one-touch key.

1 In the basic screen, press the one-touch key where

Select Key No.: a b you want to edit the destination and hold it (2
1
*********************
No. 1 seconds or longer). Select Key Set. appears.
2 No. 12
The screen shown is the one when No.1/No.12 is
pressed and held.
[ Exit ]

2 Press the  or  key to select the key number

where you want to edit the destination.

3 Press the OK key. The Key Edit appears.

Key Edit: a b
1
*********************
Edit
NOTE: If nothing is stored in a one-touch key, the key
2 Detail
edit screen will not appear; the address book screen
3 Delete will appear instead. Go to step 6.
[ Exit ]
8
4 Press the  or  key to select [Edit].

NOTE: If you select [Delete] here and press the OK

key, you can delete the registration of the destination.
If you press [Yes] (the Left Select key) in the screen
that appears, Completed. is displayed and the
registration of the destination is deleted.

5 Press the OK key. The Address Book list screen

Addressbook: a b appears.
k
*********************
Design
l Fiala
l Maury
[ Menu ]

6 Press the  or  key to select the destination you

want to newly register.

NOTE: If you want to search from the Address Book,

refer to Search in Address Book on page 3-42.

8-171

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

7 Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears.

Overwrite.
Are you sure?
z No. 1

[ Yes ] [ No ]

8 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The selected

destination is registered to the one-touch key,
overwriting the previous one. Registered. is
displayed and the screen returns to the basic
screen.

8-172

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

Restarting the System

Restart the machine without turning the main power switch off. Use this to deal with any unstable operation by
the machine. (Same as the computer restart.)

Use the procedure below to restart the system.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [System/Network], and press the OK
1 Report key.
2 Counter
3
*********************
System/Network
[ Exit ]

When you are performing user management and

Login User Name: L b have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
******************* Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Login Password: Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right
Select key).
[ Login ]

2 The System/Network menu appears. 8

System/Network: a b
5 Security Level
6
*********************
Restart
7 Op Functions
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Restart].

4 Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears.

Restart.
Are you sure?

[ Yes ] [ No ]

5 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The machine is

restarted.

If you press [No] (the Right Select key), the

machine does not restart and the screen returns to
the System menu.

8-173

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

Network Setup
The following network settings are available.
• LAN Interface Setup …8-174
• TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup …8-175
• TCP/IP (IPv6) Setup …8-175
• Bonjour Settings …8-177
• WSD Scan Setup …8-178
• WSD Print Setup …8-179
• Protocol Detail …8-181
• Restart Network …8-184

NOTE: After all network related settings have been done, turn the machine OFF and ON again. This is
mandatory to make the settings effective!

LAN Interface Setup

Specify the settings for the LAN interface to be used. The default setting is Auto.
Use the procedure below to select the interface.
1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [System/Network], and press the OK
1 Report key.
2 Counter
3
*********************
System/Network
[ Exit ]

When you are performing user management and

Login User Name: L b have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
******************* Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Login Password: Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right
Select key).
[ Login ]

2 The System/Network menu appears.

System/Network: a b
1
*********************
Network Setting
2 Optional Network
3 NW InterfaceSend
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Network Setting].

4 Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu
Network Setting: a b appears.
1
*********************
*TCP/IP Setting
2 WSD-SCAN
3 WSD-PRINT
[ Exit ]

8-174

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

5 Press the  or  key to select [LAN Interface].

6 Press the OK key. LAN Interface appears.

LAN Interface: a b
1
*********************
*Auto
2 10Base-Half
3 10Base-Full

7 Press the  or  key to select the desired LAN

interface.

The available LAN interfaces are as follows:

Auto
10Base-Half
10Base-Full
100Base-Half
100Base-Full
1000Base-T

8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the 8

screen returns to the Network Setting menu.

TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup

Set up TCP/IP to connect to the Windows network.

Refer to Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection) on page 2-15 about the procedures.

TCP/IP (IPv6) Setup

Set up TCP/IP (IPv6) to connect to the network. The default setting is Off.

Use the procedure below to setup the TCP/IP (IPv6) setting.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [System/Network], and press the OK
1 Report key.
2 Counter
3
*********************
System/Network
[ Exit ]

When you are performing user management and

Login User Name: L b have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
******************* Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Login Password: Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right
Select key).
[ Login ]

8-175

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

2 The System/Network menu appears.

System/Network: a b
1
*********************
Network Setting
2 Optional Network
3 NW InterfaceSend
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Network Setting].

4 Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu

Network Setting: a b appears.
1
*********************
*TCP/IP Setting
2 WSD-SCAN
3 WSD-PRINT
[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [TCP/IP Settings].

6 Press the OK key. The TCP/IP Settings menu

TCP/IP Settings: a b appears.
1
*********************
TCP/IP
2 IPv4 Setting
3 IPv6 Setting
[ Exit ]

7 Press the  or  key to select [IPv6 Setting].

8 Press the OK key. IPv6 Setting appears.

IPv6 Setting: a b
1
*********************
*Off
2 On

[ Exit ]

9 Press the  or  key to select [On] or [Off].

10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the TCP/IP Settings menu.

8-176

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

Bonjour Settings
Select whether or not to use Bonjour. The default setting is On.

Use the procedure below to specify the Bonjour setting.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [System/Network], and press the OK
1 Report key.
2 Counter
3
*********************
System/Network
[ Exit ]

When you are performing user management and

Login User Name: L b have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
******************* Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Login Password: Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right
Select key).
[ Login ]

2 The System/Network menu appears.

System/Network: a b 8
1
*********************
Network Setting
2 Optional Network
3 NW InterfaceSend
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Network Setting].

4 Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu

Network Setting: a b appears.
1
*********************
*TCP/IP Setting
2 WSD-SCAN
3 WSD-PRINT
[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [TCP/IP Settings].

6 Press the OK key. The TCP/IP Settings menu

TCP/IP Settings: a b appears.
1
*********************
TCP/IP
2 IPv4 Setting
3 IPv6 Setting
[ Exit ]

7 Press the  or  key to select [TCP/IP].

8-177

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

8 Press the OK key. TCP/IP appears.

TCP/IP: a b
1
*********************
*Off
2 On

9 Press the  or  key to select [On] and then press

the OK key.

Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to

the TCP/IP Settings menu.

10 Press the  or  key to select [Bonjour].

11 Press the OK key. Bonjour appears.
Bonjour: a b
1 Off
2 *On
*********************

12 Press the  or  key to select [On] or [Off] and

then press the OK key.

Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to

the TCP/IP Settings menu.

WSD Scan Setup

Select whether or not to use WSD Scan. The default setting is On.

Use the procedure below to setup the WSD-SCAN setting. The machine must be restarted after the setting is
changed.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [System/Network], and press the OK
1 Report key.
2 Counter
3
*********************
System/Network
[ Exit ]

When you are performing user management and

Login User Name: L b have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
******************* Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Login Password: Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right
Select key).
[ Login ]

8-178

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

2 The System/Network menu appears.

System/Network: a b
1
*********************
Network Setting
2 Optional Network
3 NW InterfaceSend
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Network Setting].

4 Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu

Network Setting: a b appears.
1
*********************
*TCP/IP Setting
2 WSD-SCAN
3 WSD-PRINT
[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [WSD-SCAN].

6 Press the OK key. The WSD-SCAN menu

WSD-SCAN: a b appears.
1
*********************
*Off
2 On 8

7 Press the  or  key to select [On] or [Off].

8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Network Settings menu.

WSD Print Setup

Select whether or not to use WSD Print. The default setting is On.

Use the procedure below to setup the WSD-PRINT setting. The machine must be restarted after the setting is
changed.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [System/Network], and press the OK
1 Report key.
2 Counter
3
*********************
System/Network
[ Exit ]

8-179

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

When you are performing user management and

Login User Name: L b have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
******************* Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Login Password: Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right
Select key).
[ Login ]

2 The System/Network menu appears.

System/Network: a b
1
*********************
Network Setting
2 Optional Network
3 NW InterfaceSend
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Network Setting].

4 Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu

Network Setting: a b appears.
1
*********************
*TCP/IP Setting
2 WSD-SCAN
3 WSD-PRINT
[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [WSD-PRINT].

6 Press the OK key. The WSD-PRINT menu

WSD-PRINT: a b appears.
1
*********************
*Off
2 On

7 Press the  or  key to select [On] or [Off].

8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Network Settings menu.

8-180

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

Protocol Detail
Make other network related settings.

Restarting the
Item Description Default Setting
System*

NetBEUI Selects whether or not to On 

receive documents using
NetBEUI.

SNMPv3 Set SNMPv3. Off 

FTP (Server) Select whether or not to On 

receive documents using
FTP.

FTP (Client) Select whether or not to On ×

send documents using FTP, Port number: 21
and the number of the port
to be used.

SMB Select whether or not to On 

send documents using Port number: 139
SMB, and the number of the 8
port to be used.

SNMP Select whether or not to On 

communicate using SNMP.

SMTP Select whether or not to Off ×

(E-mail TX) send e-mail using SMTP.

POP3 Select whether or not to Off ×

(E-mail RX) receive e-mail using POP3.

Raw Port Select whether or not to On 

communicate using Raw
Port.

LPD Select whether or not to On 

receive documents using
LPD as the network
protocol.

IPP Select whether or not to use Off 

IPP, and the number of the Port number: 631
port to be used.

IPP over SSL Select whether or not to use On 

IPP over SSL.
SSL must be set to [On] in
SSL Setting on page 8-185.

HTTP Select whether or not to On 

communicate using HTTP.

8-181

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

Restarting the
Item Description Default Setting
System*

HTTPS Select whether or not to On 

communicate using HTTPS.
SSL must be set to [On] in
SSL Setting on page 8-185.

LDAP Select whether or not to use Off ×

LDAP.

ThinPrint Select whether or not to use On 

ThinPrint.

ThinPrintOverSSL Select whether or not to use On 

ThinPrintOverSSL.
SSL must be set to [On] in
SSL Setting on page 8-185.
* : The machine must be restarted after the setting is changed.
×: The machine does not need to be restarted after the setting is changed.

Use the procedure below.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [System/Network], and press the OK
1 Report key.
2 Counter
3
*********************
System/Network
[ Exit ]

When you are performing user management and

Login User Name: L b have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
******************* Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Login Password: Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right
Select key).
[ Login ]

2 The System/Network menu appears.

System/Network: a b
1
*********************
Network Setting
2 Optional Network
3 NW InterfaceSend
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Network Setting].

8-182

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

4 Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu

Network Setting: a b appears.
1
*********************
*TCP/IP Setting
2 WSD-SCAN
3 WSD-PRINT
[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [TCP/IP Settings].

6 Press the OK key. The TCP/IP Settings menu

TCP/IP Settings: a b appears.
3 IPv6 Setting
4 Bonjour
5
*********************
Protocol Detail
[ Exit ]

7 Press the  or  key to select [Protocol Detail].

8 Press the OK key. The Protocol Detail menu

Protocol Detail: a b appears.
1
*********************
NetBEUI
2 SNMPv3 8
3 FTP(Server)

9 Press the  or  key to select the item for which

you want to make settings.

10 Press the OK key. This displays the setting screen

FTP(Client): a b for the item selected in step 9.
1
*********************
*Off
2 On The screen shown is the one when [FTP(Client)] is
selected.

11 Press the  or  key to select [On] or [Off].

If you select [On] for each of [FTP(Client)] and
Port Number: D b [IPP] and press the OK key, a port number entry
(1 - 65535) screen appears.
*******21*
Press the  or  key or the numeric keys to set
the port number.

12 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Protocol Detail menu.

8-183

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

Restart Network
After all network related settings have been done, restart the network card of the device. This is mandatory to
make the settings effective.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [System/Network], and press the OK
1 Report key.
2 Counter
3
*********************
System/Network
[ Exit ]

A login screen will appear. Then, enter the user ID

Login User Name: L b and password with administrator privileges to log
******************* in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key).
Login Password:

[ Login ]

2 The System/Network menu appears.

System/Network: a b
1
*********************
Network Setting
2 Optional Network
3 NW InterfaceSend
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Network Setting].

4 Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu
Network Setting: a b appears.
1
*********************
*TCP/IP Setting
2 WSD-SCAN
3 WSD-PRINT
[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [Restart Network].

6 Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears.
Restart.
Are you sure?

[ Yes ] [ No ]

7 Press [Yes]. (the Left Select key). The message

Restarting... appears and the network is restarted.

Pressing [No] (the Right Select key) returns to the

Network Settings menu without restarting the
network.

8-184

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

Network Security
The network security functions can be set up to protect printer operation and the print data.

The following network security settings are available.

• SSL Setting …8-185

• SNMPv3 Setting …8-193
• IPSec Setting …8-194

SSL Setting
This allows you to use SSL network security for communication. You can use SSL Setup to select whether or
not SSL is used and to specify the IPP port and HTTP port security settings.

SSL

Make this setting Make this setting when you use SSL. The default setting is On.

Use the procedure below to make the setting.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [System/Network], and press the OK
1 Report key. 8
2 Counter
3
*********************
System/Network
[ Exit ]

When you are performing user management and

Login User Name: L b have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
******************* Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Login Password: Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right
Select key).
[ Login ]

2 The System/Network menu appears.

System/Network: a b
1
*********************
Network Setting
2 Optional Network
3 NW InterfaceSend
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Network Setting].

8-185

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

4 Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu

Network Setting: a b appears.
5
*********************
Secure Protocol
6 Host Name
7 LAN Interface
[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [Secure Protocol].

6 Press the OK key. Secure Protocol appears.

Secure Protocol: a b
1
*********************
SSL
2 IPP Security
3 HTTP Security
[ Exit ]

7 Press the  or  key to select [SSL].

8 Press the OK key. SSL appears.

SSL: a b
1 Off
2 *On
*********************

9 Press the  or  key to select [On] or [Off].

10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Secure Protocol menu.

IPP Security

Specify the protocol to be used for IPP. The default setting is IPP/IPP over SSL.

Use the procedure below to make the setting.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [System/Network], and press the OK
1 Report key.
2 Counter
3
*********************
System/Network
[ Exit ]

When you are performing user management and

Login User Name: L b have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
******************* Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Login Password: Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right
Select key).
[ Login ]

8-186

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

2 The System/Network menu appears.

System/Network: a b
1
*********************
Network Setting
2 Optional Network
3 NW InterfaceSend
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Network Setting].

4 Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu

Network Setting: a b appears.
5
*********************
Secure Protocol
6 Host Name
7 LAN Interface
[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [Secure Protocol].

6 Press the OK key. Secure Protocol appears.

Secure Protocol: a b
1 SSL
2
*********************
IPP Security 8
3 HTTP Security
[ Exit ]

7 Press the  or  key to select [IPP Security].

8 Press the OK key. IPP Security appears.

IPP Security: a b
1
*********************
*IPP/IPP over SSL
2 IPPoverSSL only

9 Press the  or  key to select [IPP/IPP over SSL]

or [IPPoverSSL only].

10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Secure Protocol menu.

HTTP Security

Specify the protocol to be used for HTTP. The default setting is HTTPS only.

Use the procedure below to make the setting.

8-187

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [System/Network], and press the OK
1 Report key.
2 Counter
3
*********************
System/Network
[ Exit ]

When you are performing user management and

Login User Name: L b have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
******************* Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Login Password: Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right
Select key).
[ Login ]

2 The System/Network menu appears.

System/Network: a b
1
*********************
Network Setting
2 Optional Network
3 NW InterfaceSend
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Network Setting].

4 Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu

Network Setting: a b appears.
5
*********************
Secure Protocol
6 Host Name
7 LAN Interface
[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [Secure Protocol].

6 Press the OK key. Secure Protocol appears.

Secure Protocol: a b
1 SSL
2 IPP Security
3
*********************
HTTP Security
[ Exit ]

7 Press the  or  key to select [HTTP Security].

8 Press the OK key. HTTP Security appears.

HTTP Security: a b
1 HTTP/HTTPS
2 *HTTPS only
*********************

8-188

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

9 Press the  or  key to select [HTTP/HTTPS] or

[HTTPS only].

10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Secure Protocol menu.

LDAP Security

Select the communication protocol according to the type of security employed by the LDAP server. The default
setting is Off.

The table below shows the available settings.

Item Description

Off Do not use security employed by the LDAP server.

SSL/TLS Encryption is applied any data communication. To enable LDAP security, the
LDAP port may have to be changed according to the server settings.
Typically, 636* for SSL/TLS is well-known LDAP port.

STARTTLS Encryption is applied any data communication. Typically, 389* for

STARTTLS is well-known LDAP port.

* You can change the port number using Command Center RX. 8
Use the procedure below to make the setting.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [System/Network], and press the OK
1 Report key.
2 Counter
3
*********************
System/Network
[ Exit ]

When you are performing user management and

Login User Name: L b have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
******************* Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Login Password: Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right
Select key).
[ Login ]

2 The System/Network menu appears.

System/Network: a b
1
*********************
Network Setting
2 Optional Network
3 NW InterfaceSend
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Network Setting].

8-189

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

4 Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu

Network Setting: a b appears.
5
*********************
Secure Protocol
6 Host Name
7 LAN Interface
[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [Secure Protocol].

6 Press the OK key. Secure Protocol appears.

Secure Protocol: a b
2 IPP Security
3 HTTP Security
4
*********************
LDAP Security
[ Exit ]

7 Press the  or  key to select [LDAP Security].

8 Press the OK key. LDAP Security appears.

LDAP Security: a b
1
*********************
*Off
2 SSL/TLS
3 STARTTLS

9 Press the  or  key to select [Off], [SSL/TLS] or

[STARTTLS].

10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Secure Protocol menu.

SMTP Security

Select the communication protocol according to the type of security employed by the SMTP server. The default
setting is Off.

The table below shows the available settings.

Item Description

Off Do not use security employed by the SMTP server.

SSL/TLS Encryption is applied any data communication. To enable SMTP security, the
SMTP port may have to be changed according to the server settings.
Typically, 465* for SSL/TLS is well-known SMTP port.

STARTTLS Encryption is applied any data communication. Typically, 25* or 587* for
STARTTLS is well-known SMTP port.

* You can change the port number using Command Center RX.

Use the procedure below to make the setting.

8-190

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [System/Network], and press the OK
1 Report key.
2 Counter
3
*********************
System/Network
[ Exit ]

When you are performing user management and

Login User Name: L b have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
******************* Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Login Password: Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right
Select key).
[ Login ]

2 The System/Network menu appears.

System/Network: a b
1
*********************
Network Setting
2 Optional Network
3 NW InterfaceSend
[ Exit ]
8
3 Press the  or  key to select [Network Setting].

4 Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu

Network Setting: a b appears.
1
*********************
*TCP/IP Setting
2 WSD-SCAN
3 WSD-PRINT
[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [Secure Protocol].

6 Press the OK key. Secure Protocol appears.

Secure Protocol: a b
3 HTTP Security
4 LDAP Security
5
*********************
SMTP Security
[ Exit ]

7 Press the  or  key to select [SMTP Security].

8 Press the OK key. SMTP Security appears.

SMTP Security: a b
1
*********************
*Off
2 SSL/TLS
3 STARTTLS

8-191

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

9 Press the  or  key to select [Off], [SSL/TLS] or

[STARTTLS].

10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Secure Protocol menu.

POP3 Security 1 (2, 3)

Select the communication protocol according to the type of security employed by the POP3 server. The default
setting is Off.

The table below shows the available settings.

Item Description

Off Do not use security employed by the POP3 server.

SSL/TLS Encryption is applied any data communication. To enable POP3 security, the
POP3 port may have to be changed according to the server settings.
Typically, 995* for SSL/TLS is well-known POP3 port.

STARTTLS Encryption is applied any data communication. Typically, 110* for STARTTLS
is well-known POP3 port.

* You can change the port number using Command Center RX.

Use the procedure below to make the setting.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [System/Network], and press the OK
1 Report key.
2 Counter
3
*********************
System/Network
[ Exit ]

When you are performing user management and

Login User Name: L b have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
******************* Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Login Password: Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right
Select key).
[ Login ]

2 The System/Network menu appears.

System/Network: a b
1
*********************
Network Setting
2 Optional Network
3 NW InterfaceSend
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Network Setting].

8-192

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

4 Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu

Network Setting: a b appears.
1
*********************
*TCP/IP Setting
2 WSD-SCAN
3 WSD-PRINT
[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [Secure Protocol].

6 Press the OK key. Secure Protocol appears.

Secure Protocol: a b
4 LDAP Security
5 SMTP Security
6
*********************
POP3 Security 1
[ Exit ]

7 Press the  or  key to select [POP3 Security 1],

[POP3 Security 2] or [POP3 Security 3].

8 Press the OK key. POP3 Security appears.

POP3 Security 1: a b
1
*********************
*Off 8
2 SSL/TLS
3 STARTTLS

9 Press the  or  key to select [Off], [SSL/TLS] or

[STARTTLS].

10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Secure Protocol menu.

SNMPv3 Setting
Sets up SNMPv3. The default setting is Off. Use the procedure below.

Refer to Protocol Detail on page 8-181 about the procedures.

8-193

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

IPSec Setting
Make this setting when you use IPSec. The default setting is Off and that of Rule Setting is also Off.

Use the procedure below to make the setting.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [System/Network], and press the OK
1 Report key.
2 Counter
3
*********************
System/Network
[ Exit ]

When you are performing user management and

Login User Name: L b have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
******************* Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Login Password: Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right
Select key).
[ Login ]

2 The System/Network menu appears.

System/Network: a b
1
*********************
Network Setting
2 Optional Network
3 NW InterfaceSend
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Network Setting].

4 Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu

Network Setting: a b appears.
2 WSD-SCAN
3 WSD-PRINT
4
*********************
IPSec
[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [IPSec].

6 Press the OK key. IPSec appears.

IPSec: a b
1
*********************
*Off
2 On

8-194

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

7 Press the  or  key to select [On] or [Off].

If you select [On] and press the OK key, Rule

Rule Setting: a b Setting appears. Press the  or  key to select
1
*********************
*Off [On] or [Off].
2 On

8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Network Setting menu.

8-195

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

Optional Network
This selects the settings for the optional network interface kit (IB-50) or wireless network interface kit (IB-51).

NOTE: This is only displayed when a network interface kit (IB-50) or wireless network interface kit (IB-51) is
installed as an option.
Check with your network administrator when selecting the network setting. After all network related settings
have been done, restart the network. Refer to Restart Network on page 8-206. This is mandatory to make the
settings effective!
When Command Center RX is used, network parameters and security settings can be conveniently changed
and checked from your PC. For more information, refer to the Command Center RX User Guide

TCP/IP Settings
This selects the TCP/IP settings.
The options available in the TCP/IP Settings are as follows:
• TCP/IP …8-197
• IPv4 Setting …8-197
• IPv6 Setting …8-197
1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [System/Network], and press the OK
1 Report key.
2 Counter
3
*********************
System/Network
[ Exit ]

A login screen will appear. Then, enter the user ID

Login User Name: L b and password with administrator privileges to log
******************* in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key).
Login Password:

[ Login ]

2 The System/Network menu appears.

System/Network: a b
1
*********************
Network Setting
2 Optional Network
3 NW InterfaceSend
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Optional Network].

8-196

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

4 Press the OK key. The Optional Network screen

Optional Network:a b appears.
1
*********************
Basic

[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [Basic].

Basic: a b
1
*********************
Host Name
2 TCP/IP Settings
3 Bonjour
[ Exit ]

6 Press the OK key. The Basic menu screen

appears.

7 Press the  or  key to select [TCP/IP Settings].

8 Press the OK key. The TCP/IP Settings menu

TCP/IP Settings: a b screen appears.
1
*********************
TCP/IP 8
2 IPv4 Setting
3 IPv6 Setting
[ Exit ]

TCP/IP

This specified whether TCP/IP is used.

The method for setting is the same as for the standard Network settings. For details, refer to TCP/IP (IPv4)
Setup on page 8-175.

IPv4 Setting

This selects the settings for TCP/IP (IPv4). The method for setting is the same as for the standard Network
settings. For details, refer to TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup on page 8-175.

IPv6 Setting

This selects the settings for TCP/IP (IPv6). The method for setting is the same as for the standard Network
settings. For details, refer to TCP/IP (IPv6) Setup on page 8-175.

8-197

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

Bonjour Settings

Select whether or not to use Bonjour. The default setting is Off.

Use the procedure below to specify the Bonjour setting.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [System/Network], and press the OK
1 Report key.
2 Counter
3
*********************
System/Network
[ Exit ]

A login screen will appear. Then, enter the user ID

Login User Name: L b and password with administrator privileges to log
******************* in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key).
Login Password:

[ Login ]

2 The System/Network menu appears.

System/Network: a b
1
*********************
Network Setting
2 Optional Network
3 NW InterfaceSend
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Optional Network].

4 Press the OK key. The Optional Network screen

Optional Network:a b appears.
1
*********************
Basic

[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [Basic].

6 Press the OK key. The Basic menu screen

Basic: a b appears.
1
*********************
Host Name
2 TCP/IP Settings
3 Bonjour
[ Exit ]

7 Press the  or  key to select [Bonjour].

8-198

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

8 Press the OK key. Bonjour appears.

Bonjour: a b
1
*********************
*Off
2 On

9 Press the  or  key to select [On] or [Off] and

then press the OK key.

Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to

the Basic menu.

IPSec

Make this setting when you use IPSec. The default setting is Off.

Use the procedure below to make the setting.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [System/Network], and press the OK
1 Report key. 8
2 Counter
3
*********************
System/Network
[ Exit ]

A login screen will appear. Then, enter the user ID

Login User Name: L b and password with administrator privileges to log
******************* in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key).
Login Password:

[ Login ]

2 The System/Network menu appears.

System/Network: a b
1
*********************
Network Setting
2 Optional Network
3 NW InterfaceSend
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Optional Network].

8-199

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

4 Press the OK key. The Optional Network screen

Optional Network:a b appears.
1
*********************
Basic

[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [Basic].

6 Press the OK key. The Basic menu screen

Basic: a b appears.
1
*********************
Host Name
2 TCP/IP Settings
3 Bonjour
[ Exit ]

7 Press the  or  key to select [IPSec].

8 Press the OK key. The IPSec screen appears.

IPSec: a b
1
*********************
*Off
2 On

9 Press the  or  key to select [Off] or [On].

10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Basic menu.

NetWare Setup

Make this setting when you use NetWare. The default settings is "Off".

Use the procedure below to setup the NetWare setting.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [System/Network], and press the OK
1 Report key.
2 Counter
3
*********************
System/Network
[ Exit ]

A login screen will appear. Then, enter the user ID

Login User Name: L b and password with administrator privileges to log
******************* in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key).
Login Password:

[ Login ]

8-200

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

2 The System/Network menu appears.

System/Network: a b
1
*********************
Network Setting
2 Optional Network
3 NW InterfaceSend
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Optional Network].

4 Press the OK key. The Optional Network screen

Optional Network:a b appears.
1
*********************
Basic

[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [Basic].

6 Press the OK key. The Basic menu screen

Basic: a b appears.
1
*********************
Host Name
2 TCP/IP Settings 8
3 Bonjour
[ Exit ]

7 Press the  or  key to select [NetWare].

8 Press the OK key. NetWare appears.

NetWare: a b
1
*********************
*Off
2 On

9 Press the  or  key to select [On] or [Off].

10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Basic menu.

8-201

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

AppleTalk Setup

Make this setting when you use AppleTalk. The default setting is Off.
Use the procedure below to setup the AppleTalk setting.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [System/Network], and press the OK
1 Report key.
2 Counter
3
*********************
System/Network
[ Exit ]

2 A login screen will appear. Then, enter the user ID

Login User Name: L b and password with administrator privileges to log
******************* in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key).
Login Password:

[ Login ]

3 The System/Network menu appears.

System/Network: a b
1
*********************
Network Setting
2 Optional Network
3 NW InterfaceSend
[ Exit ]

4 Press the  or  key to select [Optional Network].

5 Press the OK key. The Optional Network screen

Optional Network:a b appears.
1
*********************
Basic

[ Exit ]

6 Press the  or  key to select [Basic].

Basic: a b
7 Press the  or  key to select [AppleTalk].
1
*********************
Host Name
2 TCP/IP Settings
3 Bonjour
[ Exit ]

8-202

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

8 Press the OK key. AppleTalk appears.

AppleTalk: a b
1
*********************
*Off
2 On

9 Press the  or  key to select [On] or [Off].

10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Basic menu.

LAN Interface

Specify the settings for the LAN interface to be used. The default setting is Auto.

Use the procedure below to select the interface.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [System/Network], and press the OK
1 Report key.
2 Counter
3
*********************
System/Network 8
[ Exit ]

A login screen will appear. Then, enter the user ID

Login User Name: L b and password with administrator privileges to log
******************* in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key).
Login Password:

[ Login ]

2 The System/Network menu appears.

System/Network: a b
1
*********************
Network Setting
2 Optional Network
3 NW InterfaceSend
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Optional Network].

4 Press the OK key. The Optional Network screen

Optional Network:a b appears.
1
*********************
Basic

[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [Basic].

8-203

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

6 Press the OK key. The Basic menu screen

Basic: a b appears.
1
*********************
Host Name
2 TCP/IP Settings
3 Bonjour
[ Exit ]

7 Press the  or  key to select [LAN Interface].

8 Press the OK key. The LAN Interface screen

LAN Interface: a b appears.
1
*********************
Auto
2 10Base-Half 9 Press the  or  key to select the desired [LAN
Interface].
3 10Base-Full
[ Exit ] The available LAN Interface are as follows:

Auto
10Base-Half
10Base-Full
100Base-Half
100Base-Full
1000Base-T

10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Basic menu.

MAC Address Filter

Select whether to use MAC Address Filter. The default setting is On.

Use the procedure below to setup the MAC Address Filter setting.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [System/Network], and press the OK
1 Report key.
2 Counter
3
*********************
System/Network
[ Exit ]

A login screen will appear. Then, enter the user ID

Login User Name: L b and password with administrator privileges to log
******************* in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key).
Login Password:

[ Login ]

8-204

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

2 The System/Network menu appears.

System/Network: a b
1
*********************
Network Setting
2 Optional Network
3 NW InterfaceSend
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Optional Network].

4 Press the OK key. The Optional Network screen

Optional Network:a b appears.
1
*********************
Basic

[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [Basic].

6 Press the OK key. The Basic menu screen

Basic: a b appears.
1
*********************
Host Name
2 TCP/IP Settings 8
3 Bonjour
[ Exit ]

7 Press the  or  key to select [MAC Address

Filter].

8 Press the OK key. The MAC Address Filter screen

MACAddressFilter:a b appears.
1 Off
*********************
2 *On

9 Press the  or  key to select [On] or [Off].

10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the Basic menu.

8-205

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

Restart Network
After all network related settings have been done, restart the network card of the device. This is mandatory to
make the settings effective.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [System/Network], and press the OK
1 Report key.
2 Counter
3
*********************
System/Network
[ Exit ]

A login screen will appear. Then, enter the user ID

Login User Name: L b and password with administrator privileges to log
******************* in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key).
Login Password:

[ Login ]

2 The System/Network menu appears.

System/Network: a b
1
*********************
Network Setting
2 Optional Network
3 NW InterfaceSend
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Optional Network].

4 Press the OK key. The Optional Network screen

Optional Network:a b appears.
1
*********************
Basic

[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [Basic].

6 Press the OK key. The Basic menu screen

Basic: a b appears.
1
*********************
Host Name
2 TCP/IP Settings
3 Bonjour
[ Exit ]

7 Press the  or  key to select [Restart Network].

8-206

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

8 Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears.

Restart.
Are you sure? Press [Yes]. (the Left Select key). The message
Restarting... appears and the network is restarted.

Pressing [No] (the Right Select key) returns to the

[ Yes ] [ No ] Basic menu without restarting the network.

8-207

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

NW InterfaceSend
The client function such as the network authentication and the reference of user information via LDAP operates
only by the selected interface. This function is mainly used for the network system administrator. For more
information about each function, refer to Command Center RX User Guide.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [System/Network], and press the OK
1 Report key.
2 Counter
3
*********************
System/Network
[ Exit ]

A login screen will appear. Then, enter the user ID

Login User Name: L b and password with administrator privileges to log
******************* in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key).
Login Password:

[ Login ]

2 The System/Network menu appears.

System/Network: a b
1
*********************
Network Setting
2 Optional Network
3 NW InterfaceSend
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [NW

InterfaceSend].

4 Press the OK key. The NW InterfaceSend screen

NW InterfaceSend:a b appears.
1
*********************
*Standard
2 Option NIC

[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select the desired [NIC].

Standard: standard network interface

Option NIC: optional network interface kit

6 Press the OK key. The NIC is set and the Basic

menu reappears.

8-208

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

Interface Block Setting

This allows you to protect this machine by blocking the interface with external devices such as USB hosts or
optional interfaces.

The following interface block settings are available:

• USB Host (USB memory slot setting)

• USB Device (USB interface setting)
• USB Storage (USB storage setting)
• Optional interface (Optional interface card setting)

USB Host (USB memory slot setting)

This locks and protects the USB memory slot (A1) or USB port (A2) (USB host). The default setting is Unblock.

Use the procedure below to specify the USB Host setting.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [System/Network], and press the OK
1 Report key.
2 Counter
3
*********************
System/Network 8
[ Exit ]

When you are performing user management and

Login User Name: L b have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
******************* Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Login Password: Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right
Select key).
[ Login ]

2 The System/Network menu appears.

System/Network: a b
1
*********************
Network Setting
2 Optional Network
3 NW InterfaceSend
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [I/F Block Set.].

4 Press the OK key. The I/F Block Set. menu

I/F Block Set.: a b appears.
1
*********************
USB Host
2 USB Device
3 USB Storage
[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [USB Host].

8-209

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

6 Press the OK key. USB Host appears.

USB Host: a b
1
*********************
*Unblock
2 Block

7 Press the  or  key to select [Unblock] or

[Block].

8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the I/F Block Set. menu.

USB Device (USB interface setting)

This locks and protects the USB interface connector (B1) (USB Device). The default setting is Unblock.

Use the procedure below to specify the USB Device setting.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [System/Network], and press the OK
1 Report key.
2 Counter
3
*********************
System/Network
[ Exit ]

When you are performing user management and

Login User Name: L b have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
******************* Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Login Password: Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right
Select key).
[ Login ]

2 The System/Network menu appears.

System/Network: a b
1
*********************
Network Setting
2 Optional Network
3 NW InterfaceSend
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [I/F Block Set.].

4 Press the OK key. The I/F Block Set. menu

I/F Block Set.: a b appears.
1
*********************
USB Host
2 USB Device
3 USB Storage
[ Exit ]

8-210

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

5 Press the  or  key to select [USB Device].

6 Press the OK key. USB Device appears.

USB Device: a b
1
*********************
*Unblock
2 Block

7 Press the  or  key to select [Unblock] or

[Block].

8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the System menu.

USB Storage (USB storage setting)

This locks and protects the USB interface connector (USB Storage). The default setting is Unblock.

NOTE: This function is available when USB Host is set to Unblock.

Use the procedure below to specify the USB Host setting. 8

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 
Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [System/Network], and press the OK
1 Report key.
2 Counter
3
*********************
System/Network
[ Exit ]

When you are performing user management and

Login User Name: L b have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
******************* Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Login Password: Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right
Select key).
[ Login ]

2 The System/Network menu appears.

System/Network: a b
1
*********************
Network Setting
2 Optional Network
3 NW InterfaceSend
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [I/F Block Set.].

8-211

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

4 Press the OK key. The I/F Block Set. menu

I/F Block Set.: a b appears.
1
*********************
USB Host
2 USB Device
3 USB Storage
[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [USB Storage].

6 Press the OK key. USB Storage appears.

USB Storage: a b
1
*********************
*Unblock
2 Block

7 Press the  or  key to select [Unblock] or

[Block].

8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the I/F Block Set. menu.

8-212

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

Optional interface (Optional interface card setting)

This locks and protects the optional interface slot. The default setting is Unblock.
Use the procedure below to specify the optional interface setting.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [System/Network].
1 Report
2 Counter
3
*********************
System/Network
[ Exit ]

When you are performing user management and

Login User Name: L b have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
******************* Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right
Login Password: Select key).

[ Login ]

2 The System/Network menu appears.

System/Network: a b
1
*********************
Network Setting
2 Optional Network 8
3 NW InterfaceSend
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [I/F Block Set.].

4 Press the OK key. The I/F Block Set. menu appears.
I/F Block Set.: a b
1
*********************
USB Host
2 USB Device
3 USB Storage
[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [Option I/F 1] or

[Option I/F 2].

For ECOSYS M6526cdn/ECOSYS M6526cdn

Type B, select [Option I/F].
6 Press the OK key. Option I/F appears.
Option I/F 1: a b
1
*********************
*Unblock
2 Block

7 Press the  or  key to select [Unblock] or [Block].

8 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the

screen returns to the System menu.

8-213

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

Security Level (Security Level setting)

The Security Level setting is primarily a menu option used by service personnel for maintenance work. There
is no need for customers to use this menu.

8-214

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

Optional Functions
You can use the optional applications installed on this machine.

Opt. Functions
See Optional Function on page Appendix-6.

8-215

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Default Setting (System Menu)

8-216

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 9 Maintenance

This chapter describes cleaning and toner replacement.

• Cleaning ....................................................................... 9-2

• Toner Container Replacement...................................... 9-4
• Replacing the Waste Toner Box ................................... 9-6

9-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Maintenance

Cleaning
Clean the machine regularly to ensure optimum output quality.

CAUTION: For safety, always unplug the power cord before cleaning the machine.

Glass Platen
Wipe the inside of the document processor and the glass platen with a soft cloth dampened with alcohol or mild
detergent.

IMPORTANT: Do not use thinner or other organic

solvents.

Document Processor
If black streaks or dirt appears in copies when using the document processor, clean the slit glass with the
supplied cleaning cloth. The message Clean the slit glass. may be displayed if the slit glass requires cleaning.

NOTE: Wipe the slit glasses with the dry cloth. Do not use water, soap or solvents for cleaning.

1 Open the document processor and wipe the slit

glass (a).

2 Wipe the white guide (b) on the document

processor.
b

3 Close the document processor.

9-2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Maintenance

Cleaning the paper transfer unit

CAUTION: Some parts are very hot inside the machine. Exercise caution as there is a risk of burn injury.

The paper transfer unit should be cleaned each time the toner container and waste toner box are replaced. To
maintain optimum print quality, it is also recommended that the inside of the machine be cleaned once a month
as well as when the toner container is replaced. It should also be cleaned if streaking or lines appear on printed
copies, or if printouts appear faint or blurred.

1 Pull up the rear cover lever and open the rear

cover.

2 Wipe away the paper dust on the registration roller and the paper ramp using the cloth.

IMPORTANT: Be careful not to touch the black transfer roller and black transfer belt during cleaning as this may
adversely affect print quality.
9

Paper Transfer Unit

Transfer Belt (Black)

Registration Roller (Metal)

Transfer Roller (Black)

Duplex Unit

Paper Ramp

3 Close the rear cover.

9-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Maintenance

Toner Container Replacement

When the message display displays Add toner, replace the toner.

Every time you replace the toner container, be sure to clean the parts as instructed below. For details, refer to
Cleaning the paper transfer unit on page 9-3.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to incinerate the toner container or the waste toner box. Dangerous sparks may
cause burns.

Toner Container Replacement

1 While pulling the top cover lever, open the top tray.

CAUTION: To prevent toppling, the top tray and

document processor cannot be opened at the same
time.

Open the top tray to the position shown. If the tray

is not opened to this position, it will not be possible
to install the toner container.

2 Carefully remove the old toner container from the

machine.

NOTE: Put the old toner container in the plastic bag

(supplied with the new toner kit) and discard it later
according to the local code or regulations for waste
disposal.

3 Take the new toner container out of the toner kit.

Shake the new toner container at least 5 or 6 times
as shown in the figure in order to distribute the
toner evenly inside the container.

9-4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Maintenance

4 Make sure the release lever is in the release

position and set the new toner container in the
machine.

NOTE: Make sure, that the projections of the toner

container fit to the slots inside the machine.

5 Push down on the top of the toner container to

install it firmly in place.

6 Close the top tray.

When closing the top tray, do not press hard on the

operation panel.

NOTE: When closing the top tray, take care not to

pinch your fingers.

9-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Maintenance

Replacing the Waste Toner Box

Replace the waste toner box when the Check waste toner box message is displayed. A new waste toner box is
included with the toner kit. The waste toner box needs to be replaced before the machine will operate.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to incinerate the toner container or the waste toner box. Dangerous sparks may
cause burns.

Replacing the Waste Toner Box

1 Open the waste toner cover.

2 Press the lock button and gently remove the waste

toner box.

NOTE: Remove the waste toner box as gently as

possible so as not to scatter the toner inside. Do not let
the opening of the waste toner box face downward.

3 Close the cap to the old waste toner box after

removing the box from the machine.

Old Waste
NOTE: Put the old waste toner box in the plastic bag
Toner Box
(supplied with the new toner kit) and discard it later
according to the local code or regulations for waste
disposal.

9-6

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Maintenance

4 Open the cap of the new waste toner box.

New Waste
Toner Box

5 Insert the new waste toner box as shown in the

figure. When the box is set correctly, it will snap
into place.

6 Make sure that the waste toner box is correctly

inserted and close the waste toner cover.

After replacing the toner containers and the waste

toner box, clean the paper transfer unit. For
instructions, refer to Cleaning on page 9-2.

9-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Maintenance

Prolonged Non-Use and Moving of the Machine

Prolonged Non-use

If you ever leave the machine unused for a long period of time, remove the power cord from the wall outlet.

We recommend you consult with your dealer about the additional actions you should take to avoid possible
damage that may occur when the machine is used next time.

Moving the Machine

When you move the machine:

• Move it gently.
• Keep it as level as possible to avoid spilling toner inside the machine.
• Be sure to consult a service technician before attempting long distance transportation of the machine.
• Lock the lock lever (Yellow) for the optical system. It is located at the upper left edge close to the scanner.
Refer to Quick Start Guide.
• Remove all toner containers and waster toner box and put them in a plastic bag.
• Make sure that the release lever is in LOCK position. If not, pull the release lever towards you until it stops.
Refer to page 9-5.

WARNING: If you ship the machine, remove and pack all toner containers and the waste toner box in a plastic
bag and ship them separately from the machine.

9-8

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 10 Troubleshooting

This chapter explains how to solve problems with the machine.

• Solving Malfunctions................................................... 10-2

• Responding to Error Messages .................................. 10-8
• Clearing Paper Jams ................................................ 10-16

10-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Troubleshooting

Solving Malfunctions
The table below provides general guidelines for problem solving.

If a problem occurs with your machine, look into the checkpoints and perform procedures indicated on the
following pages. If the problem persists, contact your Service Representative.

Reference
Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions
Page
The operation panel Is the machine plugged in? Plug the power cord into an AC —
does not respond outlet.
when the main power
switch is turned on.
Pressing the Start key Is there a message on the Determine appropriate response to —
does not produce Message Display? the message and respond
copies. accordingly.
Is the machine in Sleep Press the Energy saver key to 2-9
mode? recover the machine from Sleep
mode. The machine will be ready
to copy within 20 seconds.
Blank sheets are Are the originals loaded When placing originals on the 2-65
ejected. correctly? platen, place them face-down and
align them with the original size
indicator plates.
When placing originals in the 2-67
document processor, place them
face-up.
— Check that the application software —
is correctly operated.
Faint or blurred Is the machine in Auto Set the correct density level for —
printing Density mode? auto density.
Is the machine in Manual Select the correct density level. 5-16
Density mode?
Is the toner distributed evenly Shake the toner container from 9-4
within the toner container? side to side about several times.
Is there a message indicating Replace the toner container. 9-4
the addition of toner?
Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new paper. 2-47
Is EcoPrint mode enabled? Disable EcoPrint mode. 4-10
— Make sure the paper type setting is 8-13
correct the paper being used. 8-16
— Conduct color calibration either by 8-126
switching the machine off then on
or using the operation panel.
— Try adjusting the color control —
settings using the printer driver.

10-2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Troubleshooting

Reference
Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions
Page
— Run [MC] and decrease the 8-138
adjustment value. Decrease the
adjustment value 1 level at a time
from the current value. If there is
no improvement after the value is
decreased by 1 level, decrease by
1 level again. If there is still no
improvement, return the setting to
the original value.
Printouts are too dark. Is the machine in Auto Select the correct density level for —
Density mode? auto density.
Is the machine in Manual Select the correct density level. 5-16
Density mode?
— Conduct color calibration using the 8-126
operation panel.
Copies have a moire Is the original a printed Set the image quality to [Photo]. 5-15
pattern (dots grouped photograph?
together in patterns
and not aligned
uniformly).
Printouts are not Did you choose appropriate Select appropriate image quality. 5-15
clear. image quality for the original?
Printouts are dirty. Is the platen or the document Clean the platen or the document —
processor dirty? processor.
10
Printouts are fuzzy. Is the machine being used in Use in a location that has suitable —
very humid conditions? humidity.

Images are skewed. Are the originals placed When placing originals on the 2-65
correctly? platen, align them with the original
size indicator plates.
When placing originals in the 2-66
document processor, align the
original width guides securely
before placing the originals.
Is the paper loaded Check the position of the paper 2-66
correctly? width guides.
Paper often jams. Is the paper loaded Load the paper correctly. 2-47
correctly?
Is the paper of the supported Remove the paper, turn it over, and 2-47
type? Is it in good condition? reload it.

10-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Troubleshooting

Reference
Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions
Page
Is the paper curled, folded or Replace the paper with new paper. 2-47
wrinkled?
Are there any loose scraps or Remove any jammed paper. 10-16
jammed paper in the
machine?
Printouts are wrinkled Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new paper. 2-47
or curled.
Cannot print. Is the machine plugged in? Plug the power cord into an AC —
outlet.
Is the machine powered on? Turn on the main power switch. 2-7
Is the printer cable or Connect the correct printer cable or 2-5
network cable connected? network cable securely.
Was the machine powered Power on the machine after 2-5
on before the printer cable connecting the printer cable. 2-7
was connected?
Is the print job paused? Press [Resume] (the Left Select 7-19
key) to resume printing.
Documents are Are the application software Check that the printer driver and —
printed improperly. settings at the PC set application software settings are
properly? set properly.
Cannot print with USB Is the USB host blocked? Select [Unblock] in the USB host 8-209
memory. settings.
— Check that the USB memory is —
securely plugged into the machine.
When displaying an Have you selected Select a scan resolution other than 5-17
image sent from the 200×100dpi Normal or 200×100dpi Normal or 200×400dpi
machine on the PC, an 200×400dpi Super Fine for Super Fine when sending an
image size is shrunk the scan resolution? image.
vertically or
horizontally.
USB memory not — Check that the USB memory is —
recognized. securely plugged into the machine.
Is the USB host blocked? Select [Unblock] in the USB host 8-209
settings.
Skewed-color printout — Conduct color registration using 8-127
the operation panel.
Conduct color calibration using the 8-126
operation panel.

10-4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Troubleshooting

Reference
Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions
Page
Printouts have black Is the slit glass dirty? Clean the slit glass. 9-2
lines.
— Run [LaserScanner Cln]. 8-135
— Run [Drum Refresh]. 8-136

Grey background — Conduct color calibration either by 8-126

switching the machine off then on
or using the operation panel.

Dirt on the top edge or Is the paper transfer unit Clean the transfer unit. 9-3
back of the paper dirty?

Offset occures. — Run [Drum Refresh]. 8-136

— Run [MC] and increase the 8-138
adjustment value. Increase the 10
adjustment value 1 level at a time
from the current value. If there is
no improvement after the value is
increased by 1 level, increase by 1
level again. If there is still no
improvement, return the setting to
the original value.
Part of the image is — Run [MC] and decrease the 8-138
periodically faint or adjustment value. Decrease the
blurred. adjustment value 1 level at a time
from the current value. If there is
no improvement after the value is
decreased by 1 level, decrease by
1 level again. If there is still no
improvement, return the setting to
the original value.

10-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Troubleshooting

Reference
Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions
Page
Irregular horizontal — Run [MC] and decrease the 8-138
lines appear in the adjustment value. Decrease the
image. adjustment value 1 level at a time
from the current value. If there is
no improvement after the value is
decreased by 1 level, decrease by
1 level again. If there is still no
improvement, return the setting to
the original value.
The altitude is 1500 m — Run [Altitude Adj.] and set the 8-137
or higher and irregular adjustment value to [High 1]. If
horizontal white lines there is no improvement when the
appear in the image. value is set to [High 1], set to [High
2].

The altitude is 1500 m — Run [Altitude Adj.] and set the 8-137
or higher and dots adjustment value to [High 1]. If
appear in the image. there is no improvement when the
value is set to [High 1], set to [High
2].

Part of the image is — Open and then close the rear —

periodically faint or cover.
shows white lines.
— Run [Drum Refresh]. 8-136

The background — Carry out Background Density. 4-23

density is obtrusive.
Colors appear Did you choose appropriate Select appropriate image quality. 3-10
different than you image quality for the original? 5-15
anticipated.
Have you loaded color copy Load color copy paper into the 2-47
paper into the paper tray? paper tray.
— Run [Color Calibration]. 8-126

10-6

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Troubleshooting

Reference
Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions
Page
— When making copies Appendix-
Adjust the color balance. 23
When printing from a computer Printer
Adjust the color using the printer Driver
driver. Operation
Guide
Cannot send via SMB. Is the network cable Connect the correct network cable 2-5
connected? securely.
Have the network settings for Configure the TCP/IP settings 2-17
the equipment been properly. 8-175
configured properly?
Have the folder sharing Check sharing settings and access 3-32
settings been configured privileges under the folder
properly? properties.
Has the SMB protocol been Set the SMB protocol setting to 3-27
set to [On]? [On].
Has the [Host Name] been Check the name of the computer to 3-31
entered properly? which data is being sent.*
Has the [Path] been entered Check the share name for the —
properly? shared folder.
Has the [Login User Name] Check the domain name and login 3-27
been entered properly? user name.**
Has the same domain name Delete the domain name and 3-27 10
been used for the [Host backslash ("\") from the [Login
Name] and [Login User User Name].
Name]?
Has the [Login Password] Check the login password. 3-27
been entered properly?
Have exceptions for Configure exceptions for Windows 3-36
Windows Firewall been Firewall properly. 3-39
configured properly?
Do the time settings for the Set the equipment, domain server, —
equipment, domain server, and data destination computer to
and data destination the same time.
computer differ?
Is the touch panel displaying Refer to Responding to Send Error. 10-11
Send error.?

* You can also enter a full computer name as the host name (for example, pc001.abcdnet.com).
** You can also enter login user names in the following formats:
Domain_name/user_name (for example, abcdnet/james.smith)
User_name@domain_name (for example, james.smith@abcdnet)

10-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Troubleshooting

Responding to Error Messages

If the control panel displays any of these messages, follow the corresponding procedure.
If a problem occurs with your machine, look into the checkpoints and perform procedures indicated on the
following pages. If the problem persists, contact your Service Representative.

Alphanumeric

Reference
Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions
Page

Load paper in cassette Is the indicated cassette out Load paper. 2-48
1. of paper?

Load paper in MP Is the paper of the selected Load the paper in the multi purpose 2-51
Tray. size loaded in the multi tray which is of the size and type
purpose tray? indicated on the Message Display.

Toner is running out. – It is almost time to replace the toner 9-4

[C], [M], [Y], [K] container. After a certain number of
pages (about 20) are printed, printing
will stop. Obtain a new toner
container of the color indicated in [].

Add toner. Replace the toner container. Replace 9-4

[C], [M], [Y], [K] with a toner container of the color
indicated in [].

Check waste toner Is the waste toner box full? Replace the waste toner box. 9-6
box.
Is the waste toner box Install the waste toner box in the 9-6
installed? machine.

Cannot connect to – Press the OK key and check the —

Authentication Server. following items:
• Registration to Authentication
Server
• Password and computer address
for Authentication Server
• Connection of Network

Cannot duplex print Did you select a paper size/ Select the available paper type. 3-15
on this paper. media type that cannot be Press the OK key to print without
duplex printed? using Duplex.

Incorrect account ID. – This job is canceled because it is —

Job is canceled. restricted by Job Accounting. Press
the OK key.

Close top (rear or left) Is there any cover which is Close the cover indicated on the —
cover. open? control panel.

Close Document Is the document processor Close the document processor. —

Processor. open?

Is the top cover of the Close the top cover of the document 2-66
document processor open? processor.

10-8

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Troubleshooting

Reference
Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions
Page

Job Accounting – The job is canceled. Press the OK —

restriction exceeded. key.
Cannot print.

Job Accounting – The job is canceled. Press the OK —

restriction exceeded. key.
Cannot scan.

Polling – FAX box is full, and no further storage —

box limit exceeded. is available. The job is canceled.
Press the OK key.

Incorrect Login User – Enter correct Login User Name or —

Name or Password. Login Password.
Job Is canceled.

Job Accounting Is the acceptable printing The printing count exceeded the —
restriction exceeded. count restricted by Job acceptable count restricted by Job
Job is canceled. Accounting exceeded? Accounting. Cannot print any more.
This job is canceled. Press the OK
key.

Machine failure. – Internal error has occurred. Make a —

Call service. note of the error code displayed on
the Message Display. Turn off the
machine, unplug the power cord, and
contact your Service Representative.

Is Error code "4201 to 4204" Internal condensation has occurred —

displayed? as a result of a sudden change in 10
temperature. Turn off the machine
and let stand for 30 to 90 minutes,
and then back on again. If this
message still remains, turn off the
machine, unplug the power cord, and
contact your Service Representative.

Memory is full. – Unable to continue the job as the —

Print job cannot be memory is used up.
processed Press the OK key to print the
completely. scanned pages. The print job cannot
be processed completely.
Press the Status/Job Cancel key
and press [Cancel] to cancel the job.

10-9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Troubleshooting

Reference
Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions
Page

Memory is full. – Unable to continue the job as the —

Job is canceled. memory is used up. Press the OK
key. To print the same originals,
follow the operations below.
• Select [Photo] for the quality of
copies.
• Select a nagative value for the
sharpness.
• Select the paper size smaller to
reduce.
If it is not resolved, expand the printer
memory.

Paper jammed. – If a paper jam occurs, the machine 10-16

will stop and the location of the jam
will be indicated on the Message
Display. Leave the machine on and
follow the instruction to remove the
jammed paper.

Job not stored. – Press the OK key to cancel storing.

Press [OK].

USB memory error. – This job is canceled. Press the OK —

Job is canceled. key.

Place original – Remove originals from the document 2-67

and press Start key. processor, put them back in their
original order, and place them again.
Press the Start key to resume
printing.
Press the Status/Job Cancel key
and press [Cancel] to cancel the job.

Remove original from Are there any originals left in Remove originals from the document —
document processor. the document processor? processor.

Maximum Number of – Scanning cannot be performed due —

scanned pages. to insufficient memory of scanner.
Job is canceled. The job is canceled. Press the OK
key.

Is the acceptable scanning Press the OK key to print, send or —

count exceeded? store the scanned pages. Press the
Status/Job Cancel key and press
[Cancel] to cancel the job.

Error occurred. – System error has occurred. Turn the —

Turn the main power main power switch off and on.
switch off and on.

Incorrect account ID. – The Account ID does not match. —

Check the registered Account ID.

10-10

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Troubleshooting

Reference
Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions
Page

File is not found. – The specified file is not found. The —

job is canceled. Press the OK key.

Top tray is full of – Remove paper from the top tray, and —
Paper. press the OK key to resume the job.
Remove the paper.

Unknown toner Is the installed toner We will not be liable for any damage —
Installed. container our own brand? caused by the use of third party
supplies in this machine.

Unknown toner Does the installed toner Install the specified container. —
Installed. PC container's regional
specification match the
machine's?

Insufficient memory. – Further scanning cannot be —

Cannot start the job performed due to insufficient memory.
Press the OK key to print the
scanned pages. Press the Status/
Job Cancel key and press [Cancel]
to cancel the job.

Replace MK. – Replacement of the parts in the —

maintenance kit is necessary at every
200,000 pages of printing and
requires professional servicing.
Contact your service technician. 10
Send error. – An error has occurred during —
#### transmission. The possible error
codes and their descriptions are as
follows.

Scan to SMB Error Code

Error Code:1101 Is the host name of the SMB Set the correct host name in —
server incorrect? Command Center RX.

10-11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Troubleshooting

Reference
Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions
Page

Error Code:1102 Is a domain name entered? Correctly enter the user name in the —
"domain\user", "domain\user" or
"domain@user" format.

Did you specify an invalid Enter the correct user name and —
user or password? password.

Did you specify an invalid Enter the correct folder name and —
folder name or share name? share name.

Did you specify a user who Check the access restrictions of the —
is not allowed to access the destination folder.
folder, or has access
permission been set for the
folder?

Are prohibited characters Check if any of the following —

included in the host name? characters are included in the host
name.
`~!@#$^&*()=+[]{}\|;:'"<
>/?

Error Code:1103 Is a domain name entered? Correctly enter the user name in the —
"domain\user", "domain\user" or
"domain@user" format.

Is the correct folder path Enter the correct folder path. —

entered?

Did you specify a user who Check the access restrictions of the —
is not allowed to access the destination folder.
folder, or has access
permission been set for the
folder?

Error Code:1105 Is SMB protocol enabled? Enable SMB protocol for the host —
name in Command Center RX.

Error Code:2101, Did you enter an invalid host Enter the correct host name or IP —
2201, 2203 name or IP address? address.

Is the wrong port number Specify the correct port number. —

specified?

Are you correctly connected Make sure that the network cable has —
to the network? been correctly connected.
Make sure that the network
environment (server, hub, or other
LAN network) is operating correctly.

10-12

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Troubleshooting

Reference
Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions
Page

Error Code:0007, – Turn the main power switch off and —

5101, 5102, 5103, 5104, then on. If this occurs repeatedly,
7101, 720f write down the error code that
appears in the message display and
contact a service technician. (See the
procedure in Machine failure. Call
service.)
Error Code:9181 Have more than 999 original If there are more than 999 original —
pages been scanned? pages, send the pages in separate
batches.

Scan To FTP Error Code

Error Code:1101 Is the host name of the FTP Set the correct host name in —
server incorrect? Command Center RX.

Error Code:1102 Is a domain name entered? Correctly enter the user name in the —
"domain\user" or "domain\user"
format.

Did you specify an invalid Enter the correct user name and —
user or password? password.

Error Code:1103 Is the correct folder path Enter the correct folder path. —
entered?

Did you specify a user who Check the access restrictions of the —
is not allowed to access the destination folder. 10
folder, or has access
permission been set for the
folder?

Error Code:1105 Is FTP protocol enabled? Enable FTP protocol in Command —

Center RX.

Error Code:1131 Is one of the FTPS settings Check the security settings. —
incorrect?

Error Code:1132 Are you trying to send to a Check if the server supports FTPS. —
server that does not support Check if the server supports the
FTPS service or the encryption method.
encryption method?

10-13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Troubleshooting

Reference
Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions
Page

Error Code:2101, Did you enter an invalid host Enter the correct host name or IP —
2102, 2103, 2201, 2202, name or IP address? address.
2203, 2231, 3101
Is the wrong port number Specify the correct port number. —
specified?

Are you correctly connected Make sure that the network cable has —
to the network? been correctly connected.
Make sure that the network
environment (server, hub, or other
LAN network) is operating correctly.

Error Code:4701, – Turn the main power switch off and —

5101, 5102, 5103, 5104, then on. If this occurs repeatedly,
7102, 720f write down the error code that
appears in the message display and
contact a service technician. (See the
procedure in Machine failure. Call
service.)
Error Code:9181 Have more than 999 original If there are more than 999 original —
pages been scanned? pages, send the pages in separate
batches.

Scan To Email Error Code

Error Code:1101 Is the SMTP/POP3 server Set the correct server name in —
name incorrect? Command Center RX.

Error Code:1102 Did you specify an invalid Enter the correct user name and —
user or password? password.

Error Code:1104 Did you specify the Specify the destination address. —
destination address?

Error Code:1105 Is SMTP protocol enabled? Enable SMTP protocol in Command —

Center RX.

Error Code:2101, Is "Other Authenticate" Select a valid POP3 user other than —
2102, 2103, 2201, 2202, selected when POP before "Other".
2203 SMTP authentication is
performed?

Is the specified server an Set the correct server name in —

SMTP server? Command Center RX.

Are you correctly connected Make sure that the network cable has —
to the network? been correctly connected.
Make sure that the network
environment (server, hub, or other
LAN network) is operating correctly.

Error Code:2204 Were you attempting to Change the size that can be sent in —
send too much data? Command Center RX.

10-14

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Troubleshooting

Reference
Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions
Page

Error Code:3101 Is the server operating Make sure that the network —
correctly? environment (server, hub, or other
LAN network) is operating correctly.

Is an authentication method Check the settings on the server and —

set for which the server client. (For example, make sure the
cannot respond normally? SMTP/POP authentication enable/
disable settings are the same on the
server and on the client.)

Error Code:3201 Is a non-supported SMTP Check the SMTP authentication —

authentication method settings on the server and client. The
enabled? SMTP authentication methods below
can be used on the machine.
CRAM-MD5 / DIGEST-MD5 / PLAIN /
LOGIN

Error Code:4201, – Turn the main power switch off and —

5101, 5102, 5103, 5104, then on. If this occurs repeatedly,
7101, 7102, 720f write down the error code that
appears in the message display and
contact a service technician. (See the
procedure in Machine failure. Call
service.)
Error Code:9181 Have more than 999 original If there are more than 999 original —
pages been scanned? pages, send the pages in separate
batches. 10

10-15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Troubleshooting

Clearing Paper Jams

If a paper jam occurs, a message will be displayed about the jam and copying or printing will stop. Remove
jammed paper. After removing jammed paper, the machine will re-start printing.
Leave the main power switch on and to remove the jammed paper refer to the following information below.
Detailed paper jam positions are as follows. Refer to the indicated page number to remove the paper jam.

Paper Jam Reference

Description
Location Page
A Paper jam in the multi purpose tray. 10-16
B Paper jam in the machine cassette, or in a cassette of the optional 10-18
paper feeder.
C Paper jam in the paper feeder. 10-19
D Paper jam in the transfer unit. 10-19
E Paper jam in the document processor. 10-20

Paper jams
If paper jams occur frequently, the specifications of the paper may not be suitable for the machine. Try changing
the paper type. For paper specifications, see "Paper Specifications" in the Appendix. Also refer to chapter 2 to
how to insert paper correctly. If paper jams still occur frequently even though you have changed the paper, the
machine may have a problem. Please contact your service representative.

IMPORTANT: When removing a paper jam, make sure that no torn pieces of paper remain in the machine.

10-16

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Troubleshooting

Online Help Messages

The online Help message function of the machine will show the procedure for removing a paper jam in the
message display. When Paper Jam is displayed, press [Help](the Left Select key) to display the procedure to
clear the jam.

Press  to display the next step or press  to display the previous step. Press the OK key to exit the online
help message display.

When a paper jam occurs, you can use the online Help message to remove the paper jam.

Multi Purpose Tray

Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the Multi Purpose tray.

1 Remove the paper jammed at the Multi Purpose

tray.

IMPORTANT: If the paper cannot be removed, do not

try to forcefully remove it. Go to paper jam in the feed
unit on page 10-19.

2 Pull the cassette 1 out of the machine.

10

3 Open the lower feed cover.

10-17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Troubleshooting

4 Remove any partially fed paper.

After you have removed the paper jam, replace the

lower feed cover.

5 Replace the cassette 1 in the machine.

Paper Cassette/Paper Feeder

In the event that a paper jam occurs in the cassette 1, follow the procedure below to remove the jam. Paper
jams in the cassette of the optional paper feeder are removed in the same way.

1 Pull out the cassette 1 or optional paper feeder.

2 Remove any partially fed paper.

IMPORTANT: If the paper cannot be removed, do not

try to forcefully remove it. Go to paper jam in the feed
unit on page 10-19.

3 Replace the cassette 1 in the machine.

NOTE: In case of jam check that the paper was loaded into the cassette correctly.

10-18

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Troubleshooting

Paper jam in the paper feeder

If the paper jam cannot be removed using the procedure in paper jam in the paper cassette on page 10-18,
open the rear cover of the paper feeder and remove the jammed paper.

NOTE: If the paper cannot be removed, do not try to

forcefully remove it. Go to paper jam in the feed unit on
page 10-19.

Inside the Machine

1 Pull up the rear cover lever and open the rear
cover.

CAUTION: Some parts are very hot inside the machine. Exercise caution as there is a risk of burn injury.
10
2 If most of the jammed paper is out in the top tray,
grasp the paper and pull it out.

3 If the jammed paper reaches the fuser unit as

shown, open the fuser cover, grasp the paper, and
pull it out.

Fuser
Cover

10-19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Troubleshooting

4 If the jammed paper does not reach the registration

roller (metal) as shown, grasp the paper and pull it
out.
Regis-
tration
Roller

5 If the jammed paper is located inside the machine

as shown, open the rear feed cover and pull out the
Rear paper.
Feed
Cover

6 If the jammed paper reaches the Duplex Unit as

shown, lift up the Duplex Unit and remove the
paper.
Duplex
Unit

7 Close the rear cover. The error will be cleared and

printing will resume after warm-up.

Document Processor
Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the document processor.

1 Remove all of the originals from the document feed

tray.

10-20

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Troubleshooting

2 Open the left cover of the document processor.

3 Remove the jammed original.

If the original is caught in the rollers or difficult to

remove, proceed to the next step.

4 Open the document processor.

10
5 Remove the jammed original.

If the original tears, remove every loose scrap from

inside the machine.

6 Close the document processor.

7 Place the originals.

10-21

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Troubleshooting

10-22

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 11 Management

This chapter explains the following operations.

• User Login Administration .......................................... 11-2

• Job Accounting ......................................................... 11-13
• Checking the Counter............................................... 11-35

11-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Management

User Login Administration

User login administration specifies how the user access is administered on this machine. Enter correct Login
User Name and Login Password for user authentication to log in.

Access are in three levels - User, Administrator, and Machine Administrator. The security levels can be modified
only by the machine administrator.

First User Login Administration

Follow these steps for the first user login administration.

Enable user login administration. (page 11-3)


Add a user.(page 11-6)

Log out.(page 11-5)

The registered user logs in for operations.(page 11-5)

Displaying user login administration

1 Press the system menu / counter key on the
operation panel.

The system/counter menu appears.

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b
*********************
1 Report
2 Counter
3 System/Network
[ Exit ]

2 From the system menu / counter menu, press the

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b  or  key to select [User/Job Account].
4
*********************
User/Job Account
5 User Property
NOTE:
6 Common Settings If the user authentication screen appears, enter your
[ Exit ] login user name and login password and press [Login]
(the Right Select key). For this, you need to login with
administrator privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password
are set as shown below.

Login User Name 2600

Login Password 2600

3 Press the OK key. The User/Job Account menu

appears.

11-2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Management

Enabling/Disabling User Login Administration

This enables user login administration. Select one of the following authentication methods:

Item Description

Local User authentication based on user properties on

Authentication the local user list stored in the machine.

Network User authentication based on Authentication

Authentication Server. Use a user property stored in
Authentication Server to access the network
authentication login page.

Use the procedure below to enable user login administration.

NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.

1 See the procedure for displaying user control on

page 11-2, and display the User/Job Account.

2 Press the  or  key to select [User Login Set.].

User/Job Account: a b
1
*********************
User Login Set.
2 Job Account. Set.
3 Unknown ID Job
[ Exit ]

3 Press the OK key. The User Login Set. menu

User Login Set.: a b appears.
1
*********************
User Login 11
2 Local User List
3 Group Auth.
[ Exit ]

4 Press the  or  key to select [User Login].

11-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Management

5 Press the OK key. User Login appears.

User Login: a b
1 *Off
2
*********************
Local Authentic.
3 Netwk Authentic.

6 Press the  or  key to select [Local Authentic.]

or [Netwk Authentic.], and then press the OK key.

Select [Off] to disable user login administration.

When "Network Authentication" is selected, select

Server type: a b [NTLM], [Kerberos], or [Ext.] for the server type
1
*********************
NTLM and press the OK key.
2 Kerberos
3 Ext.

If [NTLM] or [Kerberos] is selected for the server

Host Name: A b type, enter the host name (up to 64 characters)
GUI* and domain name (up to 256 characters) of the
authentication server, and press the OK key.
ABC If [Ext.] is selected for the server type, enter the
host name (up to 64 characters) and port number
[ Text ]
of the authentication server, and press the OK key.

NOTE: If the Login User Name and Login Password are rejected, check the following settings.
• Network Authentication setting of the machine
• User property of the Authentication Server
• Date and time setting of the machine and the Authentication Server
If you cannot login because of the setting of the machine, login with any administrator registered in the local
user list and correct the settings. If the server type is [Kerberos], only domain names entered in uppercase will
be recognized.

Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to

the User Login Set. menu.

11-4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Management

Login/Logout
Once you enable user login administration, a Login User Name and Login Password entry screen appears each
time you use this machine.

Login

Log in using the procedure below.

NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.

1 If the screen below appears during the operations,

Login User Name L b perform the following login operations.
*******************
Login Password:

[ Login ]

2 Press the OK key, enter the Login User Name, and

then press the OK key.

3 Press the  key to select [Login Password], press

the OK key, enter the Login Password, and then
press the OK key.

4 Check the Login User Name and Login Password

are correct, and press [Login] (the Right Select
key).

Logout
To log out the machine, press the Logout key to return 11
to the Login User Name/Login Password entry screen.

Auto Logout

Logout is automatically executed in the following cases:

• When the Energy Saver key is pressed to enter

the sleep mode
• When auto sleep is activated
• When auto panel reset is activated

11-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Management

Adding a User
This adds a new user. You can add Up to 100 users (including the default Login User Name). The table below
explains the user information to be registered.

Item Description
User Name* Enter the name displayed on the user list (up to 32
characters).
Login User Enter the Login User Name to log in (up to 32
Name* characters). The same Login User Name cannot be
registered.
Login Enter the password to log in (up to 64 characters).
Password*
Access Level* Select Administrator or User for user access
privileges.
Account Name Add an account where the user belongs. The user,
who registered his/her account name, can log in
without entering the account ID. Refer to Job
Accounting on page 11-13.
E-mail Address The user can register his/her E-mail address. The
registered address will be automatically selected
for subsequent operations that need any E-mail
function.
* Mandatory at user registration.

NOTE: By default, one of each default user with machine administrator rights and administrator privileges is
already stored. The following are the default user's properties.
User Name: DeviceAdmin
Login User Name: 2600
Login Password: 2600
Access Level: Administrator
It is recommended to periodically change the user name, Login User Name and Login Password regularly for
your security.

Use the procedure below to register a new user.

NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.

1 Log in as a user with administrator rights.

2 See the procedure for displaying user control on

page 11-2, and display the User/Job Account.

3 In the User/Job Account menu, press the  or 

User/Job Account: a b key to select [User Login Set.].
1
*********************
User Login Set.
2 Job Account. Set.
3 Unknown ID Job
[ Exit ]

11-6

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Management

4 Press the OK key. The User Login Set. menu

User Login Set.: a b appears.
1 User Login
2
*********************
Local User List
3 Group Auth.
[ Exit ]

5 Press the  or  key to select [Local User List].

6 Press the OK key. Local User List appears.

Local User List: a b
l Admin
l
*********************
DeviceAdmin

[ Menu ]

7 Press [Menu] (the Right Select key), press the 

Menu: a b or  key to select [Add User], and then press the
1 Detail/Edit OK key.
2 Delete
3 Add User
*********************

8 Enter the user name and press the OK key, enter

User Name: T b the Login User Name in the next screen, and then
* S press the OK key.

ABC
[ Text ]
11
9 Press the  or  key to select [Exit] and then
l User01: a b press the OK key.
1
*********************
Exit
2 Detail Select [Detail] and press the OK key to see
information of the registered users.

10 In Local User List, press the  or  key to select

Local User List: a b the added user and then press the OK key.
l DeviceAdmin
l Admin
l
*********************
User 1
[ Menu ]

11-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Management

11 Press the  or  key to select [Login Password:],

Detail: C b press [Edit] (the Right Select key), enter the Login
Login Password: 3/6 Password, and then press the OK key.
OOOOOOOOOOO

[ Edit ]

12 Enter the same Login Password to confirm and

press the OK key.

13 Press the  key to select [E-mailAddress:], press

Detail: C b [Edit] (the Right Select key), enter the e-mail
p E-mailAddress: 4/6 address, and then press the OK key.
******@abcdef.jp

[ Edit ]

14 Press the  key to select [Access Level:], press

Detail: C b [Change] (the Right Select key), select the user
Access Level: 5/6 access privilege, and then press the OK key.
Administrator
NOTE: If the user list is for device administrator,
[ Change ] [Change] is not displayed.

15 Press the  key to select [Account Name:], press

Detail: C b [Change] (the Right Select key), select the
Account Name: 6/6 account, and then press the OK key.
k KyoceraOsaka
NOTE: If the user list is for device administrator and
[ Change ] the device administrator does not log in, [Change] is
not displayed.

16 After entering the user information, press the OK

key again.

Registered. is displayed and the screen returns to

Local User List.

Changing User Properties

User information can be changed. It can be changed only by a user with administrator privileges.

Use the procedure below to change the user properties.

NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.

11-8

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Management

1 See the procedure for displaying user control on

page 11-2, and display the User/Job Account.

2 In the User/Job Account menu, press the  or 

User/Job Account: a b key to select [User Login Set.].
1
*********************
User Login Set.
2 Job Account. Set.
3 Unknown ID Job
[ Exit ]

3 Press the OK key. The User Login Set. menu

User Login Set.: a b appears.
1 User Login
2
*********************
Local User List
3 Group Auth.
[ Exit ]

4 Press the  or  key to select [Local User List].

5 Press the OK key. Local User List appears.

Local User List: a b
l
*********************
DeviceAdmin
l Admin
l User1
[ Menu ]

The procedure differs depending on the details to

be edited.

Changing user information

11
1 Press the  or  key to select the user whose
Local User List: a b information you want to change, and then press
l DeviceAdmin the OK key.
l
*********************
Admin
l User1
[ Menu ]

2 In the same fashion as registering a new user,

Detail: C b press the  or  key to select the desired item,
User Name: 1/6 press [Edit] (the Right Select key), change
User1 information, and then press the OK key.

[ Edit ]

3 Repeat step 2 to change items as necessary.

4 After completing changing the user information,

press the OK key again.

11-9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Management

5 The overwrite confirmation screen appears.

Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The user

information is changed and the screen returns to
Local User List.

Deleting a user
1 Press the  or  key to select the user you want
Local User List: a b to delete, and then press [Menu] (the Right Select
l DeviceAdmin key).
l
*********************
Admin
l User1
[ Menu ]

2 Press the  or  key to select [Delete] and then

Menu: a b press the OK key.
1 Detail/Edit
2
*********************
Delete
3 Add User

3 In the delete confirmation screen, press [Yes] (the

Left Select key). The user is deleted and the
screen returns to Local User List.

Enabling/Disabling Group Authentication

This enables group authentication using the LDAP server. This menu can be used only when [Netwk Authentic.]
is selected as the user authentication method. For details of LDAP server settings, refer to the Operation Guide
of the LDAP server. This menu can be used only when [Netwk Authentic.] is selected as the user authentication
method.

Use the procedure below to enable group authentication.

NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.
You can configure detail settings of group authentication in Command Center RX. For details, refer to the
Command Center RX User Guide.

1 See the procedure for displaying user control on

page 11-2, and display the User/Job Account.

2 Press the  or  key to select [User Login Set.].

3 Press the OK key. The User Login Set. menu

User Login Set.: a b appears.
1
*********************
User Login
2 Local User List
3 Group Auth.
[ Exit ]

4 Press the  or  key to select [Group Auth.].

11-10

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Management

5 Press the OK key. Group Auth. appears.

Group Auth.: a b
1
*********************
*Off
2 On

6 Press the  or  key to select [On] or [Off].

7 Press the OK key.

Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to

the User/Job Account menu.

Displaying Network User Property

Use the procedure below to display the property of the user logged on using the network authentication. This
menu can be used only when [Netwk Authentic.] is selected as the user authentication method.

NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.

1 See the procedure for displaying user control on

page 11-2, and display the User/Job Account.

2 Press the  or  key to select [User Login Set.].

3 Press the OK key. The User Login Set. menu

User Login Set.: a b appears.
1
*********************
User Login
2 Local User List
3 Group Auth. 11
[ Exit ]

4 Press the  or  key to select [NW User

Property].

5 Press the OK key. NW User Property appears.

NW User Property: a b
1
*********************
*Off
2 On

6 Press the  or  key to select [On] or [Off].

7 Press the OK key.

Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to

the User/Job Account menu.

11-11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Management

Unknown login user name Job

This specifies the behavior for handling the jobs sent with unknown Login User Name. If the User Login is set
to invalid and Job Accounting is set to valid, follow the procedure when the Account ID is unknown.

The table below shows the available settings.

Item Description

Reject The job is rejected (not printed).

Permit The job is permitted to be printed.

Use the procedure below to process jobs sent from unknown users.

NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.

1 See the procedure for displaying user control on

page 11-2, and display the User/Job Account.

2 In the User/Job Account menu, press the  or 

User/Job Account:a b key to select [Unknown ID Job].
1 User Login Set.
2 Job Account. Set.
3
*********************
Unknown ID Job
[ Exit ]

3 Press the OK key. Unknown ID Job appears.

Unknown ID Job: a b
1
*********************
*Reject
2 Permit

4 Press the  or  key to select [Reject] or [Permit].

5 Press the OK key.

Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to

the User/Job Account menu.

11-12

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Management

Job Accounting
Job accounting Manages the copy/print count accumulated by individual accounts by assigning an ID to each
account.

Job accounting helps the following activities in business organizations.

• Manageability of up to 100 individual accounts.

• Availability for account IDs with as many as eight digits (between 0 and 99999999) for security.
• Integrated management of printing and scanning statistics through the use of an identical account ID.
• Tracking the print volume for each account and for all accounts combined.
• Restricting the print counter in one-page increments up to 9,999,999 copies.
• Resetting the print counter for each account or for all accounts combined.

First Job Accounting Setup

Follow these steps for the first job accounting setup.

Enable job accounting. (page 11-13)

Add an account. (page 11-18)

Log out. (page 11-15)

Other users log in for operations. (page 11-15)

Enabling/Disabling Job Accounting

11
Enable job accounting. Use the procedure below to specify the job accounting setting.

1 See the procedure for displaying user control on

page 11-2, and display the User/Job Account.

2 In the User/Job Account menu, press the  or 

User/Job Account:a b key to select [Job Account. Set.].
1 User Login Set.
2
*********************
Job Account.Set.
3 Unknown ID Job
[ Exit ]

11-13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Management

3 Press the OK key. The Job Account. Set. menu

Job Account.Set.:a b appears.
1
*********************
Job Accounting
2 AccountingAccess
3 Account. Report
[ Exit ]

4 Press the  or  key to select [Job Accounting].

5 Press the OK key. Job Accounting appears.

Job Accounting: a b
1
*********************
*Off
2 On

6 Press the  or  key to select [On]. To disable job

accounting, select [Off].

7 Press the OK key.

Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to

the Job Account. Set. menu.

NOTE: When the display returns to the System Menu

default screen, logout is automatically executed and
the screen to enter the Account ID appears. To
continue the operation, enter the Account ID.

11-14

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Management

Login/Logout
If job accounting is enabled, an account ID entry screen appears each time you use this machine.

Use the procedure below to login and logout.

Login

NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.

1 In the screen below, enter the account ID using the

Account ID: b numeric keys and press the OK key.

*******************
NOTE: If you entered a wrong character, press the
Clear key and enter the account ID again.
[Counter ] If the entered account ID does not match the registered
ID, a warning beep will sound and login will fail. Enter
the correct account ID.
By pressing [Counter] (the Left Select key), you can
refer to the number of pages printed and the number of
pages scanned.

When the screen to enter the Login User Name and

Login Password appears

If user login administration is enabled, the screen to

enter the Login User Name and Login Password
appears. Enter a Login User Name and Login
Password to log in. (Refer to Login/Logout on page 11-
5.) If the user has already registered the account
information, the account ID entry would be skipped.
11
(Refer to Adding a User on page 11-6.)

2 Proceed to complete the rest of the steps.

Logout
When the operations are complete, press the Logout
key to return to the account ID entry screen.

11-15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Management

AccountingAccess
Set the job accounting access. Use the procedure below to specify the job accounting access setting.

1 Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main

unit operation panel.

2 Press the  or  key to select [User/Job Account].

Sys. Menu/Count.: a b
4
*********************
User/Job Account
5 User Property
6 Common Settings
[ Exit ]

3 A login screen will appear. Then, enter the user ID

Login User Name: L b and password with administrator privileges to log
******************* in, and press [Login] (the Right Select key).
Login Password:
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on
[ Login ] Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.

4 The User/Job Account menu appears.

5 Press the  or  key to select [Job Account. Set.].

User/Job Account:a b
1 User Login Set.
2
*********************
Job Account.Set.
3 Unknown ID Job
[ Exit ]

6 Press the OK key. The Job Account. Set. menu

Job Account.Set.:a b appears.
1
*********************
Job Accounting
2 AccountingAccess
3 Account. Report
[ Exit ]

7 Press the  or  key to select

[AccountingAccess].

8 Press the OK key. AccountingAccess appears.

AccountingAccess: a b
1
*********************
*Local
2 Network

11-16

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Management

9 Press the  or  key to select [Local] or[Network].

10 Press the OK key.

Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the Job Account. Set. menu.

NOTE: When the display returns to the System Menu

default screen, logout is automatically executed and
the screen to enter the Account ID appears. To
continue the operation, enter the Account ID.

11

11-17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Management

Adding an Account
This section explains how to add a new account. The following entries are required.

Item Description

Account Name Enter the account name (up to 32 characters).

Account ID Enter the account ID as many as eight digits

(between 0 and 99999999).

Restriction This Prohibits printing/scanning or restricts the

number of sheets to load. Refer to Restricting the
Use of the Machine on page 11-22.

Use the procedure below to register a new account.

NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.

1 See the procedure for displaying user control on

page 11-2, and display the User/Job Account.

2 In the User/Job Account menu, press the  or 

User/Job Account:a b key to select [Job Account. Set.].
1 User Login Set.
2
*********************
Job Account.Set.
3 Unknown ID Job
[ Exit ]

3 Press the OK key. The Job Account. Set. menu

Job Account.Set.:a b appears.
4 Total Accounting
5 Each Job Account
6
*********************
Account. List
[ Exit ]

4 Press the  or  key to select [Account. List].

5 Press the OK key. Account. List appears.

Account. List: a b
k
*********************
UI R&D DEP.
k Osaka GUI Design
k Kyocera
[ Menu ]

11-18

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Management

6 Press [Menu] (the Right Select key), press the 

Menu: a b or  key to select [Add Account], and then press
1 Detail/Edit the OK key.
2 Delete
3 Add Account
*********************

7 Enter the account name and press the OK key.

Account Name: T b
* S

ABC
[ Text ]

8 Enter the account code and press the OK key.

Account ID: b
NOTE: Any account ID that has already registered
*******************
S
cannot be used. Enter any other account ID.

9 Press the  or  key to select [Exit] and then

k Dep.01: a b press the OK key.
1
*********************
Exit
2 Detail Select [Detail] and press the OK key to see
information of the registered accounts.

10 Account. List is displayed and the new account is 11

added to the account list.

Managing Accounts
This changes the registered account information or deletes the account.

Use the procedure below to manage accounts.

NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.

11-19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Management

1 See the procedure for displaying user control on

page 11-2, and display the User/Job Account.

2 In the User/Job Account menu, press the  or 

User/Job Account:a b key to select [Job Account. Set.].
1 User Login Set.
2
*********************
Job Account.Set.
3 Unknown ID Job
[ Exit ]

3 Press the OK key. The Job Account. Set. menu

Job Account.Set.:a b appears.
4 Total Accounting
5 Each Job Account
6
*********************
Account. List
[ Exit ]

4 Press the  or  key to select [Account. List].

5 Press the OK key. Account. List appears.

Account. List: a b
k
*********************
UI R&D DEP.
k Osaka GUI Design
k Kyocera
[ Menu ]

The procedure differs depending on the details to be

edited.

Changing account information

1 Press the  or  key to select the account whose
information you want to change, and then press
Account. List: a b the OK key.
k UI R&D DEP.
k
*********************
Osaka GUI Design
k Kyocera
[ Menu ]

2 Press the  or  key to select the item you want

Detail: C b to change, press [Edit] (the Right Select key),
Account Name: 1/7 change account information and restriction of use,
Osaka GUI Design and then press the OK key.

[ Edit ] NOTE: Activate or deactivate restriction. Refer to

Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 11-22.

3 Repeat step 2 to change items as necessary.

11-20

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Management

4 After completing changing the account

Overwrite. information, press the OK key again. A
Are you sure? confirmation screen appears.
z k Osaka GUI DESIGN

[ Yes ] [ No ]

5 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The account

information is changed. Registered. is displayed
and the screen returns to Account. List.

Deleting an account
1 Press the  or  key to select the account you
Account. List: a b want to delete, and then press [Menu] (the Right
k UI R&D DEP. Select key).
k
*********************
Osaka GUI Design
k Kyocera
[ Menu ]

2 Press the  or  key to select [Delete].

Menu: a b
1 Detail/Edit
2
*********************
Delete
3 Add Account

3 Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears.

Delete.
Are you sure?
z k UI R&D DEPT.
11
[ Yes ] [ No ]

4 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The account is

deleted. Completed. is displayed and the screen
returns to Account. List.

Managing the Copier/Printer Counts

You can select how the copying and printing page counts are shown - either the total of both or each of copying
and printing individually. The selection may influence restriction on the count and count method. Refer to
Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 11-22, Counting the Number of Pages Printed on page 11-29 and
Printing an Accounting Report on page 11-33 for details.

Use the procedure below to set the counting methods.

11-21

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Management

1 See the procedure for displaying user control on

page 11-2, and display the User/Job Account.

2 In the User/Job Account menu, press the  or 

User/Job Account:a b key to select [Job Account. Set.].
1 User Login Set.
2
*********************
Job Account.Set.
3 Unknown ID Job
[ Exit ]

3 Press the OK key. The Job Account. Set. menu

Job Account.Set.:a b appears.
1
*********************
Job Accounting
2 AccountingAccess
3 Account. Report
[ Exit ]

4 Press the  or  key to select [Default Setting].

5 Press the OK key. The Default Setting menu

Default Setting: a b appears.
1 Apply Limit
2
*********************
Copy/Print Count
3 Counter Limit
[ Exit ]

6 Press the  or  key to select [Copy/Print Count].

7 Press the OK key. Copy/Print Count appears.

Copy/Print Count:a b
1 Total
2 *Split
*********************

8 Press the  or  key to select [Total] or [Split].

9 Press the OK key.

Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to

the Default Setting menu.

Restricting the Use of the Machine

This section explains how to restrict the use of the machine by account or the number of sheets available.

The items that can be restricted differ depending on whether [Split] or [Total] is selected for Managing the
Copier/Printer Counts on page 11-21.

11-22

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Management

Restriction Items

 [Split] selected for Copier/Printer Count

Item Detail

Copier print limit A limit can be set for the total number of full color
(total) copies, monochrome copies, and black & white
copies.

Copier print limit A limit can be set for the number of full color copies.
(full color)

Printer print limit A limit can be set for the total number of pages
(total) printed in color and black & white.

Printer print limit A limit can be set for the number of pages printed in
(color) color.

Scan Restriction Limits the number of sheets scanned (excludes

(Others) copying).

Fax TX Limits the number of sheets sent by fax. (Only on

Restriction products with the fax function installed)

 [Total] selected for Copier/Printer Count

Item Detail

Print limit (total) A limit can be set for the total number of printer and
copier pages printed.

Print limit (full A limit can be set for the number of pages printed in
color) full color. 11
Scan Restriction Limits the number of sheets scanned (excludes
(Others) copying).

Fax TX Limits the number of sheets sent by fax. (Only on

Restriction products with the fax function installed)

11-23

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Management

Applying Restriction

Restriction can be applied in two modes as follows:

Item Description

Off No restriction given

Counter Limit Restricts the print counter in one-page increments

up to 9,999,999 copies.

Reject Usage Restriction is applied.

Use the procedure below to select a restriction method.

1 Follow steps 1 to 7 of Adding an Account on page

11-18.

2 In Account. List, press the  or  key to select the

Account. List: a b account to which you want to set restriction of use,
k UI R&D DEP. and then press the OK key.
k
*********************
Osaka GUI Design
k Kyocera
[ Menu ]

3 Press the  or  key to select the item to be

Detail: C b restricted and then press [Edit] (the Right Select
Print Restrict.: 4/6 key).
Total
Off
[ Edit ]

When selecting [Split] in Copy/Print Count, screen

Detail: C b changes as shown in the left.
Print Restrict.: 4/7
Copier
Off
[ Edit ]

4 Press the  or  key to select the desired

Print Restrict.: a b restriction method and then press the OK key.
1
*********************
*Off
2 Counter Limit
3 Reject Usage

11-24

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Management

If you select [Counter Limit], enter the upper limit

Limit Pages: D b number of pages in the next screen, and then
(1 - 9999999) press the OK key.
**123456*pages

5 Repeat step 3 to 4 to set items as necessary.

6 Press the OK key again. A confirmation screen

Overwrite. appears.
Are you sure?
z k Osaka GUI DESIGN

[ Yes ] [ No ]

7 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The restriction of

use is changed. Registered. is displayed and the
screen returns to Account. List.

Applying Limit of Restriction

This specifies how the machine behaves when the counter has reached the limit of restriction. The table below
describes the action taken.

Item Description

Immediately * Job stops when the counter reaches its limit.

Subsequently Printing/scanning of the job continues but the

subsequent job will be rejected. 11
Alert Only Job continues while displaying an alert message.
* The next job will be prohibited in sending or in storing in the box.

Use the procedure below to apply the restriction limit.

1 See the procedure for displaying user control on

page 11-2, and display the User/Job Account.

2 In the User/Job Account menu, press the  or 

User/Job Account:a b key to select [Job Account. Set.].
1 User Login Set.
2
*********************
Job Account.Set.
3 Unknown ID Job
[ Exit ]

11-25

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Management

3 Press the OK key. The Job Account. Set. menu

Job Account.Set.:a b appears.
4 Total Accounting
5
*********************
Each Job Account
6 Account. List
[ Exit ]

4 Press the  or  key to select [Default Setting].

5 Press the OK key. The Default Setting menu

Default Setting: a b appears.
1
*********************
Apply Limit
2 Copy/Print Count
3 Counter Limit
[ Exit ]

6 Press the  or  key to select [Apply Limit].

7 Press the OK key. Apply Limit appears.

Apply Limit: a b
1 Immediately
2
*********************
*Subsequently
3 Alert Only

8 Press the  or  key to select [Immediately],

[Subsequently] or [Alert Only].

9 Press the OK key.

Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to

the Default Setting menu.

11-26

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Management

Default Counter Limit

When you add a new account, you can change the default restrictions on the number of sheets used.

You can set any number from 1 to 9,999,999 in 1-sheet increments.

The items that can be set differ depending on whether [Split] or [Total] is selected for Managing the Copier/
Printer Counts on page 11-21.

Available Settings

 [Split] selected for Copier/Printer Count

Item Detail

Copier print limit A default value can be set for the total color copy
(total) and black & white copy limit.

Copier print limit A default value can be set for the full color copy
(full color) limit.

Printer print limit A default value can be set for the total color and
(total) black & white printed page limit.

Printer print limit A default value can be set for the color printed page
(color) limit.

Scan Restriction Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets

(Other) used for scanning (excludes copying).

FAX TX Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets

Restriction used for sending faxes. (Only on products with the
fax function installed)

 [Total] selected for Copier/Printer Count 11

Item Detail

Print limit (total) A default value can be set for the full color printed
page limit.

Print limit (full Sets the default restriction on the total number of
color) sheets used for copying and printing.

Scan Restriction Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets

(Other) used for scanning (excludes copying).

FAX TX Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets

Restriction used for sending faxes. (Only on products with the
fax function installed)

Use the procedure below to specify the counter limits.

11-27

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Management

1 See the procedure for displaying user control on

page 11-2, and display the User/Job Account.

2 In the User/Job Account menu, press the  or 

User/Job Account:a b key to select [Job Account. Set.].
1 User Login Set.
2
*********************
Job Account.Set.
3 Unknown ID Job
[ Exit ]

3 Press the OK key. The Job Account. Set. menu

Job Account.Set.:a b appears.
1
*********************
Job Accounting
2 AccountingAccess
3 Account. Report
[ Exit ]

4 Press the  or  key to select [Default Setting].

5 Press the OK key. The Default Setting menu

Default Setting: a b appears.
1
*********************
Apply Limit
2 Copy/Print Count
3 Counter Limit
[ Exit ]

6 Press the  or  key to select [Counter Limit].

7 Press the OK key. Counter Limit appears.

Counter Limit: a b
1
*********************
Copy Restriction
2 Print Restrict.
3 ScanRest.(Other)

8 Press the  or  key to select the item for which

you want to set the default restriction on the
number of sheets, and then press the OK key.

9 Use the numeric keys to enter the default

Copy(Total): D b restriction on the number of sheets, and then press
(1 - 9999999) the OK key.
**123456*
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
Counter Limit.

10 Repeat steps 10 to 11 set other default restrictions

on the number of sheets.

11-28

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Management

Counting the Number of Pages Printed

This counts the number of pages printed. Counts are classified into Total Job Accounting and Each Job
Accounting. A new count can also be started after resetting the count data which was stored for a certain period
of time.

Types of the counts are as follows.

Item Detail

Printed Pages Displays the number of pages copied and printed,

and the total number of pages used. You can also
use [Duplex Pages] and [Combine Pages] to check
the number of pages used.

Scanned Pages Displays the number of pages scanned for copying,

faxing* and other functions, as well as the total
number of pages scanned.

FAX TX Pages* Displays the number of pages faxed.

FAX TX Time* Displays the total duration of fax transmissions.

* Only on products with the fax function installed

Total Job Accounting/Resetting the Counter

This counts the number of pages for all accounts and resets the counts for those accounts together at the same
time.

Use the procedure below to check and reset the counter.

1 See the procedure for displaying user control on

page 11-2, and display the User/Job Account.
11
2 In the User/Job Account menu, press the  or 
User/Job Account:a b key to select [Job Account. Set.].
1 User Login Set.
2
*********************
Job Account.Set.
3 Unknown ID Job
[ Exit ]

3 Press the OK key. The Job Account. Set. menu

Job Account.Set.:a b appears.
1
*********************
Job Accounting
2 AccountingAccess
3 Account. Report
[ Exit ]

4 Press the  or  key to select [Total Accounting].

11-29

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Management

5 Press the OK key. The Total Accounting menu

Total Accounting:a b appears.
1
*********************
Printed Pages
2 Scanned Pages
3 FAX TX Pages
[ Exit ]

6 Press the  or  key to select the function of

which you want to check counts, and then press
the OK key.

If you select [Printed Pages], select the item for

Copy/Print Pages:C b which you want to check printed page counts, and
Copy(B & W): 1/5 then press the OK key. Press the  or  key to
1234567 switch the counted items.
If you select [Scanned Pages], press the  or 
key to switch the counted items.

7 After confirming the content, press the OK key.

The screen returns to the Total Accounting menu.

8 To reset the counter, press the  or  key to

Total Accounting:a b select [Counter Reset].
1 Printed Pages
2 Scanned Pages
3
*********************
Counter Reset
[ Exit ]

9 Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears.

Reset counter.
Are you sure?
z Total JobAccounting

[ Yes ] [ No ]

10 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The counter is

reset. Completed. is displayed and the screen
returns to the Total Accounting menu.

Each Job Accounting/Resetting the Counter

This counts the number of pages for each account and resets the counts by account.

Use the procedure below to display and reset the counter.

11-30

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Management

1 See the procedure for displaying user control on

page 11-2, and display the User/Job Account.

2 In the User/Job Account menu, press the  or 

User/Job Account:a b key to select [Job Account. Set.].
1 User Login Set.
2
*********************
Job Account.Set.
3 Unknown ID Job
[ Exit ]

3 Press the OK key. The Job Account. Set. menu

Job Account.Set.:a b appears.
4 Total Accounting
5
*********************
Each Job Account
6 Account. List
[ Exit ]

4 Press the  or  key to select [Each Job

Account].

5 Press the OK key. The Each Job Accounting menu

Each Job Account: a b appears.
k
*********************
Osaka GUI DESIGN
k Kyocera
k UI R&D DEPT.

6 Press the  or  key to select the account of

which you want to check counts.

7 Press the OK key. A menu for the account

11
Osaka GUI DESIGN: a b appears.
1
*********************
Printed Pages
2 Scanned Pages
3 Counter Reset
[ Exit ]

8 Press the  or  key to select the function of

which you want to check counts, and then press
the OK key.

If you select [Printed Pages], select the item for

which you want to check printed page counts, and
then press the OK key. Press the  or  key to
switch the counted items.

11-31

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Management

If you select [Scanned Pages], press the  or 

Copy/Print Pages:C b key to switch the counted items.
Copy(B & W): 1/5
1234567 If the number of output sheets is restricted by an
account management function, the upper limit on
Limit:1234567 the number of output sheets is also displayed.

9 After confirming the content, press the OK key.

The screen returns to the menu for the account.

10 To reset the counter, press the  or  key to

Osaka GUI DESIGN: a b select [Counter Reset].
1
*********************
Printed Pages
2 Scanned Pages
3 Counter Reset
[ Exit ]

11 Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears.

Reset counter.
Are you sure?
z k Osaka GUI DESIGN

[ Yes ] [ No ]

12 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The counter is

reset. Completed. is displayed and the screen
returns to the menu for the account.

11-32

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Management

Printing an Accounting Report

Total pages counted at all relevant accounts can be printed as an accounting report.

Reports have different formats depending on how the count of copiers and printers is administered.

When Split is selected for Managing the Copier/Printer Count

For the count by paper size, the report will be printed by size.

Use the procedure below to print a job accounting report.

1 See the procedure for displaying user control on

page 11-2, and display the User/Job Account. 11
2 In the User/Job Account menu, press the  or 
User/Job Account:a b key to select [Job Account. Set.].
1 User Login Set.
2
*********************
Job Account.Set.
3 Unknown ID Job
[ Exit ]

3 Press the OK key. The Job Account. Set. menu

Job Account.Set.:a b appears.
1
*********************
Job Accounting
2 AccountingAccess
3 Account. Report
[ Exit ]

4 Press the  or  key to select [Account. Report]

and then press the OK key.

11-33

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Management

5 In the confirmation screen, press [Yes] (the Left

Print. Select key). A job accounting report is printed.
Are you sure?
z Total JobAccounting

[ Yes ] [ No ]

11-34

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Management

Checking the Counter

You can check the number of pages printed and scanned.

The number is counted by the following items:

Item Description

Printed By Function You can check the number of pages copied,

Pages faxed*, and printed, and the total number of
pages used.

By Paper You can check the number of pages printed

Size for each paper size.

Scanned Pages You can check the number of pages copied,

faxed*, and otherwise scanned, and the
total number of pages used.
* FAX functions available only on products with the fax function
installed.

1 Press the system menu / counter key, press  or

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b  key to select [Counter] from the system menu /
1 Report counter menu, and press the OK key.
2
*********************
Counter
3 System/Network
[ Exit ]

2 If user control is available, the user authentication

Login User Name L b screen appears. Enter the Login User Name and
******************* Login Password, and press [Login]. In this case,
Login Password: log in with administrator authority. For the default 11
Login User Name and Login Password, see
Adding a User on page 11-6.
[ Login ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Printed Pages],

Counter: a b [Scanned Pages] or [Full Color Pages], and then
1
*********************
Printed Pages press the OK key.
2 Scanned Pages
3 Full Color Pages NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on
[ Exit ] Appendix-9 for details on entering characters.

If you select [Printed Pages], select [by Function]

Printed Pages: a b or [by Paper Size] in the next screen, and then
1
*********************
by Function press the OK key.
2 by Paper Size

[ Exit ]

11-35

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Management

4 Press the  or  key to check the count.

Printed Pages: C b
Copy(B & W): 1/5
1234567

5 After completing checking the count, press the OK

key. The screen returns to the menu for the
account.

11-36

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Appendix

• Optional Equipment ......................................... Appendix-2

• Character Entry Method .................................. Appendix-9
• Paper ............................................................. Appendix-13
• Color balance adjustment.............................. Appendix-23
• Sharpness adjustment................................... Appendix-24
• Color saturation adjustment........................... Appendix-24
• Specifications................................................. Appendix-25
• Glossary ........................................................ Appendix-29

Appendix-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Optional Equipment

Overview of Optional Equipment

The following optional equipment is available for the machine.

Expansion Memory

SSD Wireless Network

Interface Kit

Network Interface kit

Cover

Paper Feeder

Paper Feeder
Two additional cassettes identical to the machine’s cassettes can be installed in the machine. Paper capacity
and loading method are the same as Cassettes 1.

NOTE: To allow paper to be removed when a paper jam occurs, there is a cover (rear cover) on the rear side
of the paper feeder.

CAUTION: When using the paper feeder, be sure to replace the cover.

Expansion Memory
To expand the printer memory for more complex print jobs and faster print speed, you can plug in optional memory
module (dual in line memory module) in the memory slot provided on the main controller board. You can select
additional memory module from 256, 512 or 1024 MB. The maximum memory size is 2048 MB.

NOTE: The expansion memory should only be installed by your service technician. We shall not be liable for any
damages caused by improper installation of expansion memory.

Appendix-2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Precautions for Handling the Memory Module

Correct Incorrect

To protect electronic parts, discharge static

electricity from your body by touching a water pipe
(faucet) or other large metal object before handling
the memory module. Or, wear an antistatic wrist
strap, if possible, when you install the memory
module.

Installing the Memory Module

1 Turn off the machine and disconnect the power
cord and interface cable.

2 Remove the right cover with a piece of metal

similar to coin.

3 Open the inside cover.

4 Remove the memory module from its package.

Appendix-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 5 With the memory connection terminal pointing
toward the socket, align the cut-out part with the
socket terminal and insert directly in at an angle.

CAUTION: Before inserting a memory module in the

machine, make sure that the machine is switched off.

6 Carefully press the inserted memory down and into

the machine.

7 Reinstall the right cover.

Removing the Memory Module

To remove a memory module, remove the right cover

and the memory slot cover from the machine. Then,
carefully push out the two socket clamps. Ease the
memory module out of the socket to remove.

Verifying the expanded memory

To verify that the memory module is working properly,

test it by printing a status page.

Card Authentication Kit

User login administration can be performed using IC cards. To do so, it is necessary to register IC card
information on the previously registered local user list. For more information about how to register this
information, refer to the IC Card Authentication Kit Operation Guide.

SSD
With SSD installed in the machine, received data can be rasterized and stored on this SSD. This enables high-
speed printing of multiple copies using an electric sort function. Also, you can use the Document Box functions.
For details, refer to Document Box on page 6-1.

Option Interface
Slot

Appendix-4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Network Interface Kit
Along with the standard for the network interface on the machine, the network interface kit supports TCP/IP and
NetBEUI protocols, so that the machine can be used on network environments including Windows, Macintosh,
UNIX, etc. The network interface kit must be installed in the option interface slot at the back of the machine as
shown in the figure.

Option Interface
Slot

CAUTION: Before installing, verify your network environment and other important information with your dealer.

Wireless Network Interface Kit

This is a wireless network interface kit which supports the wireless network specifications IEEE802.11n (Max
300 Mbps) and 11 g/b. With the utilities supplied, settings are possible for a variety of OS and network protocols.

Option Interface
Slot

CAUTION: Before installing, verify your network environment and other important information with your dealer.

USB Keyboard
A USB keyboard can be used to enter information into the text fields on the operation panel. Please contact
your dealer or service representative for information on keyboards that are compatible with your MFP before
you purchase one.

ThinPrint Option
This application allows print data to be printed directly without a print driver.

Appendix-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Optional Function
You can use the optional applications installed on this machine.

Overview of the Applications

The applications listed below are installed on this machine.

You can use these applications for a limited period on a trial basis.

• UG-33 (ThinPrint) (This application can only be activated in Europe.)

This application allows print data to be printed directly without a print driver.

NOTE: Restrictions such as the number of times the application can be used during the trial period differ
depending on the application.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [System], and press the OK key.
1 Report
2 Counter
3
*********************
System
[ Exit ]

When you are performing user management and

Login User Name: L b have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
******************* Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Login Password: Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right
Select key).
[ Login ]

2 The System menu appears.

System: a b
1
*********************
Network Setting
2 I/F Block Set.
3 Security Level
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Op Function].

4 Press the OK key. The Op Function menu

Op Function: a b appears.
1 g
*********************
ID-Card
2 UG-33 T

[ Menu ]

5 Press the  or  key to select desired application.

Appendix-6

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 6 Press the OK key. The selected application menu
Licence On: a b appears.
1
*********************
*Official
2 Trial

7 Press the  or  key to select [Official] or [Trial].

If you select [Official], the License key entry

screen is displayed. Enter the License key using
the numeric keys and press the OK key.

To use the application as a trial, press [Trial]

without entering the License key.

If you select [Trial] and press the OK key, the

Test the optional confirmation screen appears. Press [Yes] (the
function for a Right Select key).
limited time.
Are you sure?
[ Yes ] [ No ]

8 Licensed. is displayed and the screen returns to

the Op Function menu.

CAUTION: If you change the date/time while using an application, you will no longer be able to use the
application.

Checking Application Details

Use the procedure below to check the details of an application.

1 In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the  or 

Sys. Menu/Count.:a b key to select [System], and press the OK key.
1 Report
2 Counter
3
*********************
System
[ Exit ]

When you are performing user management and

Login User Name: L b have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
******************* Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Login Password: Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right
Select key).
[ Login ]

Appendix-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 2 The System menu appears.
System: a b
1
*********************
Network Setting
2 I/F Block Set.
3 Security Level
[ Exit ]

3 Press the  or  key to select [Op Function].

4 Press the OK key. The Op Function menu

Op Function: a b appears.
1 g
*********************
ID-Card
2 UG-33 T

[ Menu ]

5 Press [Menu] (the Left Select key).

6 Press the  or  key to select [Detail]. The detail

Menu: a b setting screen appears.
1
*********************
Licence On
2 Detail You can now view detailed information on the
selected application.

Appendix-8

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Character Entry Method
In character entry screens, use the procedure below to enter characters.

Keys Used
Use the following keys to enter characters.

1 2 6

7 3 4 5

1. OK Key Press this key to finalize the entered character(s).

2. Clear Key Press this key to delete the character at the cursor position. If the cursor is at the end of
the line, the character to the left of it is deleted.

3. Back Key Press this key to return to the screen from which you invoked the character entry screen.

4. Cursor Keys Use these to select the entry position, or select a character from the character list.

5. Numeric Keys Use these keys to select the character you want to enter.

6. Reset Key Press this key to cancel the character entry procedure and return to the standby screen.

7. Right Select Key Press this key to select the type of characters you want to enter. (When [Text] is
displayed)

Appendix-9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Selecting Type of Characters
To enter characters, the following three types are available:

ABC To enter alphabets.

123 To enter numerals.
Symbols To enter symbols.

In a character entry screen, press [Text] (the Right

File name input: Select key) to select the type of characters you
OsakaSD3* want to enter.

123
[ Text ]

Current character type

Each time you press [Text] (the Right Select key),

ABC the character type switches as follows: ABC, 123,
[ Text ] Symbol, ABC ...

123
[ Text ]

Symbols: a b

[ Text ]

NOTE: By pressing on the numeric keys while

entering characters, you can directly display the
Symbols screen.

Appendix-10

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Entering Characters
After selecting a character type, use the procedure below to enter characters.

Entering Alphabets and Numerals

Referring to the table below, press the key corresponding to the character you want to enter until it is displayed.

Key Entry mode Available characters

Alphabetic/Symbol .@-_/:¯1

Numeric 1

Alphabetic/Symbol abcABC2

Numeric 2

Alphabetic/Symbol defDEF3

Numeric 3

Alphabetic/Symbol ghiGHI4

Numeric 4

Alphabetic/Symbol jklJKL5

Numeric 5

Alphabetic/Symbol mnoMNO6

Numeric 6

Alphabetic/Symbol pqrsPQRS7

Numeric 7

Alphabetic/Symbol tuvTUV8

Numeric 8

Alphabetic/Symbol wxyzWXYZ9

Numeric 9

Alphabetic/Symbol . , - _ ’ ! ? (space) 0

Numeric 0

Alphabetic/Symbol Switch between upper-/lowercase

Numeric * or . (decimal point)*

Alphabetic/Symbol #
Numeric

* '*' is entered when [123] is selected in the character type selection,

or '.' is entered when only numerals are entered and no character
type is selected.

Appendix-11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Characters associated with different keys can be entered consecutively. To enter a character associated with
the same key after another, use cursor keys to move the cursor to the next entry position before entering it.

If you use cursor keys to move the cursor to an entry position apart from the end of the line and enter a character
there, spaces are automatically entered in between.

Entering Symbols
Press [Text] (the Right Select key) or # on the
Symbols: a b numeric keys to display the Symbols screen. Use
cursor keys to select the symbol you want to enter
and then press the OK key.

[ Text ]

Entry When [Select Character] Is Selected in Login Operation Settings

In the login screen that appears when user management is enabled, the character entry method may vary
depending on the settings. (Refer to Login Operation on page 8-62.)

If a character palette appears on the screen, use

Login User Name: a b cursor keys to select the desired character from
Kyocer* the displayed characters, and then press the OK
*abcdefghijklmnopqrst key to enter it.
uvwxyzABCDEFGHIJKLMNO
[ Next ] NOTE: Numerals can be entered directly by pressing
numeric keys.

Appendix-12

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Paper
This section explains the paper sizes and types that can be used in the paper source.

Cassette

Supported types Supported paper sizes No. of sheets

Plain (60g/m2 to 163g/m2) A4, B5, A5, Folio, Legal, Letter, Oficio 250 (80g/m2)
Recycled (60g/m2 to 163g/m2) II, Statement, Executive, A6,
Envelope C5, 16K, 216 × 340 mm,
ISO B5, Custom

Optional paper feeder

Supported types Supported paper sizes No. of sheets

Plain (60g/m2 to 163g/m2) Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive, 500 (80g/m2)

Recycled (60g/m2 to 163g/m2) Oficio II, A4, A5, B5, Folio, 16K,
Color (Colour) (60g/m2 to 163g/m2) 216 × 340 mm, ISO B5, Envelope #6,
Envelope C5, Youkei 2, Envelope #10,
Envelope DL, Envelope #9, Envelope
Monarch, Youkei 4, Oufuku Hagaki,
Custom

Optional paper feeder (Multi Purpose)

Supported types Supported paper sizes No. of sheets

Plain (60g/m2 to 220g/m2) Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive, 500 (80g/m2)

Recycled (60g/m2 to 220g/m2) Oficio II, A4, A5, B5, Folio, 16K,
Color (Colour) (60g/m2 to 220g/m2) 216 × 340 mm, Custom

Envelopes ISO B5, Envelope #6, Envelope C5, Loading height: 40mm
Youkei 2, Envelope #10, Envelope DL,
Envelope #9, Envelope Monarch,
Youkei 4, Oufuku Hagaki

Appendix-13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Multi Purpose tray (MP tray)

Supported types Supported paper sizes No. of sheets

Plain, Preprinted, Labels, Bond, Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive, 50 (80g/m2)

Recycled, Rough, Vellum, Oficio II, A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, Folio,
Letterhead, Color (Colour), 16K, 216×340 mm
Prepunched, Coated, High Quality,
Custom 1 to 8 Other sizes:
Portrait-2.76 to 8.50" or 70 to 216 mm
Landscape-5.83 to 14.02" or 148 to
356 mm

Thick paper A4, JIS B5, A5, Folio, Legal, Letter, 1

Oficio II, Statement, Executive, A6,
B6, ISO B5, 16K

Other sizes:
Portrait-2.76 to 8.50" or 70 to 216 mm
Landscape-5.83 to 14.02" or 148 to
356 mm

Postcards Postcards (100 × 148 mm) 15

Oufuku Hagaki (return postcard) Return postcard (148 × 200 mm)

Envelopes ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, 5

Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch,
Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Youkei 4,
Youkei 2

Other sizes:
Portrait-2.76 to 8.50" or 70 to 216 mm
Landscape-5.83 to 14.02" or 148 to
356 mm

Transparency (OHP film) Letter, A4 1

Appendix-14

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Basic Paper Specifications
This machine is designed to print on standard copy paper as used in regular ('dry') copiers and page printers
such as laser printers. It also supports a variety of other types of paper that conform to the specifications given
in this appendix.

Be careful when choosing paper. Paper unsuitable for the machine may cause jams or may be wrinkled.

Supported Paper

Use standard copy paper for regular copiers or laser printers. The printing quality will be affected by the quality
of paper. Poor quality paper may result in unsatisfactory output.

Basic Paper Specifications

The following table lists the specifications of paper that is supported with this machine. Refer to the subsequent
sections for further details.

Criteria Specifications

Weight Cassette 1: 60 to 163 g/m2

Multi purpose tray: 60 to 220 g/m2

Thickness 0.086 to 0.110 mm

Dimensional accuracy ±0.7 mm

Squareness of corners 90° ±0.2°

Moisture content 9%

Grain direction Long grain (paper supply direction)

Pulp content 80% or more

NOTE: Some recycled paper does not meet requirements for use with this machine as listed in the Basic
Paper Specifications shown below, such as moisture or pulp content. For this reason, we recommend
purchasing a small amount of recycled paper as a sample for testing prior to use. Choose recycled paper that
gives the best printing results and contains low levels of paper dust.

We are not responsible for the problems occurred from the use of paper that does not conform to our
specifications.

Appendix-15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Choosing the Appropriate Paper
This section describes guidelines for choosing paper.

Condition

Avoid using paper with bent corners or that is curled, dirty, or torn. Do not use paper that has a rough surface
or paper fiber lint, or that is especially delicate. Use of paper in any of these conditions will not only deliver poor
copies but may also cause jams and shorten the useful life of the machine. Choose paper with a smooth and
even surface; however, avoid coated paper or paper with a treated surface as it may damage the drum or fusing
unit.

Ingredient

Do not use paper such as paper that has been coated or surface-treated or paper that contains plastic or
carbon. These paper may produce harmful fumes from the heat of printing and may damage the drum.

Be sure to use the standard paper that contains at least 80% pulp, i.e., not more than 20% of the total paper
content consists of cotton or other fibers.

Supported Paper Sizes

Paper of the following sizes is supported by the machine.

Measurements in the table take into account a ±0.7 mm dimensional accuracy for length and width. Corner
angles must be 90° ± 0.2°.

Cassette 1 or Multi
Multi Purpose Tray
Purpose Tray

B6 (128 × 182 mm) Letter

Envelope #10 (Commercial #10) (4 1/8 × 9 1/2") Legal

Envelope #9 (Commercial #9) (3 7/8 × 8 7/8") Statement

Envelope #6 (Commercial #6 3/4) (3 5/8 × 6 1/2") Executive

Envelope Monarch (3 7/8 × 7 1/2") Oficio II

Envelope DL (110 × 220 mm) A4 (297 × 210 mm)

Hagaki (100 × 148mm) A5 (210 × 148 mm)

Oufuku Hagaki (148 × 200 mm) A6 (105 × 148 mm)

Youkei 4 (105 × 235 mm) B5 (257 × 182 mm)

Youkei 2 (114 × 162 mm) ISO B5 (176 × 250 mm)

Size Entry (70 × 148 to 216 × 356 mm) Folio (210 × 330 mm)

16K (273 × 197 mm)

216 × 340 mm

Envelope C5 (162 × 229mm)

Appendix-16

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Smoothness

The paper surface should be smooth, but it must be uncoated. With paper that is too smooth and slippery,
several sheets may accidentally be supplied at once, causing jams.

Basis Weight

In countries that use the metric system, basis weight is the weight in grams of one sheet of paper one square
meter in area. In the United States, basis weight is the weight in pounds of one ream (500 sheets) of paper cut
to the standard size (or trade size) for a specific grade of paper. Paper that is too heavy or too light may be
supplied incorrectly or cause paper jams, which may cause excessive wear of the machine. Mixed paper weight
(i.e., thickness) may cause several sheets to be supplied at once accidentally and may also cause blurring or
other printing problems if the toner fails to adhere correctly.

The recommended basis weight is between 60 and 163 g/m2 for the cassette 1 and between 60 and 220 g/m2
for the multi purpose tray.

Thickness

Avoid using paper that is too thick or thin. Signs that paper may be thin include frequent problems with paper
jams or with several sheets being supplied at once. Paper jams may also indicate that the paper is too thick.
The proper thickness is between 0.086 and 0.110 mm.

Moisture Content

Paper moisture content is the ratio of moisture to dryness expressed as a percentage. Moisture affects how the
paper is supplied, the electrostatic changeability of the paper, and how the toner adheres.

Paper moisture content varies depending on the relative humidity in the room. High relative humidity causes
paper to become damp, making the edges expand so it appears wavy. Low relative humidity causes paper to
lose moisture, making the edges tighten and weakening print contrast.

Wavy or tight edges may cause the paper to slip when it is supplied. Try to keep the moisture content between
4 to 6%.

To maintain the right level of moisture content, bear in mind the following considerations.

• Store paper in a cool, well-ventilated place.

• Store paper flat and unopened in the package. Once the package is opened, reseal it if the paper is not to
be used for a while.
• Store paper sealed in the original package and box. Put a pallet under the carton to keep it raised above the
floor. Especially during rainy seasons keep the paper a sufficient distance away from wooden or concrete
floors.
• Before using paper that has been stored, keep it at the proper moisture level for at least 48 hours.
• Do not store paper where it is exposed to heat, sunlight, or dampness.

Other Paper Specifications

Porosity: The density of the paper fibers

Stiffness: Paper must be stiff enough or it may buckle in the machine, causing jams.

Appendix-17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Curl: Most paper naturally tends to curl after the package is opened. When paper passes through the fixing unit,
it curls upward slightly. To deliver flat printouts, load the paper so that the curl faces towards the bottom of the
paper tray.

Static electricity: During printing, paper is electrostatically charged so that the toner adheres. Choose paper
that can be discharged quickly so that copies do not cling together.

Whiteness: Paper whiteness affects print contrast. Use whiter paper for sharper, brighter copies.

Quality: Machine problems may occur if sheet sizes are not uniform or if corners are not square, edges are
rough, sheets are uncut, or edges or corners are crushed. In order to prevent these problems, be especially
careful when you cut the paper yourself.

Packaging: Choose paper that is properly packaged and stacked in boxes. Ideally, the packaging itself should
have been treated with a coating to inhibit moisture.

Specially treated paper: We do not recommend printing onto the following types of paper, even if it conforms
to the basic specifications. When you use these kinds of paper, purchase a small amount first as a sample to
test.

• Glossy paper
• Watermarked paper
• Paper with an uneven surface
• Perforated paper

Special Paper
This section describes printing onto special paper and print media.

The following paper and media can be used.

• Transparency (OHP film)

• Rough
• Vellum
• Labels
• Recycled
• Preprinted
• Bond
• Cardstock
• Color (Colour)
• Prepunched
• Letterhead
• Envelope
• Thick
• Coated
• High Quality
• Custom 1 to 8

When using these paper and media, choose that are designed specifically for copiers or page printers (such as
laser printers). Use the multi purpose tray for transparencies, thick paper, envelopes, cardstocks, and label
paper.

Appendix-18

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Choosing Special Paper

Although special paper that meets the following requirements can be used with the machine, print quality will
vary considerably due to differences in the construction and quality of special paper. Thus, special paper is
more likely than regular paper to cause printing problems. Before purchasing special paper in volume, try testing
a sample to ensure the print quality is satisfactory. General precautions when printing onto special paper are
given below. Note that we are not responsible for any harm to the user or damage to the machine caused by
moisture or specifications of special paper.

Select a cassette or multi purpose tray for special paper.

Transparency (OHP film)

Transparencies must be able to withstand the heat of printing. Transparencies must meet the following
conditions.

Criteria Specifications

Heat resistance Must withstand at least 190°C

Thickness 0.100 to 0.110 mm

Material Polyester

Dimensional accuracy ±0.7 mm

Squareness of corners 90° ±0.2°

To avoid problems, use the multi purpose tray for transparencies and load transparencies with the long side
facing the machine.

If transparencies jam frequently at output, try pulling the leading edge of sheets gently as they are ejected.

Cardstock
Before loading Hagaki into the multi purpose tray, fan
them and align the edges. If the Hagaki paper is
Burrs curled, straighten it before loading. Printing onto
curled Hagaki may cause jams.
Burrs
Use unfolded Oufuku Hagaki (available at post offices).
Some Hagaki may still have rough edges developed by
a paper cutter on the back side. Remove any such
rough edges by placing the Hagaki on a flat surface and
rubbing the edges gently a few times with a ruler.

Appendix-19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Envelopes

Envelopes should always be fed from the Multi Purpose tray or paper feeder (multi purpose), with the print-side
up. If you use envelopes quite often, we recommend to use the paper feeder (multi purpose).

Due to the structure of envelopes, printing evenly over the entire surface may not be possible in some cases.
Thin envelopes in particular may be wrinkled by the machine in some cases as they pass through. Before
purchasing envelopes in volume, try testing a sample to ensure the print quality.

Storing envelopes for a long period may cause them to become wrinkled. Thus, keep the package sealed until
you are ready to use them.

Keep the following points in mind.

Do not use envelopes with exposed adhesive. In addition, do not use the type of envelope in which the adhesive
is exposed after the top layer is peeled off. Serious damage may be caused if the paper covering the adhesive
comes off in the machine.

Do not use envelopes with certain special features. For example, do not use envelopes with a grommet for
winding a string to close the flap or envelopes with an open or film-covered window.

If paper jams occur, load fewer envelopes at once.

To prevent paper jams when printing onto multiple envelopes, do not allow more than ten envelopes remain in
the top tray at once.

Thick Paper

Before loading thick paper in the multi purpose tray, fan it and align the edges. Some thick paper may still have
rough edges developed by a paper cutter on the back side. Remove any such rough edges just as with Hagaki
by placing the paper on a flat surface and rubbing the edges gently a few times with a ruler. Printing onto paper
with rough edges may cause jams.

NOTE: If the paper is not supplied correctly even after it is smoothed, load the paper in the multi purpose tray
with the leading edge raised a few millimeters.

Label

Labels must be fed from the Multi Purpose tray or paper feeder (multi purpose).

For selecting labels, use extreme care so that the adhesive may not come in direct contact with any part of the
machine and that the labels are not easily peeled from the carrier sheet. Adhesives that stick to the drum or
rollers and peeled labels remaining in the machine may cause a failure.

When printing onto labels, you must be liable for the print quality and possible trouble.

Labels consist of three layers as shown in the

illustration. The adhesive layer contains materials that
are easily affected by the force applied in the machine.
Top sheet The carrier sheet bears the top sheet until the label is
Adhesive layer used. This composition of labels may cause more
problems.
Carrier sheet

Appendix-20

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The label surface must be covered completely with the
top sheet. Gaps between labels may cause peeling of
labels, resulting in a serious failure.

Some label paper has large margins on the top sheet. When using such paper, do not peel these margins from
the carrier sheet before completing output.

Allowed Not allowed

Top sheet

Carrier sheet

Use label paper that conforms to the following specifications.

Item Specifications

Top sheet weight 44 to 74 g/m²

Basis weight 104 to 151 g/m²

(overall paper weight)

Top sheet thickness 0.086 to 0.107 mm

Overall paper thickness 0.115 to 0.145 mm

Moisture content 4 to 6 % (composite)

Colored Paper

Colored paper must conform to the specifications listed on the page 15 of the Appendix. In addition, the
pigments in the paper must be able to withstand the heat of printing (up to 200°C or 392°F).

NOTE: If you use colored paper quite often, we recommend to use paper feeder (multi purpose).

Preprinted Paper

Preprinted paper must conform to the specifications listed on the page 13 of the Appendix. The colored ink must
be able to withstand the heat of printing. It must be resistant to silicone oil as well. Do not use paper with a
treated surface such as glossy paper used for calendars.

Recycled Paper

Recycled paper must conform to the specifications listed on the page 15 of the Appendix; however, its
whiteness may be considered separately.

NOTE: Before purchasing recycled paper in volume, try testing a sample to ensure that the print quality.

Appendix-21

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Coated Paper

Coated paper is created by treating the surface of the base paper with a coating that provides higher printing
quality than plain paper. Coated paper is used for particularly high quality printing.

The surface of high-quality or medium-quality paper is coated with special agents that improve ink adhesion by
making the paper surface smoother. These agents are used either to coat both sides of the paper or just one
side. The coated side appears slightly glossy.

IMPORTANT: When printing on coated paper in very humid environments, ensure that the paper is kept dry as
moisture may cause sheets to stick together when they are fed into the printer.

Paper Type Indicators (paper feeder (multi purpose))

If you are going to load non-standard paper in the paper feeder

(multi purpose), fold the provided paper type indicator sheet into
thirds so that the appropriate paper type symbol faces out and is at
the top, and insert it into the cassette's display folder.

:Envelopes

:Thick paper

:Labels

:Coated paper

The blank sheet can be used to write in any name or symbol.

When writing in a name or symbol on the bottom part of the sheet,
invert it with respect to the top part.

Appendix-22

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Color balance adjustment
Adjust the strength of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black to make fine hue adjustments. (Refer to the Operation
Guide for configuration details)
More Magenta

More Yellow More Cyan

Less Black Original More Black

Less Cyan Less Yellow

Less Magenta

Appendix-23

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Sharpness adjustment
Adjust the sharpness of image outlines. (Refer to the Operation Guide for configuration details)

Less Sharp Original More Sharp

Color saturation adjustment

The color saturation of the image can be adjusted. Color can be emphasized, or color can be made paler and
closer to a monotone.

Original

Setting a low color Setting a high color

saturation saturation

Appendix-24

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Specifications

NOTE: Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Common functions

Description
Item
ECOSYS M6026cdn/ ECOSYS M6526cdn/
ECOSYS M6026cdn Type B ECOSYS M6526cdn Type B

Type Desktop
Printing Method Electrophotography by semiconductor laser
Image Write System Semiconductor laser
Paper Cassette 1 60 to 163 g/m2 (Duplex: 60 to 163 g/m2)
Weight
Multi Purpose 60 to 220 g/m2, 230 µm (Cardstock)
Tray
Paper Type Cassette 1 Plain, Rough, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color (Colour), Prepunched,
Letterhead, Thick, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8 (Duplex: Same as
Simplex)
Multi Purpose Plain, Transparency (OHP film), Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled,
Tray Preprinted, Bond, Cardstock, Color (Colour), Prepunched, Letterhead,
Thick, Envelope, Coated, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8
Paper Size Cassette 1 Maximum: 8 1/2 × 14"/Legal (Duplex: 8 1/2 × 14"/Legal)
Minimum: 5 1/2 × 8 1/2"/A6 (Duplex: 7 1/4 × 10 1/2"/A5)
Multi Purpose Maximum: 8 1/2 × 14"/Legal
Tray Minimum: 3 5/8 × 6 1/2"/B6
Paper Cassette 1 250 sheets (80 g/m2)
Capacity
Multi Purpose 50 sheets (80 g/m2, plain paper, A4/Letter or less)
Tray
Output Tray Capacity 150 sheets (80 g/m2)
Memory Standard: 1GB Maximum: 2GB
Interface Standard USB Hi-Speed Interface: 1 Print, Scan (TWAIN/WIA)
USB memory slot: 2 Print to USB, Scan to USB, Card Authentication kit
Network interface: 1 (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX (TCP/IP, NetBEUI))
Print Scan (TWAIN/WIA), Scan to (SMB/FTP/Mail)
Option eKUIO slot: 1

Appendix-25

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Description
Item
ECOSYS M6026cdn/ ECOSYS M6526cdn/
ECOSYS M6026cdn Type B ECOSYS M6526cdn Type B

Operating Temperature 10 to 32.5°C/50 to 90.5°F

Environment
Humidity 15 to 80 %
Altitude 8,200 feet/2,500 m or less
Brightness 1,500 lux or less
Warm-up Power on 29 seconds or less
Time
(22°C/ Low Power 11 seconds or less
71.6°F,60%) Mode
Sleep 17 seconds or less
Dimension (W × D × H) 20 15/64 × 21 42/64 × 22 53/64" 20 15/64 × 21 42/64 × 22 53/64"
514 × 550 × 580 mm 514 × 550 × 580 mm
Weight (with toner container) 80.3 lb/36.5 kg 80.3 lb/36.5 kg
Space Required (W × D) 20 15/64 × 29 17/32"
514 × 750 mm (with Multi Purpose Tray expanded)
Power Requirement 120V Specification Model: 120V AC, 60Hz more than 8.9A
230V Specification Model: 220 - 240V AC, 50/60Hz more than 4.7A
Options Paper feeder (up to 2 units), Expanded memory, Card Authentication Kit,
SSD, Network Interface Kit, Wireless Network Interface Kit

Copy functions

Item Description

Copy Speed Simplex A4: 26 sheets/min A5/B5/A6 (until 15th image): 28 sheets/min
Legal: 23 sheets/min A5/B5/A6 (from 16th image): 14 sheets/min
Letter: 28 sheets/min
First Print Black & White When using the document processor: 11 seconds or less
Time When the document processor is not used: 10 seconds or less
(A4, feed
from Color When using the document processor: 13 seconds or less
Cassette 1) When the document processor is not used: 12 seconds or less

Zoom Level Manual mode: 25 to 400%, 1% increments

Fixed magnifications:
400%, 200%, 141%, 129%, 115%, 90%, 86%, 78%, 70%, 64%, 50%, 25%
Continuous Copying 1 to 999 sheets (can be set in one sheet increments)
Resolution 600 × 600 dpi
Supported Original Types Sheet, Book, 3-dimensional objects (maximum original size: Folio/Legal)
Original Feed System Fixed

Appendix-26

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Printer functions

Item Description

Printing Simplex A4: 26 sheets/min A5/B5/A6 (until 15th image): 28 sheets/min

Speed Legal: 23 sheets/min A5/B5/A6 (from 16th image): 14 sheets/min
(60 to 105 g/m2) Letter: 28 sheets/min

Duplex A4: 13 sheets/min Letter: 13 sheets/min

Legal: 12 sheets/min

First Print Time Black & White: 8.5 seconds or less

(A4, feed from Cassette 1) Color: 9.0 seconds or less

Resolution 600 dpi

Operating System Windows XP, Windows XP Professional, Windows Server 2003,

Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition, Windows Vista x86 Edition,
Windows Vista x64 Edition, Windows 7 x86 Edition,
Windows 7 x64 Edition, Windows Server 2008,
Windows Server 2008 x64 Edition, Windows Server 2012 x64 Edition,
Windows 8 x86 Edition, Windows 8 x64 Edition,
Apple Macintosh OS X (10.5 or later)

Page Description Language PRESCRIBE

Emulations PCL6 (PCL5e, PCL-XL), PCL6 (PCL5c, PCL-XL),

KPDL3 (PostScript3 compatible), PDF Direct Print Ver.1.7, XPS

Scanner functions

Item Description

Resolution 600 dpi, 400 dpi, 300 dpi, 200 dpi, 200 x 400 dpi, 200 x 100 dpi

File Format JPEG, TIFF, PDF, XPS, PDF/A, High Comp. PDF

Scanning Speed 1-sided: B/W 35 Images/min

Color 25 Images/min
2-sided: B/W 21 Images/min
Color 15 Images/min
(A4 landscape, 300 dpi, Image quality: Text/Photo original)

Network Protocol TCP/IP

Transmission PC transmission SMB Scan to SMB

System FTP Scan to FTP, FTP over SSL
E-mail transmission SMTP Scan to E-mail
TWAIN scan*1
WIA scan*2

*1 Available Operating System : Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2008,
Windows Server 2008 R2, Windows Server 2012, Windows 7, Windows 8
*2 Available Operating System : Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 R2,
Windows Server 2012, Windows 7, Windows 8

Appendix-27

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Document Processor

Item Description

Original Feed Automatic feed

Method

Supported Sheet originals

Original Types

Paper Size Maximum: Legal/A4

Minimum: Statement/A5

Paper Weight 50 to 120 g/m2 (Duplex: 50 to 110 g/m2)

Loading Capacity 50 sheets (50 to 80 g/m2) maximum

Dimensions 19 19/64 × 21 × 4 3/32"

(W) × (D) × (H) 490 × 338 × 104 mm

Weight 3 kg or less

Environmental Specifications

Description
Item
ECOSYS M6026cdn/ ECOSYS M6526cdn/
ECOSYS M6026cdn Type B ECOSYS M6526cdn Type B

Time to Low Power mode (default setting) 1 minute

Recovery time from Low Power mode 11 seconds or less

Time to Sleep mode (default setting) 15 minutes

Recovery time from Sleep mode 17 seconds or less

Duplexing Standard

Paper supply capability 100% recycled paper may be used.

NOTE: Consult your dealer or service representative for recommended paper types.

EN ISO 7779
Der höchste Schalldruckpegel beträgt 70 dB (A) oder weniger gemäß EN ISO 7779.

EK1-ITB 2000
Das Gerät ist nicht für die Benutzung im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz vorgesehen. Um
störende Reflexionen am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz zu vermeiden, darf dieses Produkt nicht im unmittelbaren
Gesichtsfeld platziert werden.

Appendix-28

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Glossary
AppleTalk

AppleTalk, which comes with Apple Computer's Mac OS, is a network protocol. AppleTalk enables file/printer
sharing and also enables you to utilize application software that is on another computer on the same AppleTalk
network.

Auto Form Feed Timeout

During data transmission, the machine may sometimes have to wait until receiving the next data. This is the
auto form feed timeout. When the preset timeout passes, the machine automatically put paper out. However,
no output is performed if the last page has no data to be printed.

Auto-IP

This is a protocol that automatically assigns IP addresses on a TCP/IP network. On a network without a DHCP
server, this can assign IP addresses so that there is no duplication with other devices. IP addresses are
assigned from the range 169.254.0.0 to 169.254.255.255, which is reserved for Auto-IP.

Auto Paper Selection

A function to automatically select paper in the same size as original at printing

Auto Sleep Mode

A mode designed for electrical power saving, activated when the machine is left unused or data transfer for a
specific period. In Sleep mode, power consumption is kept to a minimum.

Bonjour

Bonjour, also known as zero-configuration networking, is a service that automatically detects computers,
devices and services on an IP network. Bonjour, because an industry-standard IP protocol is used, allows
devices to automatically recognize each other without an IP address being specified or DNS server being set.
Bonjour also sends and receives network packets by UDP port 5353. If a firewall is enabled, the user must
check that UDP port 5353 is left open so that Bonjour will run correctly. Some firewalls are set up so as to reject
only certain Bonjour packets. If Bonjour does not run stably, check the firewall settings and ensure that Bonjour
is registered on the exceptions list and that Bonjour packets are accepted. If you install Bonjour on Windows
XP Service Pack 2 or later, the Windows firewall will be set up correctly for Bonjour.

Default Gateway

This indicates the device, such as a computer or router, that serves as the entrance/exit (gateway) for accessing
computers outside the network that you are on, When no specific gateway is designated for a destination IP
address, data is sent to the host designated as the Default Gateway.

DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) that automatically resolves IP addresses, subnet masks, and
gateway addresses on a TCP/IP network. DHCP minimizes the load of network management employing a large
number of client computers because it relieves individual clients including printers from the IP address being
assigned.

Appendix-29

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 dpi (dots per inch)

A unit for resolution, representing the number of dots printed per inch (25.4 mm).

EcoPrint Mode

A printing mode that helps save toner. Copies made in this mode are thus lighter than normal.

Emulation

The function to interpret and execute other printers' page description languages. The machine emulates
operation of PCL6 and KPDL3 (PostScript3 compatible).

FTP(File Transfer Protocol)

A protocol to transfer files on the TCP/IP network, whether the Internet or an intranet. Along with HTTP and
SMTP/POP, FTP is now frequently used on the Internet.

Grayscale

A computer color expression. Displayed images of this sort are typically composed of shades of gray, varying
from black at the weakest intensity to white at the strongest, without any other colors. Gray levels are displayed
in numerical levels: that is, white and black only for 1 bit; 256 gray levels (including white and black) for 8 bits;
and 65,536 gray levels for 16 bits.

IP Address

An Internet protocol address is a unique number that represents a specific computer or related device on the
network. The format of an IP address is four sets of numbers separated by dots, e.g. 192.168.110.171. Each
number should be between 0 and 255.

IPP

IPP (Internet Printing Protocol) is a standard that uses TCP/IP networks such as the Internet to enable print jobs
to be sent between remote computers and printers.IPP is an extension of the HTTP protocol used to view
websites and enables printing to be carried out via routers on printers in remote locations. It also supports the
HTTP authentication mechanisms along with SSL server and client authentication as well as encryption.

KPDL (Kyocera Page Description Language)

Kyocera's PostScript page description language compatible with Adobe PostScript Level 3.

Multi Purpose (MP) Tray

The paper supply tray on the front side of the machine. Use this tray instead of the cassettes when printing onto
envelopes, Hagaki, transparencies, or labels.

NetBEUI (NetBIOS Extended User Interface)

An interface, developed by IBM in 1985, as an update from NetBIOS. It enables more advanced functions on
smaller networks than other protocols such as TCP/IP, etc. It is not suitable for larger networks due to lack of
routing capabilities to choose the most appropriate routes. NetBEUI has been adopted by IBM for its OS/2 and
Microsoft for its Windows as a standard protocol for file sharing and printing services.

Appendix-30

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NetWare

Novell's network management software that is able to run on a variety of operating systems.

PDF/A

This is "ISO 19005-1. Document management - Electronic document file format for long-term preservation - Part
1: Use of PDF (PDF/A)", and is a file format based on PDF 1.4. It has been standardized as ISO 19005-1, and
is a specialization of PDF, which has been mainly used for printing, for long-term storage. A new part, ISO
19005-2 (PDF/A-2), is currently being prepared.

POP3 (Post Office Protocol 3)

A standard protocol to receive E-mail from the server in which the mail is stored on the Internet or an intranet.

PostScript

A page description language developed by Adobe Systems. It enables flexible font functions and highly-
functional graphics, allowing higher quality printing. The first version called Level 1 was launched in 1985,
followed by Level 2 that enabled color printing and two-byte languages (e.g. Japanese) in 1990. In 1996, Level
3 was released as an update for the Internet access and PDF format as well as gradual improvements in
implementation technologies.

PPM (prints per minute)

This indicates the number of A4 size printouts made in one minute.

Printer Driver

The software to enable you to print data created on any application software. The printer driver for the machine
is contained in the DVD enclosed in the package. Install the printer driver on the computer connected to the
machine.

RAM Disk

Using part of the printer's memory as a virtual disk, you can set any amount of memory from overall printer
memory as a RAM disk in order to use features such as electronic sorting (shortening print time).

Send as E-mail

A function to send the image data stored in the machine as an E-mail attachment. E-mail addresses can be
selected from the list or entered at each time.

SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)

A protocol for E-mail transmission over the Internet or an intranet. It is used for transferring mail between mail
servers as well as for sending mail from clients to their servers.

Status Page

The page lists machine conditions, such as the memory capacity, total number of prints and scans, and paper
source settings.

Appendix-31

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Subnet Mask

The subnet mask is a way of augmenting the network address section of an IP address. A subnet mask
represents all network address sections as 1 and all host address sections as 0. The number of bits in the prefix
indicates the length of the network address. The term "prefix" refers to something added to the beginning and,
in this context, indicates the first section of the IP address. When an IP address is written, the length of the
network address can indicated by the prefix length after a forward slash (/). For example, "24" in the address
"133.210.2.0/24". In this way, "133.210.2.0/24" denotes the IP address "133.210.2.0" with a 24-bit prefix
(network section). This new network address section (originally part of the host address) made possible by the
subnet mask is referred to as the subnet address.When you enter the subnet mask, be sure to set the DHCP
setting to Off.

TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol)

TCP/IP is a suite of protocols designed to define the way computers and other devices communicate with each
other over a network.

TCP/IP (IPv6)

TCP/IP (IPv6) is based on the current Internet protocol, TCP/IP (IPv4). IPv6 is the next-generation Internet
protocol and expands the available address space, which resolves the problem of the lack of addresses under
IPv4, while also introducing other improvements such as additional security functionality and the capacity to
prioritize data transmission.

TWAIN (Technology Without Any Interested Name)

A technical specification for connecting scanners, digital cameras, and other image equipment to the
computers. The TWAIN compatible devices enable to process image data on any relevant application software.
TWAIN is adopted on a large number of graphic software (e.g. Adobe Photoshop) and OCR software.

USB (Universal Serial Bus)2.0

A USB interface standard for Hi-Speed USB 2.0. The maximum transfer rate is 480 Mbps. This machine is
equipped with USB 2.0 for high-speed data transfer.

WIA (Windows Imaging Acquisition)

A function to import images supported after Windows Me/XP from digital cameras and other peripheral
devices.This function replaces what TWAIN used to do; the feature is provided as a part of Windows functions
and improves ease of operation, so that you import images directly to My Computer without using any
application.

Appendix-32

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Index

Index

Numerics LAN Cable 2-5

Power Cable 2-11
1-sided/2-sided Selection 5-8 USB Cable 2-11
Connection Method 2-3
A Continuous Scan
Adjusting Density 5-16 Copy 4-14
Adjustment/Maintenance 8-123 Send 5-19
Backgrnd Density 8-125 Conventions in This Guide xxxiv
Copy Density Adjustment 8-123 Copy
Correcting Fine Black Lines 8-134 Adjusting Density 3-9
Send/Box Density 8-124, 8-126, 8-127 Collate Copying 3-19
Auto Paper Selection Appendix-29 Duplex Copying 3-15
Auto Sleep 2-10, Appendix-29 Offset Copying 3-19
Originals 4-2
B Selecting Image Quality 3-10
Setup 8-69
Bonjour Appendix-29 Zoom Copying 3-12
Bundled Items 2-2 Copy Settings 8-69
Buzzer 8-6 Auto Paper Selection 8-70, 8-71
Paper Selection 8-69
C Quick Setup Registration 8-73
Card Authentication Kit Appendix-4 Copying Functions 4-1
Cassette Counting the Number of Pages
Loading Paper 2-48 Printed 11-29
Paper Size and Media Type 8-13 Counting the Number of Pages Printed
Changing Language 2-11, 8-3 Each Job 11-30
Cleaning Printing a Report 11-33
Separator 9-4, 9-6 Total Job 11-29
Slit Glass 9-3
Color D
Color / Grayscale / Black and White Date/Timer 8-141
Selection 5-18 Auto Panel Reset 8-146
Color mode Date Format 8-143
Color Selection (Copy) 8-38 Date/Time 8-141
Combine Mode Low Power Timer 8-149
2-in-1 Mode 4-11 Time Zone 8-144
4-in-1 Mode 4-12 Default 8-30
Page Boundary Lines 4-12 Backgrnd(Copy) 8-31
Command Center RX 2-36 Backgrnd(Send) 8-32
Connecting Collate/Offset 8-45

Index-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Index

Color Selection (Copy) 8-38 E

Con.scan-ExptFAX 8-33
EcoPrint 8-46 EcoPrint Mode Appendix-30
E-mail Subject/Body 8-43 Copy 4-10
File Format 8-40 Print 8-102
File Name 8-42 E-mail
JPEG/TIFF Print 8-47 Send as E-mail 3-25
Original Image (Copy) 8-34 Emulation Appendix-30
Original Image (Send) 8-36 Selection 8-99
Original Orientation 8-30 Energy Star Program xxxii
Scan Resolution 8-37 Enter E-mail Subject and Body 5-21
XPS FitTo Page 8-48, 8-49 Entry
Zoom 8-41 Body 5-21
Default Gateway Appendix-29 File Name 4-17, 5-20
Default Screen 8-5 Subject 5-21
Density Adjustment Environment xxi
Copy 3-9 Error Handling 8-28
Send 5-16 Error Messages 10-8
Destination 8-158 Expansion Memory Appendix-2
Adding 8-158
Adding a Group 8-164 F
Choosing by One-Touch Key 3-43 File
Choosing from the Address Book 3-41 Format 5-12
Editing 8-168 File Name 4-17
One-touch Key 8-170 FTP Appendix-30
Search 3-42 FTP Encrypted TX 5-29, 5-30
Sending to Different Types of
Destinations (Multi Sending) G
3-44
Device 7-20 GPL xxix
Checking Status 7-20 Grayscale 5-18, Appendix-30
Configuring 7-21
DHCP Appendix-29 H
Document Box 6-1 High Comp.PDF 8-61
Quick Setup Registration 8-83
Document Processor Appendix-28 I
How to Load Originals 2-67
Loading Originals 2-66 Image Quality
Not Supported Originals 2-66 Copy 3-7
Part Names 2-66 Send 5-15
Supported Originals 2-66 Included Guides 2
dpi Appendix-30 Interface Block 8-209
Duplex 3-15, 8-104 IP Address Appendix-30
DVD 2-2 IPP Appendix-30

Index-2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Index

J Setup 8-200
Network
Job Setup 2-15
Available Status 7-2 Network Cable 2-4
Canceling 3-46, 7-19 Connecting 2-5
Checking History 7-8 Network Interface 2-4
Checking Status 7-2 Network Interface Kit Appendix-5
Pause and Resumption 7-19 Network Security 8-185
Sending the Job Log History 7-13 Network Setup
Job Accounting 11-13 Bonjour Settings 8-177
Managing the Copier/Printer Counts FTP (Reception) 8-181
11-21 HTTP 8-181
Restricting the Use of the Machine HTTPS 8-182
11-22 IPP over SSL 8-181
Job Finish Notice 5-27 LAN Interface 8-174
Copy 4-15 LDAP 8-182
Send 5-27 LPD 8-181
NetBEUI 8-181
K NetWare 8-200
KPDL Appendix-30 POP3 (E-mail RX) 8-181
Raw Port 8-181
L Restart Network 8-184
SMTP (E-mail TX) 8-181
Label Appendix-20 SNMP 8-181
LAN Cable TCP/IP (IPv4) 8-175
Connecting 2-5 TCP/IP (IPv6) 8-175, 8-178, 8-179
Legal Information xxvii NW InterfaceSend 8-208
Login 3-2, 11-5
Logout 3-2, 11-5 O
Low Power Mode 2-10
Open SSLeay xxix
M Operation Panel 1-2
Option
Management 11-1 Card Authentication Kit Appendix-4
Job Accounting 11-13 Expansion Memory Appendix-2
User Login Administration 11-2 Network Interface Kit Appendix-5
Monotype Imaging License Agreement Overview Appendix-2
xxxi Paper Feeder Appendix-2
Multi Purpose (MP) Tray Appendix-30 SSD Appendix-4
Paper Size and Media 2-62, 8-16 ThinPrint Option Appendix-5
Multi Sending (Sending to Different Types USB Keyboard Appendix-5
of Destinations ) 3-44 Wireless Network Interface Kit
Appendix-5
N Optional Functions 8-215
NetBEUI Appendix-30 Optional Network 8-196
NetWare 8-200 AppleTalk 8-202

Index-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Index

Bonjour Settings 8-198 Paper Selection 4-4

IPSec 8-199 Cassette 4-4
LAN Interface 8-203 Multi Purpose Tray 4-5
MAC Address Filter 8-204 Part Names 1-1
NetWare 8-200 Platen
Restart Network 8-206 Placing Originals 2-65
TCP/IP Settings 8-196 POP3 Appendix-31
Original PostScript Appendix-31
Loading in the Document Power Cable
Processor 2-66 Connecting 2-11
Placing on the Platen 2-65 Power Off 2-7
Original Orientation Power On 2-7
Copy 4-8 PPM Appendix-31
Document Processor 4-8 Preparation 2-1
Send 5-10 Preparing Cables 2-4
Original Size Indicator Plates 2-65 Printer
Original Size Selection Setup 8-99
Send 5-2 Printer Driver Appendix-31
Original SSLeay License xxx Printer Settings 8-99
Originals Auto Cass.Change 8-115
Copy 4-2 Copies 8-105
Custom 8-8 CR Action 8-111
Setup 8-8 Duplex 8-104
Size Selection 4-2, 5-2 EcoPrint 8-102
Emulation 8-99
P Form Feed Timeout 8-109
Job Name 8-112
Paper LF Action 8-110
Appropriate Paper Appendix-16 Orientation 8-107
Auto Selection 8-23 Override A4/Letter 8-103
Before Loading 2-47 User Name 8-113
Cassette 8-13 Printing 3-21
Custom 8-11 Printing from Applications 3-21
Default Paper Source 8-22 Printing Reports/Sending Notice 8-117
Loading Envelopes 2-53 Font List 8-118
Loading in the Cassettes 2-48 Network Status Page 8-119
Loading in the Multi Purpose Tray 2-51 Optional Network Status 8-118
Multi Purpose Tray 8-16 Service Status Page 8-119
Setup 8-8 Status Page 8-117
Size and Media 2-57, Appendix-13 Transmission Result Reports 8-121
Special Paper 8-24, Appendix-18 Product Library 2-2
Specifications Appendix-15
Weight 8-18 Q
Paper Feeder Appendix-2
Paper Jam 10-16 Quick Setup Screen
Document Processor 10-20 Changing Registration 8-73, 8-75, 8-83

Index-4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Index

R Common functions Appendix-25

Copy functions Appendix-26
Resolution Appendix-26, Appendix-27 Document Processor Appendix-28
Restarting the System 8-173 Environmental Specifications
Appendix-28
S Printer functions Appendix-27
Safety Conventions i Scanner functions Appendix-27
Scan Resolution 5-17 Specifying Destination 3-41
Default settings 8-37 SSD Appendix-4
SD Card Format 8-64
Format 8-65 Status / Job Cancel 7-1
Send Status Page 8-117, Appendix-31
File Format 5-12 Subnet Mask Appendix-32
Image Quality 5-15 Switching the Language 2-11, 8-3
Original Size Selection 5-2 Switching Unit of Measurement 8-27
Sending Size Selection 5-4 Symbols i
Setup 8-75 System Menu 8-1
Sending
Send as E-mail 3-25 T
Send to Folder (FTP) 3-29 TCP/IP Appendix-32
Send to Folder (SMB) 3-29 ThinPrint Option Appendix-5
Sending Functions 5-1 TonerAlert Level 8-68
Sending Settings 8-75 Trade Names xxviii
Default Screen 8-78 TWAIN Appendix-32
Quick Setup Registration 8-75
Send and Forward 8-79 U
Sending Size Selection 5-4
Sending to Different Types of Destinations Unusable Time 8-156
(Multi Sending) 3-44 USB Appendix-32
Separator USB Cable
Cleaning 9-4, 9-6 Connecting 2-11
Setting Date and Time 2-12 USB Interface 2-4
Setup USB Keyboard Appendix-5
Copy 8-69 USB Memory
Date/Timer 8-141 Printing Documents 6-2
NetWare 8-200 Removing 6-7, 6-16
Network 8-174 Saving Documents 6-5
Printer 8-99 TIFF Print 6-3
Send 8-75 XPS FitTo Page 6-4
Sharpness adjustment Appendix-24 User Login Administration 11-2
Sleep 2-9 Adding 11-6
Slit Glass Changing Properties 11-8
Cleaning 9-3 Displaying Network User Property 11-11
SMTP Appendix-31 Enabling/Disabling 11-3
Solving Malfunctions 10-2 Enabling/Disabling Group
Specifications Authentication 11-10

Index-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Index

Login 11-5 Saving documents to Removable USB

Logout 11-5 Memory 6-5
Unknown login user name Job 11-12
Z
W
Zoom Copying
WIA Appendix-32 Auto Zoom 3-12
Wireless Network Interface Kit Appendix-5 Manual Zoom 3-12
WSD Scan 5-25 Preset Zoom 3-12
Zoom Mode
X Copy 3-12, 5-6
Send 5-6
XPS
File formats 5-12, 8-40

Index-6

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 PASSIONATE PEOPLE.
FROM ALL OVER THE WORLD.
KYOCERA Document Solutions Europe B.V. KYOCERA Document Solutions Austria GmbH
Bloemlaan 4, 2132 NP Hoofddorp, Eduard-Kittenberger-Gasse 95, 1230 Vienna,
The Netherlands Austria
Phone: +31-20-654-0000 Phone: +43-1-863380
Fax: +31-20-653-1256 Fax: +43-1-86338-400

KYOCERA Document Solutions Nederland B.V. KYOCERA Document Solutions Nordic AB

Beechavenue 25, 1119 RA Schiphol-Rijk, Esbogatan 16B 164 75 Kista,
The Netherlands Sweden
Phone: +31-20-5877200 Phone: +46-8-546-550-00
Fax: +31-20-5877260 Fax: +46-8-546-550-10

KYOCERA Document Solutions (U.K.) Limited KYOCERA Document Solutions Norge Nuf
Eldon Court, 75-77 London Road, Postboks 150 Oppsal, 0619 Oslo,
Reading, Berkshire RG1 5BS, Norway
United Kingdom Phone: +47-22-62-73-00
Phone: +44-118-931-1500 Fax: +47-22-62-72-00
Fax: +44-118-931-1108
KYOCERA Document Solutions Danmark A/S
KYOCERA Document Solutions Italia S.p.A. Ejby Industrivej 60, DK-2600 Glostrup,
Via Verdi, 89/91 20063 Cernusco s/N.(MI), Denmark
Italy Phone: +45-70223880
Phone: +39-02-921791 Fax: +45-45765850
Fax: +39-02-92179-600
KYOCERA Document Solutions Portugal Lda.
KYOCERA Document Solutions Belgium N.V. Rua do Centro Cultural, 41 (Alvalade) 1700-106 Lisboa,
Sint-Martinusweg 199-201 1930 Zaventem, Portugal
Belgium Phone: +351-21-843-6780
Phone: +32-2-7209270 Fax: +351-21-849-3312
Fax: +32-2-7208748
KYOCERA Document Solutions
KYOCERA Document Solutions France S.A.S. South Africa (Pty) Ltd.
Espace Technologique de St Aubin KYOCERA House, Hertford Office Park,
Route de I’Orme 91195 Gif-sur-Yvette CEDEX, 90 Bekker Road (Cnr. Allandale), Midrand, South Africa
France Phone: +27-11-540-2600
Phone: +33-1-69852600 Fax: +27-11-466-3050
Fax: +33-1-69853409
KYOCERA Document Solutions Russia LLC
KYOCERA Document Solutions Espana, S.A. Botanichesky pereulok 5, Moscow, 129090,
Edificio Kyocera, Avda. de Manacor No.2, Russia
28290 Las Matas (Madrid), Spain Phone: +7(495)741-0004
Phone: +34-91-6318392 Fax: +7(495)741-0018
Fax: +34-91-6318219
KYOCERA Document Solutions Middle East
KYOCERA Document Solutions Finland Oy Dubai Internet City, Bldg. 17,
Atomitie 5C, 00370 Helsinki, Office 157 P.O. Box 500817, Dubai,
Finland United Arab Emirates
Phone: +358-9-47805200 Phone: +971-04-433-0412
Fax: +358-9-47805390
KYOCERA Document Solutions Inc.
KYOCERA Document Solutions 2-28, 1-chome, Tamatsukuri, Chuo-ku
Europe B.V., Amsterdam (NL) Zürich Branch Osaka 540-8585, Japan
Hohlstrasse 614, 8048 Zürich, Phone: +81-6-6764-3555
Switzerland http://www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.com
Phone: +41-44-9084949
Fax: +41-44-9084950

KYOCERA Document Solutions

Deutschland GmbH
Otto-Hahn-Strasse 12, 40670 Meerbusch,
Germany
Phone: +49-2159-9180
Fax: +49-2159-918100

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 KYOCERA Document Solutions Inc. – 2-28, 1-Chome – Tamatsukuri – Chuo-Ku
First edition 2013.

Osaka 540-8585 – Japan – www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.com

2BIKDEN000

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine